Home

Mercury Series

Contents

1. 230 20 2 AP DATA INTERFACE 0 0 0 00 0 90098001009 60960096009600 60 231 21 AP 24 INTEREAGCE 232 22 4 POTS VOICE FXS 232 23 1P SHDSL V INTERFACE 0 0 1 233 24 4P POTS E amp M INTERFACE 0 0 6 234 APPENDIX ORDERING INFORMATION 1 sese eese eas se se ses e 237 B 1 MERCURY 800 ORDER 1 titre 237 2 MERCURY 3600 ORDER 1 nere 240 MERCURY 3600 ORDERING nennen 244 4 MERCURY 3820 ORDERING reis 247 APPENDIX C 220222094401 ve deo oe eo eere Vea 253 APPENDIX D TROUBLE 5 2 sese e eese ess s 255 APPENDIX E GLOSSARY iiie 257 X
2. Performance Monitor Elasped 0007 20 52 PM 15 min 00666 00000 00000 0000000000 00 11 1 00666 00000 00000 0000000000 00 11 1 day 26452 00000 00000 0000000003 07 20 52 1 0 00 0 0 00 0 0 00 Alarm MAJ RCL MIN Configuration LL yes RL no RCRC no TCRC no SIGNAL CCS FRAME FAS CV CV HAUL short 00 N A 0001 0000 ON 0 00 OFF OFF 0 00 OFF OFF 00 3 0002 0000 ON 00 1 0003 0000 ON 0 00 N A 0000 0000 ON CLK YES ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Table UA ES SES 06 1 0 00 0 0 00 0 0E 00 06 1 0 00 0 0 00 0 0E 00 3 6 43 T1 Command Figure 3 43 STAT Command Screen B Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 Purpose Setup parameters W Syntax port CO co Fr fr LI 1 RRL rrI DRL drl SIDLE sig DET sig CHG sig AIS ais B Param 97 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring port Setup the assigned port Select the line code format for the indicated T1 port to AMI Alternate Mark Inverting or B8ZS Bipolar Unframed mode co 0 B8ZS default 1 AMI Fr Select the framing mode to ESF Extend Super Frame D4 also called Super Frame SF or Unframed mode The D4 framing consists of 12 T1 frames and ESF framing consists of 24 T1 frames These two types of super frames are used to enhance the system supervision capabilities When in Unfr
3. 149 A POTS EXS Voice Module te Lade eco ek E e 150 1P SHDSL V alarm 4 1 2 151 The lists of the emulated terminal software 163 The craft port settings for Mercury 800 3600 3820 163 The operations of router module ssssssesseseeeneeeneneennrennennnennnnn nns 165 Description of Router Setting zio oe aec iet etre tuc me etel 168 Descriptions of the 172 NAT Buffer description 174 Example of PPP S Uings a n 178 Example of PPP settings 2 179 IP unnumbered configuration 180 Example of AUX port PPP setting 1 eere nine 181 Example of AUX port PPP setting 2 1 24 01 182 RIP Setup Menu Handle Routing Protocol configuration 188 Descriptions the parameter of Static 190 Most often used port numbers 194 Filter rule menu fields Erro tese cart tt ette ier E 195 Descriptions of System parameters
4. 72 FXO Command 1 212 2 1 000000310 75 FXS Command Screen eene rne 7T Mercury Series User s Manual Rev 1 6 Figure 3 22 Figure 3 23 Figure 3 24 Figure 3 25 Figure 3 26 Figure 3 27 Figure 3 28 Figure 3 29 Figure 3 30 Figure 3 31 Figure 3 32 Figure 3 33 Figure 3 34 Figure 3 35 Figure 3 36 Figure 3 37 Figure 3 38 Figure 3 39 Figure 3 40 Figure 3 41 Figure 3 42 Figure 3 43 Figure 3 44 Figure 3 45 Figure 3 46 Figure 3 47 Figure 3 48 Figure 3 49 Figure 3 50 Figure 3 51 Figure 3 52 Figure 3 53 Figure 3 54 Figure 3 55 Figure 3 56 Figure 3 57 Figure 3 58 Figure 3 59 Figure 3 60 Figure 3 61 IDLE Command Screen 77 IDSL Command Screen eese nennen nnne 79 LINK Command Screen 80 LOGB Command Screen 80 LOGE Command Screen 82 LOGI Command 83 51 83 LOGL Command e a RO RR 84 LOGOUT Command Screen 84 Command Screen 85 Command Screen 85 NET Command Screen 86 Command Screen 87 NMS Comm
5. 205 Descriptions of AUX port parameters sse 206 Descriptions of WAN port 207 Descriptions of TSA parameters 209 Descriptions of Routing Table 209 Descriptions of SNMP 210 Descriptions of Interface status of Monitoring 212 Descriptions of Routing Table of Monitoring menu 212 xvii Mercury Series User s Manual Rev 1 6 Table 5 24 Table 5 25 Table 5 26 Table 5 27 Table A 1 Table A 2 Table A 3 Table A 4 Table A 5 Table A 6 Table A 7 Table A 8 Table A 9 Table A 10 Table A 11 Table A 12 Table A 13 Table A 14 Table A 15 Table A 16 Table A 17 Table A 18 Table A 19 Table A 20 Table A 21 Table A 22 Table A 23 Table A 24 Table A 25 Table A 26 Table A 27 Table B 1 Table B 2 Table B 3 Table C 1 Table D 1 Table E 1 Descriptions of ARP Table of Monitoring 213 Descriptions of Statistics of Monitoring 214 Descriptions of Firmware Upgrade Table of Device Control menu 216 Descriptions of Ping parameters of Information
6. 11 E1 T1 Channelized Routing 12 T1 E1 Fiber Ring Protected Application 12 Path Protected Application 13 Broadcast Multicast Application 14 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS zc rcd reticere ctun nde rete 14 Electrical 14 Timing 33 Operation 33 Power Requirement 33 Power Consumption x cort cd acted deua rs cade e ede 33 Electrarmagnellc atn astute ile 34 34 INSTALEATION 97 UNPACKING ai E 37 SITE SELECTION secs tct T a coh a 38 MERCURY 800 FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTION cesse 38 MERCURY 800 REAR PANEL DESCRIPTION eee 40 V Mercury Series User s Manual Rev 1 6 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 CHAPTER 3 3 1 3 1 1 3 1 2 3 2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 4 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 4 3 3 4 4 3 5 3 6 3 6 1 3 6 2 3 6 3 3 6 4 3 6 5 3 6 6 3 6 7 3 6 8 3 6 9 3 6 10 3 6 11 3 6 12 3 6 13 3 6 14 3
7. 15 Physical haractersuc ot E copie htt 15 Front Panel PED indICator ope eror een desee iet teet deb ene 17 Mob Electrical CharacteriStiC 19 Data module compatibility Table 5 otf th ente i RE bnt gens 19 Compatible hardware and software for Mercury 3600 19 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3820 19 Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 800 22 Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3600 22 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3820 22 Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 800 23 Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3820 24 5232 Network mode up eres oit etude oasis PER eU eeu didus 26 Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 800 28 Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3600 28 IDSL Port time slot assignment incre cene tita eade dete na does enis 30 Compatible hardware and software for Mercury 3600 31 Compatible
8. V1 03 1 16 Supported Table 1 12 Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 800 Chapter 1 Introduction Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3820 Boot Version Flash Version 4 POTS FXO V1 03 V1 07 Supported Table 1 13 Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3820 Caution If a voice card was plugged into Mercury 3820 an additional external 48DC power should be connected at PWR3 socket at rear panel of Mercury 3820 But for Mercury 800 and 3600 no other external power is required Router card Single Router Module Router General Description Router Module can provide TCP IP Protocol and two PPP ports Provides In band TELNET Out band Console port Management Electrical Characteristic e LAN Port Physical Layer Signal IEEE802 3 Electric Signal IEEE802 3 Connector RJ 45 10BaseT e WAN Port AUX port ASYNC Baud 2 4 Kbps to 115 2 Kbps Data 8 Bit start stop Stop 1 1 5 2bit Parity even odd none Flow Control RTS CTS SYNC Baud 2 4 Kbps to 128 Kbps Data Sync PPP Clock external Electric Signal V 24 Connector RJ 45 B Channelized Router Module Router C General Description e Router Module can provide TCP IP Protocol and 32 channels WAN INTERFACE Provides In band TELNET Out band Console port Management Electrical Characteristic Chapter 1 Introduction LAN
9. 226 RS 530 RS 449 Adapting Cable for Mercury 3600 226 PU MGTIACE 5 E E 227 eid S 228 DB2 M 228 IDSL T TOFID US asse cts tn qe ta ca nct ages 228 ccena et cio ane oreet vende 230 Router C Module 1 404000 230 4 FXS rear panel terminal 1 2 4444 441 eene 231 4 FXS rear panel RJ 11 ete 231 cime ELLE 232 DB2 Ur PE 232 4 POTS FXO FXS DB44 to 4 x RJ 11 233 Pin Assignment of RJ 45 Conncetor senses nnecen 234 2W AW AND IMPEDANCE SELECTIOR 236 XV Mercury Series User s Manual Rev 1 6 Table 1 1 Table 1 2 Table 1 3 Table 1 4 Table 1 5 Table 1 6 Table 1 7 Table 1 8 Table 1 9 Table 1 10 Table 1 11 Table 1 12 Table 1 13 Table 1 14 Table 1 15 Table 1 16 Table 1 17 Table 1 18 Table 1 19 Table 1 20 Table 2 1 Table 2 2 Table 2 3 Table 2 4 Table 2 5 Table 2 6 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 Table 3 5 Table 3 6 Table 3 7 Table 3 8 Table 3 9 Table 3 10 Table 3 11 Table 3 12 TABLES General Features of Mercury Series 4 227 5 Electrical Characteristic of E1 it ree
10. 120 1 1 Revertive Protection with Priority 2 11 1 1 nen 122 N 1 Revertive Protection 124 54 dE 127 Ring 128 MAINTENANCE 131 STATUS OF ALARM MESSAGE DESCRIPTION 131 EOC US baia urs detti don fusa 131 Lus 133 Fiber Optical Module Fiber 1 Fiber 2 Fiber 136 High Speed Data Module 2 35 137 50 Low Speed Sync and Async Data 138 Channelized Router amp Non Channelized Router Module 140 IDSL ET MOG UNG sities toda ia deri ace d Mig eden ut us kd dois 141 FXS Voice 00 00 aaae Aa aa ea aaa Pana e nnn 143 SDSE Module Ape sa ra Ri 144 2 AP Data nen 146 A POTS FXO Voice Module e 148 A POTS FXS Voice Modul 23 0 rtr tore en rdv osea nell eds 149 eiusm tratte ttov ue eda p ers 150 PERFORMANCE MONITORING
11. non condensin non condensing 8 8 8 430 W 330 430 W x330 1445 W x320 218 W x206 D Dimension x59 H mm D x44 H D x44 H D x132 H mm mm mm Table 1 1 General Features of Mercury Series Product Purpose and Key Features The Mercury 800 3600 3600 and 3820 are a family of highly versatile digital cross connect systems with SNMP management The Mercury family offers a wide range of system requirement yet maintains the same common set of advanced features Mercury family offers user programmable routing at the level of the individual time slot and thus allows connecting any incoming 64 Kbps time slot to any outgoing 64 Kbps time slot For time slots that carry voice channels 1 conversions can also include the required A law and signaling format conversion In addition the Mercury family supports fractional 1 and T1 applications cross connection of nx64 Kbps channels For these applications user s data is automatically inserted into 1 or T1 frames using the minimum number of time slots Modularity The Mercury family is a series of modularized systems that can be equipped with various types of input output I O modules to provide the required interface for various types of applications For the current module types and their capabilities please refer to Section 1 4 Module Information for more detailed Chassis Types Mercury 360
12. 152 DIAGNOSTIC WITH LOOP TEST FUNCTION cesses 152 Power up 152 el Pete d i edere nes 153 VERIFYING THE MERCURY OPERATION REX PERS EVRREYRRESREFURRETERA 154 Quick Verify the 155 Loopback Dy WING deor ete oda den emet adel beets 155 Using BERT Test Sel iium deca n acute aestas ti Le eer 156 ROUTER CONFIGURATION eee ee eee etae stans ton eee pe tane teat epe 157 SPECIFICATION E ecke Cent Er 157 ifo rir LM 157 Hard Wale TS 158 FEATURE OF ROUTER MODULE 2 52 24 46 20024525 159 APPLICATION OF ROUTER MODULE 160 Viii Mercury Series User s Manual Rev 1 6 5 3 1 Internet ACCESS waste er dte rele ore er e ties 160 5 3 2 IEAINSOSEATN S cose cates tete dmt e es 161 5 4 CONFIGURE ROUTER MODULE FROM 162 5 4 1 Access via Console 162 5 4 2 Access via Telnet Mode i ederet le BERE ERES NUR 163 5 5 NAVIGATING THE TCS INTERFACE ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeees 164 5 6 CONFIGURATION OF ROUTER MODULE 165 5 6 1 The
13. 228 SDSL Interface PIN assignment 222 2 1 1 1 14 212 1 1 4 466 229 Ethernet interface for router module 229 RJ 45 TO DB25 PIN DEFINATION eene 230 Pin definition of Ethernet interface of Router C 230 FXS interface PINASSIQHIMIOM eto es p 230 SCSI II gt DB 25 CABLE PIN 231 4P V24 Interface SCSI II PIN 232 4 POTS FXO FXS Interface DB44 PIN 233 Adaptor cable DB44 to RJ 11 x 4 PIN 233 1P SHDSL V RJ 45 PIN assigntTieri tos etos 233 Mercury 800 Order InforrriatlOln tidie cate ruere kx Re ien 240 Mercury 3600 Order Information 20 22 244 Mercury 3820 Ordering InfOrrmatlOr eire pee dte ee tie Con xl 251 Trouble report RR RARE ER RR CIR RR RN RENS TEXT NR RAE d 253 Trouble Shooting Table teet t Scr erbe tenet dni scene Deu eene gne 255 ECC er 260 xvili Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 1 Introduction ABOUT THIS CHAPTER This chapter introduces the main features and modularity of Mercury family including
14. 7 17 27 37 47 Clear to send 8 18 28 38 48 Request to send 9 19 29 39 49 Data terminal ready 10 20 30 40 50 Signal ground Table A 16 50 Interface SCSI II PIN assignment 1 HEBBHENWHBBHHHHBHBHHHH HEBBHH HBBHHHBBHHHH Figure A 7 SCSI II 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Octo UO OC C qo XC SPCR CPST OLS EO UOC e Te Rene 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Figure A 8 DB25 4 IDSL Interface IDSL can be connected via ISDN U interface using RJ 11 connector Pin definitions are shown below Pin Number Signal Table A 17 IDSL Line pin assignment Figure A 9 IDSL Front Panel 228 A 17 A 18 Appendix A SDSL Interface The SDSL line interface is using a RJ 45 connector The pin out descriptions are shown as follows Pin Number Signal Table A 18 SDSL Interface PIN assignment Router Interface LED Message B ACT The Router Module is active and ready B AUX The protocol layer link status for AUX port B LAN LAN port active and ready When transmitting data on LAN port the LED will flash B WAN The protocol layer link status for WAN port Ethernet port can be connected via Ethernet 10 Base T interface Pin definitions are listed in Table A 19 Pin Number Signal Description TP Driver Output TP Receive Input Table A 19 Ethernet interface for router modul
15. XXXXXXX TS008 xxxxxxx XXXXXXX ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ 5016 2222222 zzzzzzz 2222222 ZZZZZZZ 2222222 2222222 ZZZZZZZ ZZZZZZZ 5024 2222222 22222227 2222222 2222222 2222222 2222222 72222222 2222222 Configuration Link on Console off Checksum Error 0 Code Violation 0 DAC on 32 Count 10 Mercury gt net 11A DAC on 32 Count 10 Figure 3 34 NET Command Screen NMS Command B Accommodate Mercury 3600 B Purpose Set up which router module to handle the SNMP request from the NMS B Syntax NMS port B Param port Port identifier for the indicated router module B Example nms 5a Choose router module located on port5A to process the SNMP request from remote NMS 87 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Mercury gt help nms Usage Setup NMS amp SNMP link port Syntax NMS port Params port router port identifier NOTE view NMS amp SNMP link port if no parameter Mercury gt nms 5a NMS link port 5A Figure 3 35 NMS Command Screen 3 6 34 PM Command B Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 B Purpose Display the contents of the performance monitoring reports for the specified port The 15minute PM and Daily PM reports are available through this command and are based on the data stored in Mercury Series Product memory Syntax PM port VIEW view CLR clr B Param port The port identifier VIEW Display the PM data of the indi
16. 10 0 0 1 30 10 0 0 2 30 Figure 5 23 WAN port Point to Point connection The above diagram is the WAN PPP link configuration of your Router Module could be like follow Site A 10 0 0 1 30 Site B 10 0 0 2 30 Traffic IP ROUTING Traffic IP Routing Types Types Encapsulate Local IP 10 0 0 1 Encapsulate Local IP 10 0 0 2 PPP address lt PPP gt address Net Mask 255 255 255 252 Net Mask 255 255 255 252 Remote IP 0 0 0 0 Remote 0 0 0 0 address address Table 5 7 Example of PPP settings 1 178 Chapter 5 Router Configuration The standard PPP encapsulate can be set up as above table or you can assign the IP to the remote site Site A 10 0 0 1 30 Site B 10 0 0 2 30 Traffic IP Routing Traffic Types IP Routing Types Encapsulate Local IP 0 0 0 0 Encapsulate LocalIP 10 0 02 PPP address lt gt address Net Mask 0 0 0 0 Net Mask 255 255 255 252 Remote 0 0 0 0 Remote 10 0 0 1 address address Table 5 8 Example of PPP settings 2 Note The IP shown this section are examples You should substitute the IP values shown with values that are appropriate for your network The configuration for Table 5 8 is the example to setup the client server mode for WAN PPP The WAN IP at site A will be the remote IP assigned at site B router a B Unnumbered Setting Ethernet
17. RJ 45 CABLE 24AWG 2M Product Code Part Number 33010 00006 Description Main Option Equipment Appendix B Annex Option Equipment DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 35015 00001 00008 40011 00008 40012 MERCURY A uBOARD MERCURY 2V35 BOARD IRJ 45 PHONE BOX 33010 00002 IDB25 M gt V 35 F cable 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 33010 00013 DB25 M gt V 35 M cable 35014 00011 00008 40013 00008 40014 MERCURY 4IDSL BOARD RJ 11 MERCURY X 50 BOARD IDCE gt DCE sync null modem 33010 00022 SCSI II gt 5DB25 F cable 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 35014 00011 00008 40017 MERCURY X 50 BOARD IDCE gt DCE sync null modem 33010 00022 SCSI II gt 5DB25 F cable 33010 00006 DB25 M 2 F cable 1 8m 35014 00011 00008 40018 MERCURY X 50 BOARD IDCE gt DCE sync null modem 33010 00022 SCSIII 25 IDB25 F cable 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 35014 00011 00008 40019 00008 40024 MERCURY 4IDSL BOARD TB MERCURY 4T1 BOARD 1000 IDCE gt DCE sync null modem 33010 00025 IDB25 M gt 4 RJ 48 cable 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE 24AWG 2M 33010 00006 DB25 M 2 F cable 1 8m FIBER B FIBER 1 FIBER 2 XCODE 35015 00001 00008 40025 00008 40026 00008 40027 00008 40028 FIBER WITH 1 1 BACKUP SIGNAL OPTICAL FIB
18. Site A with LAN IP Site B with LAN IP 192 168 1 254 24 172 16 1 1 20 H up p Router Module Router Module Figure 5 24 WAN IP unnumbered setting 179 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 6 4 3 Site A unnumbered Site B unnumbered Traffic IP Routing Traffic IP Routing Types Types Local IP Local IP 192 168 1 254 172 16 1 1 address address Encapsulate Encapsulate Net Mask 255 255 255 255 Net Mask 255 255 255 255 lt PPP gt lt PPP gt Remote IP Remote IP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 address address Table 5 9 IP unnumbered configuration IP unnumbered configuration allows you to enable IP processing on a serial interface without assigning it an explicit IP address Configure the PPP Local IP Address the same as the Router LAN IP and assign Net Mask IP to 255 255 255 255 will now enable the WAN IP unnumbered Setting up the Auxiliary PPP link Configuration MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 System PPP FR RIP Route_Table Security NAT Filter SNMP DHCP Setup LAN Local IP SubNetMask amp WAN Protocol amp AUX IP SubNetMask Remote IP left gt right TAB next item Enter select ESC previous menu Traffic Types IP Routing LAN IP Address LAN IP NetMask 172 16 14 254 255 255 240 0 WAN Protocol PPP AUX Port Speed Enable Sync External AUX Local IP Address 100 0 0 1 AUX IP NetMask 255 255 255 0 AUX Re
19. 219 RJ 45 to DB 9 Adapter for Mercury 800 3820 Craft 221 PPP port pin assignment for Mercury 800 3820 0 221 Craft port pin assignment for Mercury 600 222 Craft port pin assignment for Mercury 600 222 Alarm port pin assignment for Mercury 800 3600 3820 222 On Board Ethernet port for Mercury 800 3820 222 On Board E1 120 Ohm port for Mercury 800 222 4 1 4 1 interface pin assignment 2 22221 1 1 1 14 144 223 RJ 48 1 1 pin definillobi cote t tib e inicie dod 223 SCSI I DB 25 gt V 35 CABLE PIN definition 223 Single port V 35 PIN definition for Mercury 3600 224 Single Port RS 530 PIN definition for Mercury 3600 225 X 21 PIN definition for Mercury 3600 22222 2 2 14 22224 226 V 36 5 449 PIN definition for Mercury 600 227 card 8 pin terminal block 227 X 50 Interface SCSI II PIN assignment sese 228 IDSL ine piri assignment s 5
20. IRJ 45 PHONE BOX Appendix B Main Option Equipment 50001 00059 AC DC POWER I P 110 230V 33001 00001 POWER CORD 3 PIN O P 5V 6A 10A 125V 6 FEET 50001 00060 DC DC POWER 48 O P 5V 6A Table B 3 Mercury 3820 Ordering Information Product Code Part Number Description Annex Option Equipment 251 Appendix C Appendix C Trouble Report Please describe 1 Testing Network Structure 2 Configuration 3 Testing Network Equipment 4 Trouble Description TAINET COMMUNICATION SYSTEM CORP FAX 886 2 2658 3232 E MAIL sales Gtainet net Table C 1 Trouble report 253 Appendix D Appendix D Trouble Shooting Trouble Shooting Table 1 Configured parameter values are lost after equipment restart When user modifies or changes the parameters the user should save the configurations in the flash memory by entering the Save Configuration menu and then reboot the system by entering the Reboot menu 2 Console Telnet Web User Name and Password When accessing the device through Telnet or the Web the user will be prompted to enter the password User can try the default user name root and password root to log in 3 Access denied There are several conditions that will disable user s access to the device via Console Telnet or the Web Message Solution Incorrect user The password entered is incorrect Check the user name
21. 71 res Frame Relay j Switch Frame Relay Switch Frame Relay Network Frame Relay Switch Bridging and Routing Access Configuration gu Mercury 3600 CSU DSU or Modem CSU DSU 4 Frame Relay Manipulation Frame Relay via Mercury Series Product This section shows you how to configure Router Module to act as Bridge perform Internet routing set up RIP Bridging Ethernet Setup Bridging is based on the forwarding decision using the MAC Media Access Control or hardware address while routing does it on the network layer IP or IPX address Compared to routing bridging generates more traffic for the same network layer protocol and it also demands more CPU cycles and memory For efficiency reasons run bridging mode to support protocols other than IP on your network Ethernet ap SEES Site A with LAN IP 192 168 0 1 24 Traffic Type Bridging e xDSL Modem Router Module Figure 5 32 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 WAN IP 0 0 0 0 Remote WAN IP 0 0 0 0 Site B with LAN IP 192 168 0 2 24 Traffic Type Bridging Lease Line xDSL Modem Router Module Ethernet Application of Bridging Ethernet In bridging mode you can still assign a specific IP to Router LAN interface this will 185 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 6 5 2 allow you to telnet into Router Module for further configuration Bridging function can
22. Major 5 5 Severely Errored Seconds Counting Severely Errored Seconds over 1 hour threshold Unavailable Second Counting unavailable Second over 1 hour threshold Informative alert Informative alert Major Major 1D ES Errored Seconds Counting Errored Seconds over day threshold Informative alert Major 1D SES Severely Errored Seconds Counting Severey Errored Seconds over 1 day threshold Informative alert Major 1D UA Unavailable Second Counting Unavailable Second over 1 day threshold Informative alert Major RCL A Receive Carrier Loss on Primary link Receive carrier data loss from the remote FOM module For Fiber B module only Problem at unstable clock source Alarm Minor RCL B Receive Carrier Loss on Backup link Receive carrier data loss from the remote FOM module For Fiber B module only Problem at unstable clock source Alarm Minor Frame Eirr Frame Error Detected the particular framing error occurs on the Rx Have the fiber link checked Alarm Minor R LOS Remote fiber LOS Problem at the remote equipment Alarm Minor Table 4 3 High Speed Data Module 2 V35 Fiber Optical module alarm message Table 4 4 lists the alarm messages generated by the 2 V35 module specifi
23. Table A 8 4E1 4T1 interface pin assignment 1 2 4 and T1 2 4C B RJ 48 pin definition for Interface 1 Receiver 2 Receiver 3 4 Transmit 5 Transmit 6 7 E 8 Table 9 RJ 48 pin definition 2P V35 Interface The 2P V35 interface uses a SCSI II D sub50 connector Pin descriptions are listed in the following table SCSI II pin number Name V 35 Function Pin DB 25 1 26 1 FG A Chassis ground 7 32 7 SG B Signal ground 4 29 4 RTS C Request To Send 5 30 5 CTS D Clear To Send 6 31 6 DSR E Data Set Ready 8 33 8 DCD F Data Carrier Detect 20 45 20 DTR H Data Terminal Ready 22 47 22 RI Ring Indicator 3 28 3 RD R Receive Data a 16 41 16 T Receive Data b 17 42 17 RCLK V Receive Timing a 9 34 9 X Receive Timing b 2 27 2 SD P Transmitted Data a 14 39 14 S Transmitted Data b 24 49 24 EXC U Terminal Timing a 11 36 11 W Terminal Timing b 15 40 15 TCLK Y Transmit Timing a 12 37 12 AA Transmit Timing b 18 43 18 TCC DCE Timing a 21 46 21 DCE Timing b Table A 10 SCSI IIDDB 25 2 V 35 CABLE PIN definition 223 Appendix A A 10 The V 35 single port interface for Mercury 3600 uses a 34 pin standard connector Pin Figure A 1 1P V35 Interface descriptions are shown in the following table Pin number Description Chassis ground Pin number SC
24. 1H UA Unavailable Second Counting unavailable Second over 1 hour threshold Informative alert Major 1D ES Errored Seconds Counting Errored Seconds over 1 day threshold Informative alert Major 1D SES Severely Errored Seconds Counting Severely Errored Seconds over 1 day threshold Informative alert Major 1D UA Unavailable Second Counting Unavailable Second over 1 day threshold Informative alert Major ALM OFF Alarm Off Alarm report has been switch off at port Informative message no State action required Minor ALM amp DAC OFF Alarm and DAC Off Alarm report and DAC function has been switch off at specified port Informative message no State action required Minor Table 4 12 4 POTS FXO voice module alarm message 4 POTS FXS Voice Module Table 4 13 lists the alarm messages generated by the 4 POTS FXS voice module specifies their class Major or Minor type Alarm Performance Monitoring and State and explains their meaning Message Description Corrective Actions Type Class 15 ES Errored Seconds Counting Errored Seconds over 15 minutes threshold Informative alert P M Major 149 Chapter 4 Maintenance Message Description Corrective Actions Type
25. 0 force on 1 on when sync 2 remote RTS 3 off NOTE X50 5C 5 channels X50 4C 4 channels X50 2C 2 channels ONLY channel 1 2 of X50 4C and X50 2C support async mode speed 19200 ONLY valid for channel 1 2 channel 3 SHOULD be disabled if channel 1 select speed 19200 channel 4 SHOULD be disabled if channel 2 select speed 19200 ONLY X50 2C support HC PH DACS functions Mercury gt x50 la 1 mod 0 spd 3 Mercury gt x50 la 2 mod 0 spd 4 Mercury gt stat la TYPE X50_5C CLK NO ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Cross Connect Table TSO000 XXXXXX Configuration System Status SYNC LOSS REMOTE SIGNALLING 0 LOCAL SIGNALLING RTS Channel Status 1 MODE sync RTS Off DCD On when sync 5 DEVICE DTE CLOCK Normal SPEED 9600 LL No RL No 2 MODE sync RTS Off DCD On when sync 5 DEVICE DTE CLOCK Normal SPEED 19200 LL No RL No 3 MODE sync RTS Off DCD On when sync 5 DEVICE DTE CLOCK Normal SPEED stop LL No RL No 4 MODE sync RTS Off DCD On when sync 5 DEVICE DTE CLOCK Normal SPEED stop LL No RL No 5 MODE sync RTS Off DCD On when sync 5 DEVICE DTE CLOCK Normal SPEED stop LL No RL No Figure 3 51 X 50 Command Screen 3 6 50 XC Command B Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 108 3 6 51 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring B Purpose This port assignment performs the cross connections of all the time slots between two ports Syntax XC mode porta portb B Param
26. FXS port Tx direction relativc gain tgain 0 0 dBr Tgain tgain FXS port Rx direction relative gain 0 0 Table 3 7 Command Description Default Setting Setup X 50 card channel Sync or Async mode mod 0 Sync Setup channel speed 2400 to 19200 spd 0 stop Setup channel DCD signal dcd 2 follow Remote RTS Setup channel CTS signal cts 1 follow Local RTS Setup channel device type dev 0 DTE type Channel clock polarity inv 0 Normal type Signaling action sig 0 signaling 0 Enable local loopback act 0 disable Enable remote loopback act 0 disable Setup hook channel hc 0 no hook channel Setup Phase number Table 38 X 50 Command ph 0 phase 0 Description Default Setting Setup the mode of SDSL card mod 1 NTU Enable the loopback testing test 0 Normal Setup the Framing mode of SDSL card Table 3 9 SDSL Command fr 0 frame mode Description Default Setting DATA port TYPE type Setup the interface type of 2 4P Data card it supports RS530A RS530 X21 V35 type 0 N A port CTS act Clear to Send Signal act 1 signal active Data Set Ready Signal act 1 signal active Data Carrier Detect Signal act 1 signal active Ring Indicator Signal act 0 signal inactive Clock type for the connected device dev 0 DT
27. Message Description Corrective Actions Type Class LOL Loss of Link Local lost of synchronization alarm on the specified link 1 Check cable connections to the link connector 2 Check line and or other communication equipment providing the link to the specified data module 3 Replace the data module Alarm Major Chapter 4 Maintenance Message Description Corrective Actions Type Class 15 ES Errored Seconds Counting Errored Seconds over 15 minutes threshold Informative alert P M Major 15 SES 15 UA Severely Errored Seconds Counting Severely Errored Seconds over 15 minutes threshold Unavailable Second Counting Unavailable Second over 15 minutes threshold Informative alert Informative alert P M Major Major 1H ES Errored Seconds Counting Errored Seconds over 1 hour threshold Informative alert Major 1H SES Severely Errored Seconds Counting Severely Errored Seconds over hour threshold Informative alert P M Major 1H UA Unavailable Second Counting unavailable Second over 1 hour threshold Informative alert Major 1D ES Errored Seconds Counting Errored Seconds over day threshold Informative alert Major 1D SES Severely Errored Seconds Counting Severe
28. 00010 20003 MERCURY 3820 BASE UNIT 3820 00010 20004 MERCURY 3820 BASE UNIT WITH DC 247 Appendix B Product Code Part Number 00008 40002 Description MERCURY 4E1 BOARD 1200 Main Option Equipment Annex Option Equipment 33010 00025 DB25 M gt 4 RJ 48 cable 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE 24AWG 2M 33010 00006 DB25 M 2 F cable 1 8m 35015 00001 00008 40002 MERCURY 4T1 BOARD 100Q IRJ 45 PHONE BOX 33010 00025 IDB25 M gt 4 RJ 48 cable 33008 00010 IRJ 45 CABLE 24AWG 2M 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 35015 00001 00008 40004 MERCURY 4E1 BOARD 750 45 PHONE BOX 33010 00024 DB25 M gt 8BNC cable 33010 00026 DB25 M 2 8BNC cable F 09100 60047 IBNC F gt F connector 33010 00006 00008 40005 MERCURY 2E1 BOARD 750 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 33010 00024 DB25 M gt SBNC cable 33010 00026 DB25 M 2 8BNC cable F 09100 60047 IBNC F gt F connector 33010 00006 00008 40006 MERCURY 2E1 BOARD 1200 DB25 M 2 F cable 1 8m 33010 00025 IDB25 M gt 4 RJ 48 cable 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE 24AWG 2M 33010 00006 DB25 M 2 F cable 1 8m 35015 00001 T1 2CB 00008 40007 MERCURY 2 1 BOARD 100Q 45 PHONE BOX 33010 00025 IDB25 M gt 4 RJ 48 cable 33008 00010
29. DACS Command Line Environment Version 1 88 Cc gt Copyright Tainet Communication System Corp Tue Nov 29 11 08 30 2005 WARNING monitor mode only use LOGIN command for access mode Mercury Figure 3 1 Mercury start up screen Monitoring Mode Under Monitoring mode it only allows user to view the current alarm history such as port status and performance monitoring for each ports Any modification of the settings is forbiddance in this mode The Help message is shown below 49 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Mercury gt help Help Message ABOUT About Mercury 100 700 800 ALM View Clear Alarm History CLS Clear Screen HELP Help Message LOGIN Enter Access Mode LOGOUT Enter Monitor Mode PM Performance Monitor STAT View Port Status NOTE 1 HELP command for command table or syntax 2 port identifier 1A 1B 1C 1D 2A 4A 5A Figure 3 2 Mercury Monitoring Mode Screen Mercury 800 3 3 2 Access Mode To ensure the system works normally the Login ID and Password are required for operator with supervisor status to control all sessions in Access mode After entering into the Access mode supervisor has full authority to operate Mercury The default Login ID TAINET and Password be changed using internal commands The Help message under Access mode is shown below Note The default Login ID and Password for Mercury Family Login ID Login Password Mercury 800 TAINET 800 Me
30. Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 Figure 1 4 Figure 1 5 Figure 1 6 Figure 1 7 Figure 1 8 Figure 1 9 Figure 1 10 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 16 Figure 3 17 Figure 3 18 Figure 3 19 Figure 3 20 Figure 3 21 Mercury Series User s Manual Rev 1 6 FIGURES SEE ee EP pte 7 Transport of T1 frame over E1 transmission 8 Channel relocation and Digital Cross Connect Application 9 Fractional 1 and E1 Access 6 10 T1 E1 Drop amp Insert for Data amp 9298 000 10 TDM Modular Integrated Access 11 E1 T1 Channelized Routing 12 T1 E1 Fiber Ring Protected Application 12 T1 E1 Fiber Path Protected Application 13 Broadcast Multicast Application 14 Front Panel view of Mercury 800 isst reb pet bo etas ds 38 Rear Panel view of Mercury 800 ueste nnn innen 40 Front Panel view of Mercury 3600 2 22 1 41 Front
31. INV TxC and RxC clock polarity o inv 0 normal default 1 inverted SIG Signaling action o sig 0 0 default 1 1 2 RTS state o LL Local loopback RL Remote loopback act 0 disable default 1 enable HC Hook channel 0 no hook default 1 2 channel 107 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Phase number ph 0 4 default 0 B Example X50 1A 1 MOD 0 SPD 3 X50 1A 2 MOD 0 SPD 4 e Setup X50 5C card that located on slot 1A channel 1 to Sync mode with speed 9600bps and channel 2 to Sync mode with speed 19200bps for this example X50 5C only supports Sync mode and when channel 2 is set to 19200bps then channel 4 cannot be used and must be disabled Mercury gt help x50 Usage Setup X 50 MUX parameters Syntax X50 port chan MOD mod SPD spd DCD dcd CTS cts DEV dev INV inv SIG sig LL act RL act HC hc PH ph Params port port identifier chan channel number MOD channel mode SPD channel speed DCD channel DCD signal CTS channel CTS signal DEV channel device type INV channel clock polarity SIG signalling action LL local loopback RL remote loopback HC hook channel PH phase number sig 0 10 1 1 2 RTS state inv 0 normal 1 inverted cts 0 force on 1 local RTS dev 0 DTE 1 DCE act O disable 1 enable he 0 no hook 1 2 channel ph 0 4 mod 0 sync 1 7 2 async8 3 async9 spd 0 stop 1 2400 2 4800 3 9600 4 19200
32. Informative alert PM Major Counting Severely Errored Seconds over 1 day threshold 1D UA Unavailable Second Informative alert PM Major Counting Unavailable Second over 1 day threshold TXS Transmit Elastic Store Slip Problem at unstable clock Alarm Minor Detected Tx clock slip source RXS Receive Elastic Store Slip Problem at unstable clock Alarm Minor Detected Rx clock slip source ALM OFF Alarm Off Alarm report has Informative message State Minor been switch off at specified action required port ALM amp DA Alarm and DAC Off Alarm Informative message no State Minor C Opr DAC function has action required been switch off at specified port Table 4 4 2 V35 module alarm message X 50 Low Speed Sync and Async Data Module Table 4 5 lists the alarm messages generated by the X 50 module specifies their class 138 Chapter 4 Maintenance Major or Minor type Alarm Performance Monitoring and State and explains their meaning Message Description Corrective Actions Type Class LOS Loss of Synchronous Local 1 Check cable connections Alarm Major lost of synchronization alarm to the link connector on the specified link 2 Check line and or other communication equipment providing the link to the specified data module 3 Replace the data module FAS Frame Alignment 1 Check cable connectio
33. LAN An IP address net mask also 32 bits written in dotted decimal IP NetMask notation is used in conjunction with an IP address to specify which bits of the address make up the network part and which make up the host part A one 1 in a mask bit location means the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network value a zero 0 means the corresponding bit is part of the host value Default The Default Gateway IP address also 32 bits written in dotted Gateway decimal notation When Channelize Router Module receives a packet for an unknown destination it forwards that packet to the default gateway as long as has been defined SNMP Agent Simple Network management protocol Enable or Disable SNMP V1 agent Support ISO standard MIB II Telnet Enable or Disable the TELNET management of the Module Front Panel Enable or Disable user change the setting from LCD display In some Device Platform not supply Front Panel function like Mercury 3600 etc Console Type your password The password can be up to eight characters Password in length Telnet Type your TELNET username Username The username can be up to eight characters in length Telnet Type your TELNET password Password The password can be up to eight characters in length Table 5 16 Descriptions of System parameters 5 7 3 2 AUX port Setup The built in Ch Router for Mercury 3820 supports AUX port The AUX port works by PPP encapsulation User may press the
34. Mercury Series T1 Equipment Mercury Series Figure 1 1 T1 E1 converters The user in accordance with the specific requirements of each system can select the conversion services below Transparent full duplex transfer of data from all the time slots to the corresponding 1 time slots and vice versa and the addition of the appropriate frame synchronization and housekeeping signals as specified by the applicable standards The user can define the channels time slots to be transferred from trunk to trunk to instruct the Mercury system to transfer transparently the information carried in these time slots they are defined as data time slots The Mercury system inserts a user selectable idle code in empty time slots B When the equipment that generates the or E1 line signal is a voice multiplexer the Mercury system can perform A law u law conversion in accordance with ITU T Rec G711 A law u law module requires The conversion can be performed on all the channels or on channels individually selected by the user for this purpose the user defines the time slots for which A law u law conversion is desired as voice time slots 27 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 2 2 In addition to A law p law conversion the Mercury system can also perform conversion of the signaling formats Signaling conversion is performed when robbed bit signaling is used on the T1 trunk the signaling information carried by the robb
35. haul 0 short haul E1 port SIDLE sig Signal Idle code sig 09h El port DET sig Signal Detect Number sig 00h port CHG sig Signal Change Number sig 00h E1 port AIS ais AIS Alarm Indication Signal ais 0 disable Table3 4 command Description Default Setting Line coding B8ZS Bipolar Unframed mode or AMI Alternate Mark Inverting co 0 B8ZS coding ESF Extend Super Frame DF also called Super Frame SF or Unframed mode fr 0 ESF Line driver Line Built Out LBO 11 1 133ft Start Stop remote loopback rr1 0 stop Enable Disable the RRL function can be requested by remote site drl 1 on Signal Idle code sig 09h Signal Detect Number sig 00h Signal Change Number sig 00h DSL Card always in AIS Alarm Indication Signal Table 3 5 Command LT mode ais 0 disable Description Default Setting IDSL card operation mode op 0 link Request Remote Loopback rdl 0 normal Table 3 6 IDSL Command Command Description Default Setting FXS port R r FXS card line impedence r 0 600 Ohm FXS port DL dl Digital loop back testing dl 0 disable FXS port TTX ttx Teltex tone ttx 0 ttx off FXS port RING ring Ring frequency and cadency 54 ring 4 25Hz 1 sec on 2 sec off Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring
36. z 1 Pic gt i f 0 4 H Protect Loop n ra p a Figure 3 65 N 1 Revertive Proction Actions on Port 1A Actions on Port 1C Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm off gt on on gt off off gt on on gt off Run profile 1 Run profile 2 Run profile 3 Run profile 4 xc 1b 2b xc 1b 1a xc 1d 2b xc 1d 1c cp 1c sw 0 cp 1c sw 1 cp 1a sw 0 1p 1a sw 1 Table 3 18 Alarm status for CP Command Configurations Mercury A e Clk int Setup to internal clock Mercury B e 1 Setup the master clock received from port the slave clock is from port 1C Mercury A amp B e Xclbla Cross port to lA e 1 1 Cross port 1D to Cp la off 2 1 sw 1 Enable the call profile facility on port 1A If Major or Minor alarm is detected system will execute profile 1 and change the traffic from Main Loop to Protect Loop If the alarm is detected on port system will execute profile 2 to change the traffic back to Main Loopl e Cp lc off 4 on 3 sw 1 Enable the call profile facility on port 1C If Major or Minor alarm is detected system will execute profile 3 and change the traffic from Main Loop to Protect Loop If the alarm is detected on port system will execute profile 4 to change the traffic back to Main Loop2 Profiles saved in both Mercury A amp B 125 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Logb Starting logging command scripts Xc 1b 2b e Cros
37. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 37 sub menu of setting the Static routes Static routes are those routes that you define in the Router Module manually Static routes exist permanently unless you change them You may use static routes to 189 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 6 5 4 5 6 6 establish fixed connections and to augment the RIP routing table The maximum capacity of Router Module routing index list can number up to 15 Field Description Destination This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID Net Mask Enter the subnet mask for this destination Next Enter the IP address of the next hop router This is an immediate neighbor of your Mercury or Tainet WANpro product that will forward the packet to the destination On the LAN the next hop must be a router on the same segment as your Mercury or Tainet WANpro product over WAN the next hop must be the IP address of one of the remote nodes Metric The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost and has a minimum of 1
38. Class 15 SES Severely Errored Seconds Counting Severely Errored Seconds over 15 minutes threshold Informative alert P M Major 15 UA Unavailable Second Counting Unavailable Second over 15 minutes threshold Informative alert P M Major 1H ES Errored Seconds Counting Errored Seconds over 1 hour threshold Informative alert P M Major 1H SES Severely Errored Seconds Counting Severely Errored Seconds over 1 hour threshold Informative alert P M Major 1H UA Unavailable Second Counting unavailable Second over 1 hour threshold Informative alert P M Major 1D ES Errored Seconds Counting Errored Seconds over 1 day threshold Informative alert P M Major 1D SES Severely Errored Seconds Counting Severely Errored Seconds over 1 day threshold Informative alert P M Major 1D UA Unavailable Second Counting Unavailable Second over 1 day threshold Informative alert P M Major ALM OFF Alarm Off Alarm report has been switch off at port Informative message no action required State Minor ALM amp DAC OFF Alarm and DAC Off Alarm report and DAC function has been switch off at specified port Informative message no action required State Minor 4 1 13 Table 4 13 4 POTS FXS Voice Module 1P SHDSL V
39. Figure 3 8 Alm Command Screen Bert Command Accommodate Mercury 3600 3820 B Purpose Setup and View DACS BERT Syntax BERT err CLR port sts ets TP pat UP usr TM time Param None To view status and BER 0 stop BERT 1 255 insert error number CLR Reset BERT port Port identifier O sts Start time slot ets End time slot TP Test pattern type UP User pattern byte TM Test period pat 0 All 1s 1 2420 1 Modified QRSS 2 31 2 5 1 PRBS 3 63 2 6 1 PRBS 59 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring 3 6 5 4 511 2 9 1 PRBS V 52 default test pattern 5 511 2 9 1 PRBS reversed 6 2047 2 11 1 PRBS 0 151 7 2047 2 11 1 PRBS reversed 8 2 15 1 PRBS 0 151 noninverted 9 2 20 1 PRBS V 57 10 2420 1 PRBS CB113 CB114 11 2423 1 PRBS 0 151 noninverted 12 ALT 010 alternating 1s and Os usr 0 255 time 0 Continus default value 1 1Minute 2 15 Minutes 3 30 Minutes 4 1 Hour 5 24 Hours Boot Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 B Purpose Simulate the sequence when powering up the system This will perform a complete hardware reset self testing reload the initial profile if specified Some settings will be lost if not saved into profile Syntax BOOT S H B Param None Reboot command supported for Mercury 3600 ns Software reboot for Mercury 800 3600 3820 Hardware reboot for Me
40. Mode There are 4 modes for selection e L low latency is for some case that you need to transmit data with lower delay but does not care about the data internal structure e frame integrity is for sometimes the transmitted data is in serial data type and need to keep the integrity of the serial data default e V voice conversion is to convert the voice signal and its signaling while the A u card is inserted e I idle is to clear the original cross connected table and return to the idle mode porta the indicated source porta portb the indicated destination portb B Example XC 4a port 3A cross connect to port 4A XV 3a view port 3A time slot assignment table XCI3a4a clear the cross connection between port and 4A Mercury gt help xc Usage Setup Connection Port Syntax XC mode porta portb Params mode L low latency F frame integrity V voice conversion I idle porta port identifier portb port identifier Notes 1 default mode is frame integrity if not specified 2 make sure you have installed A u conversion card if voice conversion mode is selected Mercury xc 3a 4a Mercury xv 3a ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Port 3A 4A 000 4 001 4A 002 4 003 4A 004 4 005 4A 006 4A 007 4 008 4 009 4 010 4A 011 4 012 4A 013 4A 014 4 015 4 016 4A 017 4A 018 4 019 4A 020 4 021 4 022 4A 023 4 024 4 025 4A 026 4 027 4A 028 4A 029 4A 030 4A 031 low latency frame integrity voice conve
41. di 0 0 2 16KHz ttx on 0 1 17 2 1 on 3sec off 2 22 Hz 1sec on 2sec off 3 22 2 1 on 3sec off 4 25 2 1 on 2sec off 5 6 7 0 0 1 25 2 1 on 3sec off 30 Hz 1sec on 2sec off 7 30 Hz 1sec on 3sec off O0dBr 1 1dBr 2 2dBr 3 3dBr 4 A4dBr 5 5dBr 0dBr 1 1dBr 2 2dBr 3 3dBr 4 A4dBr 5 5dBr 6 6dBr ring 4 ttx 2 tgain 0 rgain 2 tgain rgain Mercury fxs 1a r Mercury stat 1a TYPE 4FXS_D CLK NO ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Cross Connect Table TSOOO xxxxxxx Configuration MODE terminate STATUS idle PCM CODING A law DL no IMPEDANCE 9000hm START loop start RING 25Hz l1sec on 2sec off TX GAIN OdBr RX GAIN 2dBr TTX 16KHz ttx Figure 3 21 FXS Command Screen 3 6 19 Idle Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 Purpose Edit the transmitted idle code when DSO time slot is in idle mode Syntax IDLE code B Param None View the current idle code code Hexadecimal value between 00 and FF B Example o IDLE View the current idle code o IDLE ff The idle time slot will be filled in OXFF code Mercury gt help idle Usage Setup idle code Syntax IDLE code Params code hexadecimal value between 00 and FF NOTE view idle code if no parameter Mercury gt idle idle code 7f Mercury gt idle ff idle code ff Figure 3 22 IDLE Command Screen 3 6 20 IDSL Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 77 Chapter 3 Configuration amp
42. e Refer to ITU T Recommendation interface Timeslot Allocation User defined any time slot 0 31 to any time slot mapping Clock Source e Can be set to derived external clock from received port A B C or D Compatibility Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 800 2P Data card 4P Data card Boot version Flash Version V1 03 1 16 Supported Not Support Table 1 6 module compatibility Table Compatible hardware and software for Mercury 3600 Hardware Compatible Flash ROM 2P Data card 4P Data card version Software V1 0 V1 xx 2M Not support Not support V2 0 V5 04 4M Not support Supported V2 0 V5 10 4M Supported Supported Note card and V5 10 or above supports 2P Data card Only Hardware version V2 0 and Software V5 04 or above supports 4P Data Table 1 7 Compatible hardware and software for Mercury 3600 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3820 Boot version Flash Version 2P Data card 4P Data card V1 03 V1 07 Supported All supported Note All released Boot and Flash version support 4P Data card Table 1 8 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3820 19 Chapter 1 Introduction 4 FXS card 4 FXS 4 FXS D General Description 4 ports FXS voice card Electrical Characteristic Digitizing technique 64 Kbps A law PCM codi
43. fp Params port port identifier fp front panel Mercury xv 3a ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Port 3A 1 001 XXXXXX XXXXXX 4A 021 4A 022 4A 023 4A 024 4A 025 4 026 4 027 4A 028 4A 029 4A 030 xxxxxx XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX low latency frame integrity voice conversion o loopback x idle z DACS ch loss amp combined channel Mercury xv 1 ACTIVE ALM amp DAC low latency frame integrity voice conversion o loopback x idle z DACS ch loss amp combined channel Mercury xv 4a ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Port 4A XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX 011 012 3A 013 018 019 020 xxxxxx low latency frame integrity voice conversion o loopback x idle z DACS ch loss amp combined channel Mercury xv fp low latency frame integrity voice conversion loopback x idle z DACS ch loss amp combined channel Figure 3 55 XV Command Screen Explanation of cross connect symbols The XV command is for displaying the cross connect table for the indicated port And following are the explanation of cross connect symbols that will indicate different actions of each time slots on that port B lo
44. 1 1 5 1 1 6 1 1 7 1 1 8 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 1 2 4 1 2 5 1 2 6 1 2 7 1 2 8 1 2 9 1 2 10 1 3 1 3 1 1 3 2 1 3 3 1 3 4 1 3 5 1 3 6 1 4 CHAPTER 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 Mercury Series User s Manual Rev 1 6 CONTENTS INTRODUCTION 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION en cap ise ise eat inen deinen 1 General Featres tc ete b e e o n Hte t Re ER eR ni 3 Purpose and Key Features cene nete 5 es edt Eso teta TT 5 Chassis Dy DES rrt 5 Handling of Alarm and Performance 6 System Managers it soc cs tattoo te Goat ect tac Sub 6 Craft Terminal 6 Remote Management using Telnet 6 GENERAL APPLICATION M 7 TVET Converter eere reete ete te lul emp eb pter taedet ere ies 7 Transport of T1 frame over E1 Transmission 2 8 Channel Relocation Digital Access and Cross Connect 9 Fractional T1 and E1 Access 0 00 01 1001 000 10 T1 E1 Drop Insert and Bypass for Data amp 10 TDM Modular Integrated Access
45. 3 6 22 3 6 23 3 6 24 3 6 25 3 6 26 3 6 27 3 6 28 3 6 29 3 6 30 3 6 31 3 6 32 3 6 33 3 6 34 3 6 35 3 6 36 3 6 37 3 6 38 3 6 39 3 6 40 3 6 41 3 6 42 3 6 43 3 6 44 3 6 45 3 6 46 3 6 47 3 6 48 3 6 49 3 6 50 3 6 51 3 6 52 3 6 53 3 6 54 3 6 55 3 7 3 7 1 3 7 2 Mercury Series User s Manual Rev 1 6 e S erolesiosF loo 77 IDSL COMMA Gee ELEME 77 LINK Command E Let 79 Logb COMMANA 80 80 Loge COMMUN EE 81 Egi C ORM ANG a 82 k gin Command 83 Logli Command 83 LOGOUT Command 84 Logt COMMaANG so 84 Lo r COMMANA m 85 a n 85 Ea 86 5 E 87 eruta Mee 88 RP Command acces Pr b er RE QN E HER SPYEE heeds 89 5530 2 e e ER ERE 91 rief 92 DECC COMMANG 5 93 Sece Command mt rta exec ve YR Feet b fe wei aotem 94 SHDSE Comrmiand eie RR REX ER RE REX EXE ECKE Ye FERE RE Eee RE PER se
46. 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 4 POTS FXO 35014 00011 00008 40033 00008 40034 MERCURY 4P FXO CARD MERCURY 2P DATA CARD IDCE gt DCE sync null modem 33010 00002 DB25 M gt V35 CABLE Product Code Part Number 33010 00006 Description Main Option Equipment Appendix B Annex Option Equipment DB25 M gt F CABLE 1 8M 33010 00013 DB25 M gt V35 M CABLE 1 8M 33010 00023 DB25 M gt DB15 F 20cm FOR 21 33010 00004 DB25 M 2 DB37 FOR RS449 4 FXS D 35014 00011 00010 20005 MERCURY 3820 4FXSD RJ 11 DCE gt DCE SYNC null modem 35015 00002 00007 70002 ROUTER MODULE PHONE BOX RJ 11 33008 00011 RJ 45 PHONE WIRE GRAY 8P8C 2M 24AWG TWIST CROSS 35014 00011 IDCE gt DCE sync null modem IDB25P M DB25P F 35015 00001 00007 70003 CHANNELIZE ROUTER IRJ 45 PHONE BOX 33008 00011 RJ 45 PHONE WIRE GRAY 8P8C 2M 24AWG TWIST CROSS 35014 00011 IDCE gt DCE sync null modem DB25P M DB25P F 35015 00001 50001 00059 AC DC POWER I P 110 230V 5 6 33001 00001 45 PHONE BOX AC POWER CORD 3 PIN 10A 125V 6 FEET B 4 Product Code 50001 00060 Part Number IDC DC POWER 1 48 5 6 Description Mercury 3820 Ordering Information Main Option Equipment Annex Option Equipment 3820
47. 4 IDSL 7 UNS EE C gt SDSL 7 Y i 7 Router Y v i Y v i v i v Router C Y v i v V i Y 2 Xcode Y vy 0 x Y 2 i 2 Law Y Yslot27 x 5101 2 7 x x 4 FXS x Y Y x 4 FXS D A Y Y 1P SHDSL V Y x x Y 4 POTS FXO Y y NES 7 34 Chapter 1 Introduction Module Mercury 3600 Mercury 3820 Compatibility Mercury 800 5 3 Slot 4 5 Slot10 when In band Table Slot 1 4 Slot 5 a 9 10 NMS used 4 POTS E amp M Y x i X 14 4 POTS FXSL c g z EESE Y Eco REM Y Y Table 1 20 The suitable I O module m Mercury SEHE Product Caution Mercury 3600 3600 and 3820 share the same I O modules But now the interface card for Mercury 800 is different connector designed to Mercury 3600 3600 and 3820 so the card for Mercury 3600 3600 and 3820 can NOT plug into Mercury 800 Chapter 2 Installation Chapter 2 Installation ABOUT THIS CHAPTER This Chapter provides installation operation instructions for the Mercury Series Product and to ensure it is working properly 2 1 Unpacking Make a preliminary inspection of the shipping container before unpacking evidence of damage should be noted and reported immediately to the nearest Tainet representative Unpack the equipment as follows Place the container with the top facing upwards Unpack equipment carefully check for complet
48. 52 DEFAULT CONFIGURATION SETTING AND USER STORED PROFILES 52 COMMAND SET DESCRIPTION cta it ud pde m dot d edel qutd dod er pota ids 56 Help Command 56 About Command sese EE RR ERAS ER 57 Alm Pot bari ur eti x c TERR 59 e e Pe RR EE MU rb e a 59 Boot Comltmarid cater Rosae edes 60 Clk c etd re tee PE e toc Eh ueri tad 61 Clr Command 5 ee rre exer a RE X E eR ER IRR XX ER 61 Cls Commands ses ste her ettet rate iat Rb E i a p o tei 62 Craft COMMANG ro ee td er i eh peter ed eda a RR Eres ies 62 elite ECRIRE 63 Data Gommadnd Te Edu eade niin p ERR ERE n 66 Date Command ue ein Re UE RR Y Re NER P E SHEER Re 68 69 E1 Command nn re eere vn deeds 70 COMMMANG ce EEEE 72 Eibergommand iicet f e eu TD E D T EE 73 FXO Command eee er eerte eek de ee E e YER ERR E 73 EXO GComiatids A A 75 vi 3 6 19 3 6 20 3 6 21
49. DB 9 222 A 5 MERCURY 800 3820 ON BOARD ETHERNET PORT 45 222 A 6 MERCURY 800 ON BOARD E1 120 OHM INTERFACE BALANCE 222 A 7 E1 2 4C B U AND 1 2 4 rr rtrrrnernrr rrn enne 222 A 8 E1 2 4C B AND 1 2 4 48 PIN DEFINITION FOR INTERFACE 223 A 9 2P V 35 INTERFACE zoete e ote ttd De Ee DHL Io D 223 A 10 1p 35 INTERFACE orte criss ed sac choca radit 224 A 11 S9 990 INTEBPAGE oppido oleo od e eub pt elut Mob dO Oto 225 A 12 X2 MINTERFACE UAE AMENS EA 226 A 13 V36 RS 449 INTERFACE ad aa 6662466 DU Oa ae ada ED rea p 226 ix Mercury Series User s Manual Rev 1 6 A 14 LAW 4 00 1 nere 227 15 X50 MUX 5C X50 MUX 4C X50 DACS 2C 227 A 16 Z IDSE INTEREAGE eee et 228 A 17 SDSLINTEREAGERE UE Lec aec CA cate 229 A 18 ROUTER 0 1 2 1 nere reper 229 19 4 FXS 4 FXS D
50. HELP command for command table or syntax 2 port identifier 1A 1B 1C 1D 2A 4A 5A Mercury gt help clk Usage Setup Clock Source Syntax CLK INT port port Params port port identifier INT internal clock Notes 1 view current setup if no parameter 2 first port identifier used for master clock source 3 second port identifier used for secondary clock source 4 valid port idenntifier are 1A 1C 2A 2C Figure 3 4 HELP Screen 3 6 2 About Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3820 B Purpose Display the software and hardware version and released time for Mercury 800 3600 and 3820 and the contacting phone number and e mail address of TAINET B Syntax ABOUT B Example ABOUT 57 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Mercury gt about 5 for Mercury 800 Cc gt Copyright TAINET Communication System Corp Headquarters 25 Alley 15 Lane 1280 Sec 1 Nei Hu Rd Taipei 114 Taiwan URL http wuw tainet net TEL 886 2 26583088 FAX 886 2 26583232 E mail sales tainet net support tainet net Release Time Mon Nov 28 26 56 19 2005 Software 2 88 Hardware 2 00 Figure 3 5 About Command Screen for 800 Mercury gt about i for Mercury 3600 Cc gt Copyright TAINET Communication System Corp Headquarters 25 Alley 15 Lane 120 Sec 1 Rd Taipei 114 Taiwan URL http Zwuwuwu tainet net TEL 886 2 26583088 FAR 886 2 26583232 E mail sales tain
51. ISDN T A e Analog Modem ISDN T A Edge Router Figure 5 2 Auxiliary PPP connection LAN to LAN You can use the Mercury Series Product with Router Module to connect two or more geographically dispersed networks over the DSL loops future or EI T1 TDM Time Division Multiplexer network via cross connect Router Module and serial interface Mercury with Router can also operate in Frame Relay network Typical LAN to LAN applications for your Mercury are shown as follows E CSU DSU CSU DSU iV35 HUB es 1 1 HUB V 35 3600 3600 Router Router Figure 5 3 LAN to LAN Connectivity via PPP 161 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 3 2 1 5 4 5 4 1 Mercury 3600 Jj Router CSU DSU CSU DSU CSU DSU HUB Mercury 3600 1 3600 Router Router CSU DSU Branch Office 7 irae Office Mercury 3600 Router Figure 5 4 LAN to LAN Connectivity via Frame Relay EMS Collocate Router Module with Mercury Series Product to provide the NMS Network Management System function for the administrator This includes SNMP network management refer to Section 5 6 8 B Command Line management via TELNET Using UDP port 2000 to access into CLM Command Line Management of Mercury Series Product E g telnet aaa aaa aaa aaa 2000 aaa 15 the IP address of Router Module Configure Router Module from
52. Restore Default Router Firmware Upgrad right ESC previous menu Restart Router Module 201 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 7 Configuration of Channelize Router module Ch R 5 7 1 Menu Tree of Ch R Following Figure 5 53 shows the main menu tree of Channelize router module MAIN MENU System Interface TSA Routing Table Configuration Interface Routing Table Monitoring ARP Table Statisitics Warm Start Device Control Restore Default Firmware Upgrade Ping Diagnosis e Information D Figure 5 53 Main menu tree of Ch R module 5 7 2 Main Menu When accessing the Ch r module the default log in username and password are both root After entering into the system the main menu is illustrated as a TCS Terminal Configuration System interface for easy configuration This is shown below 202 5 7 3 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Welcome to Access Mercury Channelized Router username root password root Figure 5 54 Access username and password There are four categories in the Main Menu B Configuration This menu includes all configuration of WAN and LAN and some advanced management The detailed settings of this menu will be discussed in later sections B Monitoring Use the monitoring menu to view system status interface statistics and routing t
53. Starting logging command scripts Xcs la Ib e Uni directional cross from source port 1A to destination port 1B Loge 1 loopl 119 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring e Stop and save the above commands into the 1 profile with the name 1 Logb Starting logging command scripts Xcs 1c Ib e Uni directional cross from source port to destination port 1B Loge 2 loop2 e Stop and save the above commands into the 2 profile with the name loop2 Note In this case the parameter alarm code for CP command uses default value Users may refer to table 3 7 2 the alarm code list to set their own criteria 3 7 5 1 1 Non Revertive Protection B Description Mercury provides the protection facility such as 1 1 Non Revertive protection Same as previous sections the data coming from port 1B will be sent to port 1A and 1C simultaneously but only receive the uni directional data from port 1A during normal stage 1B amp 1A 1B91C When Loop fails port 1A detects the alarm criteria which can be set by user system will execute the pre defined profile 2 and change the uni directional connection from 1A 1B to 1C IB then all the traffic will be transmitted and received though port 1B and 1IB 1 1B14A But the system will keep the traffic through port to and not revert back to original path Loopl even if the alarm is cleared Only when 2 fails an
54. the clock of DTE device follows Mercury s 28 Chapter 1 Introduction clock In asynchronous mode it supports 7 data bits with 1 stop bit mode and 8 data bits with 1 stop bit mode It only supports none parity and none flow control mode Test Function e It provides LL local loopback and RL remote loopback function Environmental Conditions Temperature Operation 0 C 50 C Storage 10 C 70 Relative Humidity Operation 0 90 non condensing Storage 0 95 non condensing Power Consumption 0 93 Walt IDSL card 4 IDSL General Description 4 ports IDSL card that works in LT mode is using 2B1Q modulation technology to extend the operation distance via 2 wire copper line o Electrical Characteristic e U reference interface according to ANSI T1 601 1992 ETSI TS 102 080 1998 ITU T G 961 standards e Two wire metallic subscriber loops Full duplex data transmission and reception basic rate access at 144K bit s 2B1Q block code 2 binary 1 quaternary at 80 kHz symbol rate Line protection Comply FCC part 68 e Line Speed Synchronous 144K BPS e Line Requirement 2 wire unconditioned unloaded twisted Line Operating Range Up to 6 0 Km over 26 gauge wire Up to 7 8 Km over 24 gauge wire Pass all the test for ANSI loop 1 15 e Line Coding 2B1Q e Output Level 13dBm Chapter 1 Introduction Line Impedance Balanced 1350 Line Interface RJ 11 Connector X 4 Di
55. 0 0 0 lt YES gt NO 0 no 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 no 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 no 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 no 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 no 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 no 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 no 11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 no 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 no Input SPACE to select TAB next forward lt backward ENTER select ESC abort Figure 5 63 The sub menu of Routing Table setting Static routes are those routes that you define in the Ch r module manually Static routes exist permanently unless you change them The following describes the details of the Routing Table Destination The IP address is an unique 4 byte 32 bit numeric value used to identify a network and a local host on that network NetMask An IP address net mask also 32 bits written in dotted decimal notation is used in conjunction with an IP address to specify which bits of the address make up the network part and which make up the host part Nexthop The IP address is a unique 4 byte 32 bit numeric value used to identify a network and a local host on that network The next hop must be one of the following a valid IP address on a remote LAN or the IP address at the remote end of a PPP link Provision Enable or Disable this route column in Routing Table Table 5 20 Descriptions of Routing Table parameters 5 7 3 6 SNMP Setup The router module supports SNMP agent functionality which allows a manager station to
56. 00013 DB25 M gt 35 M cable 35014 00011 00008 40013 00008 40014 MERCURY 4IDSL BOARD RJ 11 MERCURY X 50 BOARD IDCE gt DCE sync null modem 33010 00022 SCSI II gt 5DB25 F cable 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 50 MUX 4 35014 00011 00008 40017 MERCURY X 50 BOARD IDCE gt DCE sync null modem 33010 00022 SCSI II gt 5DB25 F cable 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 241 Appendix B Product Code Part Number Description Main Option Equipment Annex Option Equipment 35014 00011 DCE DCE sync null modem 00008 40018 MERCURY X 50 BOARD 33010 00022 SCSI II gt 5DB25 F cable 33010 00006 IDB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 35014 00011 00008 40019 00008 40021 MERCURY 4IDSL BOARD TB MERCURY 4VOICE BOARD RJ 11 IDCE gt DCE sync null modem 35015 00002 00008 40024 MERCURY 4T1 BOARD 100Q PHONE BOX RJ 11 33010 00025 IDB25 M gt 4 RJ 48 cable 33008 00010 IRJ 45 CABLE 24AWG 2M 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 35015 00001 00008 40025 00008 40026 00008 40027 00008 40028 00008 40029 FIBER WITH 1 1 BACKUP SIGNAL OPTICAL FIBER IDAUL PORT FIBER MERCURY XCODE BOARD MERCURY 2T1 BOARD 1000 45 PHONE BOX 33010 00025 IDB25 M gt 4 RJ 48 cable 33008 00010 IRJ 45 CABLE 24AWG 2M 33010 00006 IDB25 M g
57. 12 Table 4 13 Table 4 14 Table 5 1 Table 5 2 Table 5 3 Table 5 4 Table 5 5 Table 5 6 Table 5 7 Table 5 8 Table 5 9 Table 5 10 Table 5 11 Table 5 12 Table 5 13 Table 5 14 Table 5 15 Table 5 16 Table 5 17 Table 5 18 Table 5 19 Table 5 20 Table 5 21 Table 5 22 Table 5 23 Mercury Series User s Manual Rev 1 6 Alarms are supported by CP command 00 0 4 00 00 65 IDSL port time slot assignment table eeeseee 78 Login ID and Password for Mercury 41111 83 alarm message rette Ra ee Ede On e Epor a Erg dene Len dS ee 133 ak eh 136 Fiber Optical module alarm message 2 1 137 2 V35 module alarm message 2 222224142 2 138 X 50 module alarmiessage sos on petite ust oe one s 140 Router module alarm 4 nenne nennen nndis 141 IDSL module alarm message 143 FXS voice module alarm message 22 1 nnne 144 SDSL alarm message base eR cea e e 146 4AP Data module alarm message de E REND tans 147 4P V24 module alarm 06 222 tne 148 4 POTS FXO voice module alarm
58. 15 Access none n WAN 12 WAN 13 WAN 14 WAN 15 none WAN 16 Provision no n WAN 16 Time Slot 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Access none none none none none none none none Provision no no no no no no no no Time Slot 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Access none none none none none none none none Provision no no no no no no no no TAB next gt forward lt backward ENTER select ESC abort Figure 5 62 The sub menu of TSA selection The following table describes in details the TSA Configuration items The Time Slot number Access Time Slot to the specified WAN interface Time Slot Access Provision Yes Time Slot be assigned to Channelize Router Module on Device Platform No Time Slot none be assigned to Channelize Router Module on Device Platform Na Time Slot is not available 208 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Table 5 19 Descriptions of TSA parameters 5 7 3 5 Routing Table Setup This menu allows configuration of the static Routing Table of the Ch r module for packet forwarding This setting is in Configuration Routing Table menu Provisiononon Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d System AUX Port Interface TSA Routing Table SNMP Routing Table Configuration Destination NetMask Nexthop Provision 1 192 168 254 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 1 yes 2 192 168 253 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 2 1 yes 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 confirm 0 no 4 0 0 0 0 0
59. 199 Firmware update 200 settings 200 Restart Router Module cerra ERR Ue 201 Main menu tree of Ch R module cessent nennt 202 Access username and password nenne 203 The main menu tree in Ch r 203 sub menu tree of Configuration menu eene nemen 204 System COMMOUMATION 204 AUX Dort CODHgifaltoi 206 WAN Interface Configuration eet ree 206 PPP settings of WAN 1 eme eet sone ce RE neue pene Hc E FEX nnde 207 Sub menu of TSA settings for module 208 The sub menu Of TSA selection rd Rp cr eren etes 208 The sub menu of Routing Table 04040022 209 The sub menu of SNMP settings melee 210 The sub menu tree of Monitoring 211 The sub menu to view the Interface 211 The sub menu to view current routing 5 2 12 212 The sub menu to view current ARP 213 The sub menu
60. 2 3 shows the status indicators on each interface module and the buttons Table 2 3 describes the function in detailed eo OO e MIN RDY PPPLANPWR1PWR2 48V PPPICRAFTS PPPICRAFT LAN ACO e RST Mercury 3600 o Figure 2 4 Front Panel view of Mercury 3600 LED Indicator Status Description Buttons System is ready on 2 is under self testing while initialing MINOR 7 RST Reset the hardware by pressing this button Key Pad Show alarm history on LCD panel Table 2 3 Front Panel Description of Mercury 3600 B ALARM 41 Chapter 2 Installation The ALARM relay contact is to extend the major and minor alarms of Mercury 3600 3600 to the office audible and visual alarm system Refer to Appendix A for its pin assignment B CRAFT The Front panel CRAFT port serves as a normal supervise port and operates at standard RS 232 V 24 DCE mode in DB 9 type connector it can direct connect to PC COM port for operation 2 6 Mercury 3600 3600 Rear Panel Description There are 5 slots on the rear panel of Mercury 3600 3600 the first 4 slots can be plugged in with I O modules while the 5 slots is usually used for management with the Non Channelized or Channelized router module 3600 only Figure 2 5 shows a typical rear view of Mercury 3600 3600 with 5 slots power supply socket and ground screw Each slot is marked with a label that designates the slot type and definition
61. 2 wire twisted pair Temperature Operation 0 C 50 C Storage 10 C 70 C Relative Humidity Operation 0 90 non condensing Storage 0 95 non condensing Wetting Current 4 6 mA constant current provide LTU Side Power Consumption The maximum power consumption of 1P SHDSL V card is 3 5 Walt Voice channels 30 voice channels per card at most o Timeslot Allocation User defined any time slot 0 31 to any time slot mapping Clock Source Can be set to derived external clock from received port B 7 55 2P V35 General Description 2 ports V 35 cards with data rate N x 64 Kbps N 1 32 each Electrical Characteristic 18 Chapter 1 Introduction Refer to ITU T Recommendation V 35 interface 50 lt Resource 150 ohms 35ohms lt Rshort lt 165 ohms short circuit terminals to signal ground 0 44 V Vta tb lt 0 66V terminated by 100 ohm resistive load Table 1 5 35 Electrical Characteristic Maximum Output Jitter 0 065 UI Timeslot Allocation User defined any time slot 0 31 to any time slot mapping Clock Source Can be set to derived external clock from received port A or C W 2 4 Data card 2 4P Data General Description e Provide 2 4 data ports in DCE mode with software selectable to ITU T V 35 EIA530A X 21 interface Each data rate is x 64 Kbps N 1 32 Electrical Characteristic
62. 3 6 35 RP Command B Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 B Purpose Setup the ring protection mode and its clocking Constructing the E1 Fiber ring protection feature can provide an always alive transmission path to prevent failure on the specified link Currently Mercury Series support 4 rings within 1 device this function allows user to set 4 individual rings to different locations or set 4 rings to become 1 big ring and extend the bandwidth interfaces of that ring should be of with same interface type This automatic redundant path protection function can select the live path automatically to protect the data transmission if the primary link malfunctions It can also provide the time slot drop on the multiple nodes of the ring protect associated point The RP command always comes with command DROP refer to section 3 6 13 DROP Command and the ring protection requires a start node which is in the Master mode all other nodes connected to chain act in Slave mode This mechanism will automatically distinguish all node connections If one of the links fails due to cable faults or problems the Main Ring can be wrapped onto the Backup Ring Wrapping is a term that is used to indicate that the Backup Ring is being used in addition to the Main Ring The Backup Ring is connected to the Main Ring The Main Ring or a portion of the Main Ring is still being used Wrapping is only associated with the Last Port and Ne
63. 31 to 2 Mbps DB25 M gt V 35 M cable 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 35014 00011 00006 50229 INx64K N 1 31 to 2 Mbps IDCE gt DCE sync null modem 33010 00006 DB25 M gt cable 1 8m 35014 00011 00007 70002 ROUTER MODULE IDCE gt DCE sync null modem 33008 00011 IRJ 45 PHONE WIRE GRAY 8P8C 2M 24AWG TWIST CROSS 35014 00011 IDCE gt DCE sync null modem IDB25P M DB25P F ROUTER C 35015 00001 00007 70003 CHANNELIZE ROUTER 45 PHONE BOX Appendix B Main Option Product Code Equipment Part Number Description Annex Option Equipment 33008 00011 IRJ 45 PHONE WIRE GRAY 8P8C 2M 24AWG TWIST CROSS 35014 00011 IDCE gt DCE sync null modem DB25P M DB25P F 35015 00001 IRJ 45 PHONE BOX 00008 40008 00008 40009 MERCURY DC MODULE MERCURY AC MODULE Table B 2 Mercury 3600 Order Information B 3 Mercury 3600 Ordering Information Main Option Equipment 3600 00010 50001 MERCURY 3600 BASE UNIT 00010 50003 MERCURY 3600 BASE UNIT WITH DC Product Code Part Number Description Annex Option Equipment 00008 40002 MERCURY 4E1 BOARD 1209 33010 00025 DB25 M gt 4 RJ 48 cable 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE 24AWG 2M 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 35015 00001 00008 40002 45 PHONE BOX MERCURY 4T1 BOARD 100Q 33010 000
64. 4 data ports A B C D can be set to derive the clock from outside equipment The transmit speed N x 64 Kbps is determined by the count parameter for 512 Kbps 8 x 64 Kbps so the count number is 8 and it will start from time slot 0 and end with 7 B Syntax DATA port count Type type CTS act DSR act DCD act RI act DEV dev INV inv B Param Port Port identifier for the indicated Data port Count Number of time slots to setup its data rate starting from time slot 0 Type Software configurable to select the interface type to RS530A RS530 X21 V35 0 N A default 1 RS530A 2 RS530 3 X21 4 V35 CTS Clear to Send signal default act 1 DSR Data Set Ready signal default act 1 DCD Carrier Detect signal default act 1 RE Ring Indicator signal default act 0 act O signalinactive l signal active DEV The clock type for which device connected to and illustrated as following and only valid for 4P Data card Dev 0 DTE without clock TxC RxC default 1 DTE without clock TxC ExC 2 DTE with clock TxC RxC ExC 3 DCE without clock TxC ExC 4 DCE with clock TxC RxC ExC 66 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring 5 DTE without clock DTE with clock DEV 0 DEV 1 TxC RxC Tx
65. 6 15 3 6 16 3 6 17 3 6 18 MERCURY 3600 3600 FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTION 41 MERCURY 3600 3600 REAR PANEL 42 MERCURY 3820 FRONT PANEL DESCRIPTION 121 7 7 1 411 00 42 MERCURY 3820 REAR PANEL DESCRIPTION 45 INSTALLING NEW CARDS a desee coetu die 45 CONFIGURATION amp MONITORING eee cree ee esee ee seen aseo nae na sno 47 HARDWARE dO A Ue pa 47 Operations using Terminal Eo E ep ree Fe t Deng Red ug euer 47 Requirements by using Telnet 48 COMMUNICATED LANGUAGE 25222002 latex 48 SIARTING GONFIGURATION CREARI da EXER EXER ERE QUE ees areata 49 Monitorin Mode te ete cte 49 Access MOde tette a mee ete x PER Eve Pep 50 THE BASIC CONCEPT IN CONFIGURING MERCURY 51 MVS OMI CLOG te 51 Tributery cards Parameters co oco Fri etie 52 Cross GOlInectlODis cce eroe rte eee rede 52 EAI ct
66. Appendix A Clear to Send B Request to Send A Local Loopback Terminal in Service Data Mode B Data Mode A Terminal Ready B Terminal Ready A Receiver Ready B Receiver Ready A Select Standby Remote Loopback Signal Quality Incoming Call New Signal Select Frequency Terminal Timing A Terminal Timing A Standby Indicator Test Mode Send Common Signal Ground Table 14 V 36 RS 449 PIN definition for Mercury 3600 A U Law Interface Figure A 6 A U Interface Pin number Description LED Major alarm indicator common point Major alarm indicator normal open point Major alarm buzzer common point Buzzer MAJOR ALARM BUZZER COMMON POINT LED MINOR ALARM INDICATOR COMMON POINT Minor alarm indicator normal open point Minor alarm buzzer common point Buzzer Minor alarm buzzer common point Table A 15 A U card 8 pin terminal block X50 MUX 5C X50 MUX 4C X50 DACS 2C Interface The X 50 interface uses SCSI II D sub50 connector Pin descriptions are shown in the table bellow SCSI II pin number Description 1 11 21 31 41 Receiver data a 2 12 22 32 42 Transmitted data a 3 13 23 33 43 Receiver timing a 4 14 24 34 44 Data set ready Follow DTR 5 15 25 35 45 Terminal timing a 6 16 26 36 46 Data carrier detect 227 Appendix A A 16
67. Configurable in steps of IdB D A Default 2dBm Attenuation Frequency Distortion Figure 5 G 712 Idle Channel Noise lt 65 dBm0p 4W INTERFACE Comply with ITU T G 712 Impedance 6000 16 Chapter 1 Introduction Input level 14 3 dBm Software Configurable in steps of IdB A D Default 0dBm Output level 13 4 dBm Software Configurable in steps of IdB D A Default 2dBm Attenuation Frequency Distortion Figure 4 G 712 e Idle Channel Noise lt 65 dBm0p There are some states shows on Front Panel see below YELLOW ACTIVE M Lead amp E Lead are Active M Lead detected current flow from E amp M PBX and send PLASH RED PENSE Off Hook Signaling to TDM bus E Lead receive Off Hook Signaling from TDM bus and 220 eee Drive out to E amp M PBX GREEN IDLE M Lead amp E Lead are Idle Table 1 4 Front Panel LED indicator Interface T1 4CB T1 2CB General Description e 20r4 ports card with 120 Ohm interface Electrical Characteristic e Line Rate 1 544 Mbps 32 ppm e Line Code AMI B8ZS Input Signal DSX 1 e Jitter AT amp T TR 62411 Framing D4 ESF Unframed e Output Signal DSX 1 with 0 7 5 15dB LBO e Pulse Template AT amp T TR 62411 Timeslot Allocation User defined any time slot 0 31 to any time slot mapping Clock Source be set to derived external clock from received port A or C B 1P SHDSL V General Description The
68. Description of N R Configuration teat ose rie dene att 165 5 6 2 Change the System 1 1 102 168 5 6 3 Organization of TCS menu tree 169 5 6 4 LAN WAN Configuration 176 5 6 5 Bridging and Routing Access 185 5 6 6 SP FET iiti ER 190 5 6 7 DHCP CGornfiguratiOn 196 5 6 8 INI E 197 5 6 9 System deii daa doit ee Re 198 5 7 CONFIGURATION OF CHANNELIZE ROUTER MODULE 202 5 7 1 Menu Tree of Che RC siio RE Rete E Oe eon e ti Re Re per 202 5 7 2 Mains Mentis ioo fia a Montel ew vU e v e ns 202 5 7 3 Contig reaiorn o e e DD Eee 203 5 7 4 MN rA 210 5 7 5 Device Control 214 5 7 6 I e 218 APPENDIX A INTRODUCTION 221 MERCURY 800 3820 CRAFT PORT INTERFACE RJ 45 DB 9 ADAPTER WITH MODEMMINSIDE pu oti eda Nul D RUM Dd ond 221 A 2 MERCURY 800 3820 PPP PORT INTERFACE RJ 45 DB 25 ADAPTER 221 A 3 MERCURY 3600 CRAFT PORT INTERFACE DB 9 CONNECTOR 221 A 4 MERCURY SERIES ALARM PORT
69. Errored Seconds over 1 day threshold 1D UA Unavailable Second Informative alert P M Major Counting Unavailable Second over day threshold DIS Disconnect SHDSL card Check the operating mode on Alarm Minor persisted on the handshake network equipment NTU Situation LTU or connect with Scorpio 1400 Have the remote equipment check ALM OFF Alarm Off Alarm report has Informative message no State Minor been switch off at specified action required port ALM amp DAC Alarm and DAC Off Alarm Informative message no State Minor OFF report and DAC function has required been switch off at specified port Table 4 14 151 1P SHDSL V alarm messages Chapter 4 Maintenance 4 2 4 3 4 3 1 Performance Monitoring Diagnostics This section describes the performance evaluation and monitoring functions provided by the Mercury The performance parameters defined for Mercury statistics are listed below Current errored seconds ES An errored second is any second containing one or more minor alarm events Current severely errored seconds SES A severely errored second is any second containing one or more Major alarm events Current unavailable seconds UA An unavailable second is any second in which a failed signal state exists A failed signal state is declared when 10 consecutive severely errored seconds SES occur and is cleared a
70. MERCURY 800 4IDSL RJ 11 MERCURY 800 X 50 BOARD 33010 00022 SCSI II gt 5DB25 F cable 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m X50 MUX 4C L 35014 00011 00010 00013 33010 00022 MERCURY 800 X 50 BOARD SCSI Il gt 5DB25 F cable DCE DCE sync null modem 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 35014 00011 00010 00014 MERCURY 800 X 50 BOARD DCE DCE sync null modem 33010 00022 33010 00006 SCSI Il gt 5DB25 F cable DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 2P V35 L 35014 00011 00010 00015 MERCURY 800 2V35 BOARD DCE gt DCE sync null modem 33010 00002 DB25 M 2 V 35 cable 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 33010 00013 DB25 M gt V 35 M cable 4 FXS D L 35014 00011 00010 00016 4 FXS VOICE CARD RJ 11 DCE DCE sync null modem Product Code Part Number Description Main Option Equipment Appendix B Annex Option Equipment 35015 00002 PHONE BOX RJ 11 FIBER B L FIBER 1 L FIBER 2 L XCODE L 4 POTS FXO L 00010 00017 00010 00018 00010 00019 00010 00020 00010 00024 00010 00025 WITH 1 1 BACKUP for MERCURY 800 SINGLE PORT FIBER for MERCURY 800 DAUL PORT FIBER for MERCURY 800 MERCURY 800 XCODE 4 FXO VOICE CARD MERCURY 800 SDSL 2P SHDSL L 2P DATA L 33008 00009 00010 00038 00010 00027 DAUL PORT G SHDSL MERCURY 800 2P DATA RJ
71. Mercury 800 Figure 5 7 N R Jumper Configuration System Setup Traffic Types This field allows you to choose the traffic mode of your Router Module Routing or Bridging LAN Setup IP Address The IP address is a unique 4 byte 32 bit numeric value used to identify a network and a local host on the network Each IP address consists of four sets of decimal numbers separated by the period e g 192 72 243 1 Each address is composed of two parts a network part and a host part The network part identifies the unique subnet that contains the host the host part identifies the actual host device IP NetMask The IP address netmask also 32 bits written in dotted decimal notation is used in conjunction with an IP address to specify which bits of the address make up the network part and which the host part A one 1 ina mask bit location means the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network value a zero 0 means the corresponding bit is part of the host value MAC Address Shown the Ethernet Address of your Router Module WAN Setup WAN Protocol Selected the WAN protocol Frame Relay or PPP encapsulation PPP FrRelay and AUX Setup Local IP PPP This parameter identifies the IP address for local WAN interface when the protocol is selected PPP IP NetMask The IP net mask for WAN when protocol is selected PPP lt PPP gt Remote IP This parameter identifies the IP
72. Monitoring B Purpose Mercury Series Product supports 4 port IDSL card which always works in LT mode and connects to remote TAINET IDSL product such as Jupiter 2560 or DT 128 in NT mode With 2 wire lines connection and 2B1Q modulation technology it can extend the operation distance up to 7 8Km under 24 AWG 0 5mm and provides up to 128 Kbps data transmission rate The 4 port IDSL card also provides the AL DL and RDL loopback testing for diagnostic When the loopback testing activates the front panel LED indicator will keep blinking IDSL port time slot assignment table is as follows Time Slot 0 1 2 3 IDSL Bl B2 Reserve D bit 7 6 Table 3 13 IDSL port time slot assignment table B Syntax IDSL port OP op RDL rdl B Param port Port identifier OP Setup the operation mode such as 0 link default 1 al 2 ssp 3 dt 4 dl 5 quiet link Connect to the remote NTU o al Enable the analog loopback testing Quiet Disconnect the line and make modem quiet DI Enable the digital loopback testing ssp amp dt Reserved for factory used RDL Request remote NTU to enable the digital loopback the link should be connected when performing the RDL testing rdl 0 normal 1 2B D 2 Bl 3 B2 B Example 1 IDSL 1a op 0 Setup IDSL port 1A to link mode IDSL 1b op 1 Activate the AL loopback on IDSL port 1B 3 6 21 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Mercury help 145
73. No No wa a ua ca 3 x3 Permit Filter MENU Incoming Filter Incoming Filter Config select TAINET Router Module Outgoing Filter ESC previous menu Source IP 0 0 0 0 I9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Any Press SPACE BAR to Change Value left MASK Bit Destination IP Version 2 14t gt right TAB next item MASK Bit Protocol Port I0 ALL 0 1 I0 ALL 0 1 I0 ALL 0 1 I0 ALL 0 1 1 I0 ALL 0 1 1 I0 ALL 0 1 1 I0 ALL 0 1 1101 AIL 0 1 1 I0 ALL 0 1 1 I0 ALL 0 1 Figure 5 45 The sub menu of Incoming Filter The bottom row of filter access list indicates the cess mode For example if you have set this field to Permit Any for Incoming Filter then the corresponding serial port WAN will allow everything except IP packets labeled on the list of incoming filter table The same logic applies to the Deny Any command IP Filter table allows you to configure the specified field Leaving the field to the default 0 or 0 0 0 0 means all included or don t care 195 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 6 7 5 6 7 1 DHCP Configuration This section discusses the
74. Panel view of Mercury 3600 2 2 2 4 22 41 Rear Panel view of Mercury 3600 36005 42 Front panel view of Mercury 3820 dota rdiet lote taxe ptite estie tide 43 Rear panel view of Mercury 3820 22 2 44444 2 45 Installing New cards for Mercury 800 46 Mercury Start Hp SC ameta aste 49 Mercury Monitoring Mode Screen Mercury 800 50 M rc iy Help SCFGell s utis oto p tee e DU 51 HELP Screens 57 About Command Screen for 800 58 About Command Screen for 3600 58 About Command Screen for 3820 58 Alm Command 5 59 Boot Command 5 60 CLK Command Screen 1 000 00000000000 61 CLR Command 5 2 62 CLS Command Screen 00000 000 62 CRAFT Command 5 63 CP Command 5 bt db tee aie d d 65 DATA Command Screen 68 Date Command 69 DROP Command 5 70 E1 Command 1 1 2101200000000000000
75. Protect Loop If the alarm is cleared on port 1A system will execute profile 1 to change the traffic back to Main Loop Loge 1 Mainloop 123 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring e Stop and save the above commands into the 1 profile with the name Mainloop Logb Starting logging command scripts Ib 1 Cross port 1B to higher priority data Loge 2 Protectloop e Stop and save the above commands into the 2 profile with the name Protectloop Note In this case the parameter alarm code for CP command uses default value User may refer to table 3 7 2 the alarm code list to set your own criteria 3 7 7 N 1 Revertive Protection B Description o Mercury provides the protection facility such as N 1 Revertive protection which is attached in the following figure Main Loopl and Main Loop2 share the same backup link Protect Loop if Main Loopl fails the traffic will switch to the Protect Loop and system will also disable the CP function and alarm detection on port 1C When 1 alarm disappears traffic will switch back to Main Loop and will also enable the CP function on as before 124 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring B Structure N 1 Protection Normal Working Path 4 Protecting Path Mercury A Mercury B Ko ae a Main Loop1 23 2 o a 1 14 egi 1 gt i Main Loop2
76. RJ 48 cable 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE 24AWG 2M 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m E1 4CU L 35015 00001 00010 00005 MERCURY 800 4E1 75Q RJ 45 PHONE BOX 33010 00024 DB25 M gt 8BNC cable 33010 00026 DB25 M gt 8BNC F cable 09100 60047 BNC connector T1 4CB L for 33010 00006 00010 00006 MERCURY 800 4T1 100Q DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 33010 00025 DB25 M gt 4 RJ 48 cable 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE 24AWG 2M 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 35015 00001 00010 00007 MERCURY 800 2 1 1200 RJ 45 PHONE BOX 33010 00025 DB25 M gt 4 RJ 48 cable 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE 24AWG 2M 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 35015 00001 00010 00008 MERCURY 800 750 45 33010 00026 DB25 M 8BNC F cable 33010 00024 237 DB25 M 8BNC cable Appendix B Product Code Part Number 09100 60047 Description Main Option Equipment Annex Option Equipment BNC F gt F connector 33010 00006 00010 00009 MERCURY 800 2 1 1000 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 33010 00025 DB25 M gt 4 RJ 48 cable 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE 24AWG 2M 33010 00006 35015 00001 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m RJ 45 PHONE BOX A MU L 00010 00010 MERCURY 800 A u BOARD AIDSL L 00010 00011 00010 00012
77. Ring generation 21 Chapter 1 Introduction 235 VRMS reference at 25Hz excluding LL type Module e DC impedance Off hook 7300 Ohms at 25mA feed excluding LL type Module Diagnostics test Full Digital loopback TSA loopback 1 KHz tone injection Timeslot Allocation Each channel occupies 64 Kbps bandwidth allocated on time slot 0 Clock Source e Follow the active system clock of Mercury only Compatibility Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 800 Boot Version Flash Version H W Version 4 POTS FXS V1 03 V2 20 V2 0 Supported Table 1 9 Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 800 Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3600 Flash Version H W Version 4 POTS FXS V5 21 V2 0 Supported Table 1 10 Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3600 Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3820 Boot Version Flash Version 4 POTS FXS V1 03 V1 08 Supported Table 1 11 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3820 Caution If a voice card was plugged into Mercury 3600 3820 additional external 48DC power should be connected at PWR3 socket at rear panel of Mercury 3600 3820 But for Mercury 800 no other external power is required Mercury 3600 with one power module can inserted one 4P POTS FXS card only 4 POTS Voice card 4 5 General D
78. Status System status can be monitored under Monitoring menu This menu presents all system information to allow easy diagnosis of the problem For details of each field please refers to Section 5 9 3 in this menu Upgrade the Firmware Using TFTP Server Mercury 800 3600 and 3820 allow the use of TFTP to upgrade their Flash firmware The router module with the latest firmware version supports this upgrade function too Please keep in mind that TFTP upload is only available if TCP IP is configured on your Router module Some of the newer modules are supported with newer Boot version that can only be upgraded using EPROM writer W Files require TFTPServerl 1 exe CISCO TFTP Server freeware 198 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Vxxx bin binary firmware upload file Step 1 Setup the TFTP server Run TFTPServerl 1 exe and install it to your workstation Launch the TFTP server Figure 5 49 TFTP Server settings Note User can use any TFTP software But in these sections we use Cisco TFTP as an example Step 2 Configure the TFTP Server Press the option button at top left corner and then locate the root directory where the upgrade firmware is stored Step 3 Telnet to the Router configuration management Terminal Telnet to the Router Configuration manual and select Device Control 2 Firmware Upgrade Chapter 5 Router Configuration Warm Start Cold Start Restore Default Firmware Upgrade 1 Firmware Upgr
79. Table 2 4 describes the function of each port Please refer to Section 1 5 about the compatible I O modules for Mercury 3600 Figure 2 5 Rear Panel view of Mercury 3600 3600 Table 24 Rear Panel Description of Mercury 3600 3600 2 7 Mercury 3820 Front Panel Description Mercury 3820 15 a 10 slots digital cross connect system with user selectable I O modules The front panel of Mercury 3820 enclosure includes the status indicators on each interface module the buttons ALM relay PPP Craft port and LAN port as shows on Figure 2 6 Table 2 5 describes the function in detailed ien 60 a seeeen 0020 a 0000 d 9999 E aossen 42 Chapter 2 Installation Figure 2 6 Front panel view of Mercury 3820 LED Indicator Status Buttons 1 2 3 4 10 Green Description Card is ready in the indicated slot Off Card is unavailable IA B C D Indicates this channel in normal condition Minor alarm occurred in this channel Major alarm occurred in this channel Indicates this channel 15 under testing mode Alarm and DAC function are disabled RDY Green System is ready System is under self testing while initialing Red Major alarm occurred in the system Off No major alarm T PPP protocol is UP f PPP CRAFT The front panel PPP Craft port change to Auxiliary PPP mode Release
80. Table 4 3 lists the alarm messages generated by the 1P SHDSL V module specifies their class Major or Minor type Alarm Performance Monitoring and State and explains their meaning Message Desciption Corrective Type Class LOS Loss of signal 1 Check cable connections to the link connector Alarm Major Chapter 4 Maintenance 2 Check the operating mode on the network equipment NTU LTU or connect with Scorpio 1400 3 Replace the SHDSL module 15 ES Errored Seconds Counting Informative alert P M Major Errored Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 SES Severely Errored Seconds Informative alert P M Major counting Severely Errored Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 UA Unavailable Second Informative alert P M Major Counting Unavailable Second over 15 minutes threshold 1H ES Errored Seconds Counting Informative alert P M Major Errored Seconds over 1 hour threshold IH SES Severely Errored Seconds Informative alert Major Counting Severely Errored Seconds over 1 hour threshold 1H UA Unavailable Second Informative alert P M Major Counting unavailable Second over hour threshold 1D ES Errored Seconds Counting Informative alert P M Major Errored Seconds over 1 day threshold 1D SES Severely Errored Seconds Informative alert Major Counting Severely
81. The front panel PPP Craft port change to Craft mode Alarm Cut Off button press to clear the alarm Reset the hardware by pressing this button Table 2 5 Front Panel Description of Mercury 3820 43 Chapter 2 Installation Note The LED PWR 1 2 will light on while the power module is plugged into the rear panel power supply socket 1 2 with the power turned on The LED 48V lights on when power supply socket 3 on the rear panel is connected to the external 48VDC power source The 48VDC is for voice application and generates the ring tone if there is any voice card plugged into Mercury B ALM The ALARM relay contact is to extend the major and minor alarm of Mercury 3820 to the office audible and visual alarm system Refer to Appendix A for its pin assignment B LAN The front panel LAN connector with RJ 45 type is for Mercury 3820 s built in router module The10BaseT Ethernet port follows IEEE 802 3 protocol and supports SNMP protocol PPP CRAFT The Front panel PPP Craft button can be selected to switch the PPP Craft port on the front panel to serve as a normal Craft port or an Auxiliary PPP port Auxiliary PPP serial interface operates in standard RS 232 V 24 DTE mode and there should be a RJ 45 cable and RJ 45 to DB25M adapter when you unpack it supports both Asynchronous and Synchronous data transmission format It can be connected to the remote site Router and build up a WAN with PPP protoco
82. Warm Start Cold Start Restore Default Firmware Upgrade Restart Module lt YES gt NO TAB next forward lt backward ENTER select ESC abort Figure 5 71 The sub menu of Warm Start menu 5 7 5 2 Cold Start The Cold Start will reboot the system as if you powering off the system then back on again After you upgrade the firmware you may execute this command This is available in the Device Control Cold Start menu Device Control Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d Warm Start Cold Start Restore Default Firmware Upgrade Reboot Module lt YES gt NO TAB next forward lt backward ENTER select ESC abort Figure 5 72 The sub menu of Cold Start menu 5 7 5 3 Restore Default This command will restart the system and restore the factory parameters This is available in the Device Control Restore Default menu Device Control Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d Warm Start Cold Start Restore Default Firmware Upgrade Restore Parameters to Factory Default lt YES gt NO TAB next forward lt backward ENTER select ESC abort Figure 5 73 The sub menu of Restore Default menu 5 7 5 4 Firmware Upgrade This Ch r module runs the download program and downloads the updated code to the 215 Chapter 5 Router Configuration FLASH To start the download process the process must begin
83. a PC Access to the TCS can be done by two ways console port session or Telnet session Access to the TCS via Console can be done via using VT 100 compatible terminal connect to Mercury s craft port or via an asynchronous lease line modem If your router has been assigned an IP address access to TCS by establishing a Telnet session onto the assigned IP address of the router telnet IP address Access via Console Mode If you are configuring your router from a PC not a dumb terminal you need a type of communications software called terminal emulation software The PC uses this software to send commands to your Router Modem Table 5 1 lists some common names for this software based on the type of PC you are using 162 5 4 2 Chapter 5 Router Configuration PC Operation System Software Windows 95 98 ME or NT HyperTerm included with Windows software Windows 3 1 Terminal included with Windows software Macintosh ProComm VersaTerm supplied separately Table 5 1 lists of the emulated terminal software You can use the terminal emulation to change settings for the type of device that is connected to the PC in this case configure the software to the following settings so your PC can communicate with your Router Module The default password for Console access is root refer to section 5 6 2 to change your Console password Craft port Baud Data Flow Par
84. a transmission circuit such as a phone line Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol automatically assigns IP address to clients DHCP when they log on DHCP centralizes IP address management on the central computers that run the DHCP server program DNS Domain Name System A database of domain names and their IP address e s DNS is the primary naming system for many distributed networks including the internet Domain Name The unique name that identifies an Internet site Domain Names always have 2 or more parts that are separated by dots Generally speaking the part on the left is the most specific and the part on the right is the most general Digital Subscriber Line technologies enhance the data capacity of the existing twisted pair wire that runs between the local telephone company switching offices and most homes and offices There are actually seven types of DSL services ranging in speeds form 16kbits sec to 52 M bits sec The services are either symmetric traffic flows at the same speed in both directions or asymmetrical the downstream capacities higher than the upstream capacities DSL connections are point to point dedicated circuits which means that they are always connected There is no dial up There is also no switching which means that the line is a direct connection into the carrier s frame relay ATM or Internet connect system DSLAM A Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiple x e r is a network device Usually at a
85. amp Monitoring Mercury help thre Usage Setup PM Threshold Syntax THRE type UA ua ES es SES ses CV cv Params type 0 15min 1 lhour 2 1day UA Unavailable second ES Error Second SES Severely Error Second CV CV BPV ua 15min lhour lday UA threshold es 15min lhour lday ES threshold ses 15min lhour lday SES threshold cv 15 1 1 CV threshold Notes 1 view current setup if no parameter 2 15min ua es and ses threshold 1 900sec 0 disable lhour ua es and ses threshold 1 3600sec 0 disable 1day ua es and ses threshold 1 86400sec 0 disable all cv threshold 1 2E 9 bit 0 disable Mercury gt thre 0 ua 100 es 100 Mercury gt thre PM threshold TYPE UA ES SES CV BPV 15 min 100 100 0 0 1 hour 0 0 0 0 1 day 0 0 0 0 Figure 3 45 THRE Command Screen 3 6 45 Time Command B Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 Purpose Set the Time for Mercury Internal clock Syntax TIME hh mm ss B Param None Display the current time for Mercury hh Hour 00 23 mm Minute 00 59 ss Second 00 59 B Example TIME Display the current time in Mercury TIME 12 10 30 Setup the time to 12 10 30 Mercury gt time 2002 03 08 12 06 44 Mercury gt time 12 10 30 Figure 3 46 TIME Command Screen 101 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring 3 6 46 3 6 47 User Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 Purpose List all the u
86. and password again Table D 1 Trouble Shooting Table 255 Appendix E Appendix E Glossary KEYWORD EXPLANATION Part of the original IEEE 802 3 standard 10 Base T is the Ethernet specification of 10 Base T 10 Mbps base band that uses two pair of twisted pair Category 3 4 or 5 cabling using one pair to send data and the other to receive 10 Base T has a distant limit of about 100 meters per segment Based on the IEEE 802 3u standard 100BaseT is the Fast Ethernet specification of 100 Base T 100 Mbps base band that uses UTP wiring 100BaseT sends link pulse over the network when no traffic is present Address Mask The address mask for an IP address is used to identify the boundary between the network portion of the address and host portion ADSL Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line An evolving high speed transmission technology originally developed by Bell core and mow standardized by ANSI as T1 413 Uses existing UTP copper wires from Telephone Company s central office to subscriber s premises Involves electronic equipment in the form of ADSL modems at central office and subscriber s premises Sends digital signal up and down these copper wires and sends more information one way than the other hence the term asymmetric Address Resolution Protocol is a method to find a host s physical address from its IP address An ARP request is sent to the network naming the IP address then machine wi
87. be configured at Configuration System Traffic Types Configuration MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14a System PPP FR RIP Route Table Security NAT Filter SNMP DHCP Setup LAN Local IP SubNetMask amp WAN Protocol amp AUX IP SubNetMask Remote IP Enter select ESC previous menu lt left gt right TAB next item Traffic Types Ethernet Bridging LAN IP Address 192 168 0 1 LAN IP NetMask 255 255 255 0 Figure 5 33 The sub menu to setup Ethernet Bridging When operating in Bridging mode the rear panel WAN LED will go into a flash state as the WAN interface detects data flowing across it RIP function Setup Routing Information Protocol RIP is a distance vector protocol for use in intra domain on the interior of a gateway There are actually two versions of RIP in the TCP IP protocol suite Version 1 is the original Version 2 is the updated version Version 2 is used almost exclusively because of its enhanced capabilities Your Router Module supports both RIP 1 and RIP 2 RIP 1 is universally supported but RIP 2 carries more information RIP 1 is probably adequate for most networks unless you have an unusual network topology Configuration can be performed on a per interface basis You can enable or disable RIP for each interface WAN AUX and LAN The following table describes the RIP option of your Router Module 186 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Configuration MENU TAINET Rou
88. by first erasing the program code already in the FLASH Please closely follow the instructions This command is available in the Device Control Firmware Upgrade menu Also please refer to section 5 6 9 2 Before you run this function contact your local sales representative service representative or distributor directly to seek out additional technical assistance d exe telnet 172 16 5 250 Mercury Channelized Router Warm Start Cold Start Restore Default Firmware Upgrade from TFTP Server Uersion 1 88 Firmware Upgrade 1 Download process will ERASE the program code in the device i DO NOT interrupt the dounload process If you suspect that i it failed wait for a time out and then start the download i process again i If the file transfer DOES NOT verify DO NOT power cycle i or reboot the unit Go back and start the download i process again If the file transfer DOES verify DO power cycle or reboot the unit program code vill be use Press ENTER to continue download process m i 1 LI ENTER select TAB next lt left gt right ESC previous menu Figure 5 74 The sub menu of Firmware Upgrade menu The following describes the details of the Firmware Upgrade in the Device Control menu TFTP Server IP Address The IP address is a unique 4 byte 32 bit numeric value used to identify a TFTP Server TFTP Server File Name The file name of ne
89. can be wrapped to the Backup Ring Wrapping is a term that is used to indicate that the Backup Ring is being used in addition to the Main Ring The Backup Ring is connected to the Main Ring The Main Ring or a portion of the Main Ring is still being used Wrapping is only associated with the Last Port and Next Port connectors on the extremity Mercury units Ring will automatic recover when the faults link has fixed Path Protected Application Path Protected Application X Failed lt gt Normal Path 4 Protected Path pr A 1 1 Protection High Priority Path Protection Low Priority Figure 1 9 T1 E1 Fiber Path Protected Application With the ring protection facility described in section 1 2 8 above Mercury also has the 1 1 1 1 1 functionality as indicated in Figure 1 9 that provides an always alive path to ensure that your data transmission work properly 13 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 2 10 1 3 1 3 1 Currently this function is available for the trunk link module such as E1 T1 Fiber SDSL card and GSHDSL card Broadcast Multicast Application 9 G se 6 Figure 1 10 Broadcast Multicast Application The broadcast multicast feature enables a user at a central location to send data to multiple users connected to remote units and still maintain a normal communicatio
90. clock 3 DTE with clock amp amp TC RC EXC DCE with clock amp amp TC RC EXC TXC normal amp RXC normal 1 TXC normal amp RXC inverted TXC inverted amp RXC normal 3 TXC inverted amp RXC inverted valid time slot number is between 1 and 31 time slot 0 for 2V35 only 2 ets is optional if one time slot selected 3 DEV options are ONLY valid for 2V35 port 4 SW option is reserved for maintenance Mercury v35 1a 1 10 dev 3 Mercury stat v35 lst parameter error Mercury stat 1 TYPE 1V35 CLK NO ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Configuration RL no Speed 640 Kbps RTS off DTR off CTS on DSR on DCD on RI off Time Slot 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Connection active TXC normal RXC normal Figure 3 49 V 35 Command Screen 3 6 49 X50 Command B Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 B Purpose Setup X 50 parameters It supports 5 physical RS 232 interfaces to connect to the low speed 2400 4800 9600 19200 data terminal and all those 5 channels will occupy 1 time slot 64 Kbps According to the definition of ITU T standards X 50 division 3 it allows 8 bit envelope to be a phase frame for the 12 8 Kbps channels to repeat every 5 8 bit envelope in a 64 Kbps data rate Due to some of the bits are used for phase frame information and signaling resident in these 12 8 Kbps channels these bearer channel rates are for 2400 to 9600 bps only However if the data rate is selected to be19200 bps this will occupy 2 phases a
91. comes with when system detect the ABCD bit code defined by DET command then convert to the code set by O sig ABCD bit value between 0 to 15 B Example 2b 0 fr 0 11 2 Setup port 2B to B8ZS line coding ESF framing mode and Line indicator to 266feet Mercury help t1 Usage Setup T1 Parameters Syntax T1 port CO co FR fr 11 11 RRL rr1 DRL dr1 AIS ais SIDLE sig DET sig CHG sig Params port port identifier line code FR frame mode LI line driver RRL control remote loopback DRL detect remote loopback AIS Alarm Indication Signal SIDLE Signal Idle DET Signal Detect Number CHG Signal Change Number co 0 B8ZS 1 AMI fr ESF 1 04 2 unframe li 0ft 1 133ft 2 266ft 3 399ft 4 533ft 5 655ft 6 800ft remote loopback off 1 remote loopback ais disable 1 enable sig value between 0 and 15 ABCD bit Notes RRL is used to notify remote device to start stop remote loopback operation Mercury tl 2b 0 fr 0 11 2 Mercury stat 2b TYPE 2T1 CLK YES ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Configuration LL no RL yes RRL CODE b8zs FRAME esf LINE 133 ft DRL on AIS off SIDLE 09h DET 00h CHG 00h 0 0 rrl 0 remote loopback stop 1 remote loopback start 0 0 Figure 3 44 T1 Command Screen 3 6 44 Thre Command B Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 B Purpose Setup PM Performance Monitoring alarm threshold e Default value is 0 to disable the PM alarm threshold
92. enter access mode Figure 3 28 Login Screen Logl Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring 3 6 28 3 6 29 B Purpose List all profile names which are saved in Mercury Series System B Syntax LOGL Example LOGL Listall saved profiles inside the System currently Mercury gt help logl Usage List the Name of Profiles Syntax LOGL Mercury logl Profile List 01 test chamber 02 test 03 demo 04 test 10 M800 Figure 3 29 LOGL Command Screen Logout Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 B Purpose Exit the Access mode and return back to Monitor mode When in Monitor mode it only allows user to view the current alarm history port status and performance information for each port B Syntax LOGOUT B Example LOGOUT Turn back to Monitor mode Mercury gt help logout Usage Enter Monitor Mode Syntax LOGOUT Mercury logout enter monitor mode Figure 3 30 LOGOUT Command Screen Logtf Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3820 B Purpose Upload Download a Profile E Syntax mode address profile proname B Param Mode u upload d download Address TFTP server IP address Profile profile number 1 20 Proname profile name 84 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring 3 6 30 Logr Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 B Purpose Selec
93. for Mercury 800 will be lost if they are not stored into profile in advance Mercury 800 Rear Panel Description Mercury 800 supports 2 selectable I O modules and 2 built in E1 balance unbalanced interface LAN port PPP Craft port and power supply socket the ground screw in the rear panel of Mercury 800 Figure 2 2 shows a typical rear view of Mercury 800 each slot is marked with a label to designate the slot type and definition Table 2 2 describes the function of each port Please refer to Chapter 1 4 about the compatible I O modules for Mercury 800 Figure 2 2 Rear Panel view of Mercury 800 Data port 1 amp 2 are user Plug in cards Data port 3 amp 4 are built in E1 cards while ordered the Balance 1200hm or Unbalanced 75Ohm connector is software Built in router module located on port5A LAN connector with RJ 45 type for built in Router module User selectable port by pressing the front panel button PPP CRAFT to change between Craft port or Auxiliary PPP port functionality Relay contact to extend the major and minor alarm to the office Table 2 2 Rear Panel Description of Mercury 800 40 2 5 Chapter 2 Installation Mercury 3600 3600 Front Panel Description The Mercury 3600 36007 enclosure has 5 slots 4 slots are assigned to the interface modules and the 5 slot is usually for management use It can support up to 16 channels and each card can support 4 channels maximum Figure
94. full authority to operate Mercury including add and modify the newer Login ID and PW When an operator is assigned as Normal user he can also fully Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring operate Mercury but cannot add newer Login ID and PW but can only modify his own ID and PW Supervisor e N Normal User default Mercury help secc Usage Setup ID amp P W confirm Syntax SECC No ID P W mode Params No user number ID identification P W password mode S supervisor N normal user Notes 1 Method of ID amp P W Modification Step 1 use SECE to select new user No ID amp P W Step 2 use SECC to confirm new user No ID amp P W 2 ID amp P W are case sensitive Figure 3 40 SECC Command Screen 3 6 39 Sece Command B Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 B Purpose To change or add ID and PW for enter into Access mode There 5 sets of ID and PW and both of them are case sensitive Two classes of privileges are Supervisor and Normal user one of which can be chosen for each set After modifying or adding the new ID and PW using Sece Command please execute SECC command to reconfirm the changes Once you have made the change please memorize it and DO NOT forget the new ID and PW otherwise you must send your Mercury back to TAINET for service while the ID and PW will be lost forever Syntax SECE No ID P W mode B Param No The user number from 1 to 5 there ar
95. illustrated below The configuration listed below is only related to how to build up the ring and how to drop insert the data from tributary card into the E1 trunk Here the clock is generating by the Mercury at Site A B Structure Figure 3 67 Ring Protection 2 128 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring JM Normal Path Backup Path omm m m m m m P m D Y g E E1 V35 SiteB E1 Ring SiteD gt gt gt 4 lt 4 lt 3 68 Ring protection diagram E1 Ring time slot allocation Source Destination TS Site A port 1A Site C port 1A 1 Site A port 2B Site B port 1A 2 15 CAS signallin 16 Site A port 3C Site D prot 1A 17 23 Site C port 2B Site D port 2A 24 30 Default clock transfering in Ring 31 Table 3 19 Ring time slot allocation B Configurations Site A B C D e El3acas l El 4 1 Setup the E1 link port3A 4A on the ring to CAS mode for voice application Site A e 4 Setup the Ring Protection in Master mode port4A as last port 3A as next port and default time slot 31 for clock transmission e Dropv4al3allal Drop the time slot 1 from ring in port last port 4A ring out port next port 3A to the destinated
96. in your network are stable a long lease time can also reduce the packet exchange between server amp clients SNMP Your Router Module supports SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol agent functionality which allows a manager station to monitor the Router Module through the network Enabling the SNMP function will activate the Router Module as SNMP agent for Mercury Series Product Configuring SNMP The SNMP enabling function can be found in Configuration System Setting up the community and Trap Destination can be performed in Configuration SNMP 197 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 6 9 5 6 9 1 5 6 9 2 Configuration MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 System PPP FR RIP Route Table Security NAT Filter SNMP DHCP SNMP Configuration Enter select ESC previous menu lt left gt right TAB next item Read Community public Set Community private Trap Community public Trap Destination 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Figure 5 48 The sub menu of SNMP settings Router Module provides GET value with SNMP and Get Community has a default setting of public which is the standard SNMP terminology for password The default Community for SET is private Trap Destination provides the Alarm messages of Mercury to the specified IP host System Maintenance This section covers the diagnostic method that helps you maintain your Router Module System
97. key to continue Figure 5 78 The sub menu of Ping menu Target IP The IP address is a unique 4 byte 32 bit numeric value used to Address identify a network and a local host on that network Datagram Size The payload size of TCP datagram 218 5 7 6 2 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Timeout in Timeout in seconds to wait for each reply Seconds Table 5 27 Descriptions of Ping parameters of Information menu Ping measures the round trip time to the destination Round trip time is useful for understanding bandwidth and load conditions on the network If the network has slower links or heavier traffic load the round trip time will be longer Heavy network loads can result in ping failures Information of Ch r module This menu shows the current version of BOOT ROM and FLASH firmware and can get the real time firmware code version in ROM or FLASH memory If the FLASH code version shows this means the code is invalid This usually occurs when user runs the Firmware Update function but does not complete it You must contact your local sales representative service representative or distributor directly for help to resolve this condition Diagnosis Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 07 Ping Information Board Information ENTER select TAB next left right ESC previous menu Figure 5 79 The sub menu of Information menu 219 Appendix A Appendix A Introduct
98. law 0 A law default 1 u law o tgain 0 0dBr 1 1dBr 2 2dBr 3 3dBr 4 4dBr 5 5dBr 6 6dBr 7 7dBr 8 8dBr 9 9dBr 10 10dBr 11 11dBr 12 12dBr 13 13dBr 14 14dBr 15 14 16 2dBr 17 3dBr Hrgain 0 2dBr 1 3dBr 2 4dBr 3 5dBr 4 6dBr 5 7dBr 6 8dBr 7 9dBr 8 10dBr 9 11dBr 10 12dBr 11 13dBr 12 1dBr 13 0dBr 14 1dBr 15 2dBr 16 3dBr 17 4dBr B Notes Parameter of tgain 6 17 amp 7 17 are for 4 wire 600ohm mode only E amp M don t support cross connect with FXS or Fiber Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3820 Purpose Setup FIBER Parameters Syntax FIBER port LL act RL act SIG act SIDLE sig DET sig CHG sig B Parameters port Port identifier o LL Local loopback RL Remote loopback SIG Signaling mode SIDLE Signal Idle DET Signal Detect Number CHG Signal Change Number act 0 off 1 on o sig value between 0 and 15 ABCD bit Notes SIG SIDLE DET and CHG options are for FiberV card only B Example FIBER 1a DET 1 2 Setup 1 Fiber card to detect signal Number 1 and change signal number to 2 FXO Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 Purpose The 4 port FXO telephone card can connect to your local PABX to extend the voice channel to remote FXS card in Mercury 73 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Syntax FXO port DL act TSA act TONE act Tgain tgain Rgain r
99. loaded until further changes are done by the operator supervisor Refer to the following table for the default settings of each card Mercury Series Product also provides up to 20 sets of user profiles for Supervisor to save a specified profile name with the different commands with regard to different 52 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring applications By using LOGB and LOGE commands supervisor can create their own profiles easily When performing command LOGB system will start memorizing and saving the subsequently entered commands into the memory stop and save into the specified profile number and profile name after command LOGE It also allows supervisor to arrange any of the profiles as the initial profiles by commands LOGI when powering on or rebooting the system Mercury will load the selected profiles and execute all commands following the power on sequence Refer to Section 3 6 20 3 6 21 3 6 22 for more detailed description and examples Supervisor may also create a text file such as Windows Notepad to edit all commands in it Optimize your commands copy all commands in this text file and paste them when operating in craft terminal System Command Description Default Setting Craft Craft port speed 4 19200 Clk Clock settings Internal Idle Idle code Ox7E Link port ACT sw Enable Disable the service of alarm sw 0 enable alarm and DAC digital a
100. mode speed from 2400 to 115200bps in sync mode supports external clock up to 128 Kbps Its V 24 Interface in RJ 45 connector can be selected as a craft port alternative Alarm contact connector is used to indicate when an alarm is generated with external buzzer and external LED The following Table 1 2 1 lists main characteristics of Mercury Series product Mercury 800 Mercury 3600 Mercury 3600 Mercury 3820 Cross Connection Up to 10 1 1 Upto 16 Upto 16 TI EI Up to 32 TI El Capacity 3 Chapter 1 Introduction Mercury 800 Mercury 3600 Mercury 3600 Mercury 3820 Time Slot Interchange 608 x 608 1024 x 1024 1024 x 1024 2048 x 2048 Capacity Craft port VT 100 Craft port Craft port Craft port terminal Support VT 100 VT 100 VT 100 PPP mode terminal terminal terminal Management Ethernet Telnet Optional Router s PPP nd PPP interface SNMP Router C moge Ethernet Telnet Ethernet Telnet provides SNMP SNMP Ethernet for Telnet SNMP Built in SNMP Optional Built in SNMP Built in SNMP Agent Router Router Agent Agent In band management module In band In band via DSO works as management management SNMP Out band SNMP Agent via DSO up to via DSO up to Management management via 16 remote 16 remote Ethernet nodes nodes Out band Out band management management via Ethernet via Et
101. monitor this device through the IP network Enable the SNMP function will activate the Router module as SNMP agent for Mercury Series Product This settings are in the 209 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 7 4 Configuration SNMP menu Configuration Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d System AUX Port Interface TSA Routing Table SNMP SNMP Configuration SNMP Community Read Community public Set Community private Trap Community public Trap Destination IP Address1 172 16 5 58 IP Address2 0 0 0 0 IP Address3 0 0 0 0 IP Address4 0 0 0 0 IP Address5 0 0 0 0 Input ASCII SPACE BS DEL TAB ENTER next field lt left right ESC abort Figure 5 64 The sub menu of SNMP settings Read To provide GET function with SNMP and GET Community has Community a default of public Set To provide SET function with SNMP and SET Community has Community a default of private Trap To provide the TRAP alarm with SNMP and TRAP Community Community has a default of public Trap To Indicate the specified IP host for alarm trap messages Destination Table 5 21 Descriptions of SNMP parameters Monitoring Menu Monitoring Menu displays the current status for your Ch r module you will find more detail descriptions on later sections B Interface This field allows the user to view the status of each interface of Ch r module B Routing Table Dis
102. of AUX port PPP setting 1 The standard PPP encapsulate can be set up as above table or you can assign the IP to the remote site Site A 100 0 0 1 24 Site B 100 0 0 2 24 Traffic IP Routing Traffic IP Routing Types Types Encapsulate Local IP Encapsulate Local IP 100 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 lt PPP gt address lt PPP gt address Net Mask 255 255 255 0 Net Mask 0 0 0 0 181 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 6 4 4 Remote IP Remote IP 100 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 address address Table 5 11 Example of AUX port PPP setting 2 B Unnumbered Setting IP unnumbered can be configured for AUX interface as well Configure the AUX Local IP Address the same as the Router LAN IP and assign Net Mask IP to 255 255 255 255 will now enable the AUX IP unnumbered Frame Relay Setup Configuring Frame Relay on a Router Module includes the mapping of IP addresses to DLCIS and telling the router which virtual circuits are connected Enable the Frame Relay Encapsulation by changing the WAN protocol to Frame Relay See the following Figure 5 27 Configuration MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14a System PPP FR Route Table Security NAT Filter SNMP DHCP Setup LAN Local IP SubNetMask amp WAN Protocol amp AUX IP SubNetMask Remote IP Enter select ESC previous menu lt left 2 right TAB next item Traffic Types IP Routing LAN IP Address 172 16 14 254
103. of Mercury Series Product and also show the detailed format for each valid command text B Purpose command Syntax HELP cmd B Param cmd Example HELP HELP clk View the detailed format of clk command Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Mercury gt help Help Message Help Message ABOUT About Mercury ALM View Clear Alarm History BOOT System Reboot CLK Setup Clock Source CLR Clear Port Status CLS Clear Screen CRAFT Setup Craft Speed DATE Setup Date 1 Setup 1 Parameters FXS Setup FXS Parameters HELP Help Message IDLE Setup Idle Code IDSL Setup IDSL Parameters LINK Setup Link Parameters LOGB Start Logging Profile LOGE Stop amp Save Append Profile LOGI Select Profiles for Reboot LOGIN Enter Access Mode LOGL List the Name of Profiles LOGOUT Enter Monitor Mode LOGR Run Specified Profiles LOGV View Contents of a Profile NET Setup Network Device PM Performance Monitor SECC Setup ID amp P W confirm SECE Setup ID amp P W entry SIGIDL Setup Idle Signal STAT View Port Status T1 Setup T1 Parameters THRE Setup PM Threshold TIME Setup Time USER View User Status v35 Setup V 35 Parameters x50 Setup X 50 MUX Parameters XC Setup Connection Port XT Setup Connection Timeslot XV View Connection Table DROP Setup Add Drop Connection TS RP Setup ring protection RS530 Setup RS530 Parameters XSLT Setup extend slot5 for Mercury 3600 only NMS Setup NMS amp SNMP link port for Mercury 3600 only NOTE 1
104. or other communication equipment providing the link to the specified module 3 Replace the module SLIP Transmit Elastic Store Problem at unstable clock Alarm Minor Slip Detected Tx clock source slip on indicated port ALM OFF Alarm Off Alarm report Informative message no State Minor has been switch off at action required specified port Table 4 11 24 module alarm message 4 POTS FXO Voice Module Table 4 12 lists the alarm messages generated by the 4 POTS FXO voice module specifies their class Major or Minor type Alarm Performance Monitoring and State and explains their meaning Message Description Corrective Actions Type Class 15 ES Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Errored Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 148 4 1 12 Chapter 4 Maintenance Message Description Corrective Actions Type Class 15 SES Severely Errored Seconds Counting Severely Errored Seconds over 15 minutes threshold Informative alert Major 15 UA Unavailable Second Counting Unavailable Second over 15 minutes threshold Informative alert Major 1H ES Errored Seconds Counting Errored Seconds over 1 hour threshold Informative alert Major 1H SES Severely Errored Seconds Counting Severely Errored Seconds over 1 hour threshold Informative alert Major
105. port 1A with voice parameter Drop 4a23a22b2 14 Drop the time slot 2 to 15 from ring in port last port 4A ring 129 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring out port next port 3A to the destinated port 2B e Drop 4 17 173c 177 Drop the time slot 17 to 23 from ring in port last port 4A ring out port next port 3A to the destinated port 3C Site B e Rpls4a3a Setup the Ring Protection in Slave mode port4A as last port 3A as next port and default time slot 31 for clock transmission e Xtv4al3al Time slot 1 in El ring is for voice application and remember to pass this voice signalling to its destination e Drop 4a23a2 1 2 14 Drop the time slot 2 to 15 from ring in port 4A out port 3A to the destinated port 1A Site e Rpls4a3a Setup the Ring Protection in Slave mode port4A as last port 3A as next port and default time slot 31 for clock transmission e Drop v 4a 1 3al lal Drop the time slot 1 from ring in port 4A out port 3A to the destinated port 1A with voice parameter v Drop 4a 24 3a 24 2b 24 7 Drop the time slot 24 to 30 from ring in port 4A ring out port 3A to the destinated port 2B Site D e Rpls4a3a Setup the Ring Protection in Slave mode port4A as last port 3A as next port and default time slot 31 for clock transmission e Xtv4al 3al Time slot 1 in El ring is for voice application and remember to pass this voice signaling to its destination e Drop 4 17 17 la
106. reporting 15 min UA ES SES CV threshold 1 900 sec 0 disable 1 hour UA ES SES CV threshold 1 3600 sec 0 disable 1 day UA ES SES CV threshold 1 86400 sec 0 disable All CV threshold 1 2E 9 bit 0 disable B Syntax THRE type UA ua ES es SES ses CV cv B Param 99 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring None Display current PM threshold if no parameter Type Choose which of the PM type you want to change its threshold There are 3 periods of types 0 15min 1 lhour 2 1day o UA Unavailable seconds is any second in which a failed signal exists A failed signal state is declared when 10 consecutive Severely Errored Seconds SES occur and is cleared after 10 consecutive seconds of data are processed without a SES oua Current 15min Ihour 1day UA threshold ES Error Seconds is any second containing one or more CRC error controlled slip or OOF events es Current 15min Ihour 1day ES threshold SES Severely error seconds is a second with 2 to 319 CRC error events or one or more OOF events ses Current 15min Ihour 1day SES threshold CV Code violation or Bipolar violation the total number of code violation or bipolar violation counted in the last minute Current CV threshold B Example THRE 0 ua 100 es 100 e Setup UA and ES of 15 min PM threshold to 100 sec THRE View current PM threshold setting 100 Chapter 3 Configuration
107. sec 3 sec off 30 Hz 1 sec on 2 sec off 30 Hz 1 sec on 3 sec off Tgain Tx direction relative gain 0 OdBr default 1 14 2 2dBr 3 3dBr 4 5 42 9 9 tgain AdBr 5dBr Rgain direction relative gain OdBr default IdBr 2dBr 4dBr 5 TSA TSA loopback reserved for factory testing o 2 tone injection act 0 off default 1 on WN KF Note e 1 Param TSA and TONE are only for 4 POTS FXS card And Param and TTX are only for 4 FXS 4 FXS D card 4 POTS FXS card support selection 2 amp 3 for Param RING only and 4 FXS 4 FXS D card support all selections from 0 to 7 B Example FXS la law 0 r 1 start 0 ring 4 ttx 2 tgain 0 rgain 2 e Setup 1A FXS card to 900 Ohm line impedance 25 Hz 1 sec on 2 sec off 16K Hx ttx on Tx direction gain to OdBr and Rx direction gain to 2dBr 76 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Mercury help fxs Usage Setup FXS Parameters Syntax FXS port R r DL dl TTX ttx RING ring Tgain tgain Rgain rgain Params port port identifier RING ring frequency amp cadency R impedance Tgain Tx direction relative gain DL digital loopback Rgain Rx direction relative gain teltex tone r 0 600 ohm 1 900 ohm disable 1 enable ttx off 1 12KHz ttx on 17 Hz 1sec on 2sec off
108. slot portC 1C as the Secondary clock Mercury gt clk Master 3A Secondary invalid Active holdover Mercury gt clk int Master invalid Secondary invalid Active internal Mercury gt clk 1 Master 3A Secondary 1c Active holdover Figure 3 10 CLK Command Screen 3 6 7 Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 B Purpose Clear the status of the indicated port B Syntax CLR port 61 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring B Param None Clear all ports status if no parameter Port Clear the indicated port status B Example CLR Clear all status for all ports in Mercury CLR Clear port status for port 3A Mercury gt help clr Usage Clear Port Status Syntax CLR port Params port port identifier Notes clear all ports if no parameter Mercury gt clr Mercury gt clr 3a Figure 3 11 CLR Command Screen 3 6 8 Cls Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 W Purpose Clear the screen B Syntax CLS B Example CLS Clear the screen Mercury gt help cls Usage Clear Screen Syntax CLS Mercury gt cls Figure 3 12 CLS Command Screen 3 6 9 Craft Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 B Purpose Define the supervised craft port data rate The available speed is 1 2 Kbps 115 2 Kbps for 800 3600 3820 1 2 Kbps 19 2 Kbps for 3600 Syntax CRAFT speed B Param None View current craft por
109. telephone company central office that receives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line connections and puts the signals on the a high speed backbone line using multiplexing techniques Depending on the product DSLAM Multiple x e r connects DSL lines with some combination of asynchronous transfer mode ATM frame relay or IP networks DTE Originally Data Terminal Equipment meant Dumb Terminal Equipment But today it is a computer bridge or router that interconnects local area network LAN in increasingly more intelligent ways Dynamic route Also known as adaptive routing this technique automatically adapts to traffic or physical network revisions A very common method of networking computers in a LAN There are a number of adaptations to the IEEE 802 3 Ethernet standard including adaptations with data Ethernet rates of 10 Mbps and 100 Mbps over coaxial cable twisted pair cable and fiber optical cable FTP File transfer protocol The TCP IP protocol used for transmitting files between network nodes it supports a broad range of file types and is defined in RFC 959 A gateway is a computer system or other device that acts as translator between two Gateway systems that do not use the same communication protocols data formatting structures languages and or architecture Hyper Text Transfer Protocol The most common protocol used on the Internet HTTP is the primary protocol used for we
110. the general feature description application technical specification and the information of the tributary modules 1 1 General Description The Mercury Series Integrated Access Devices Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 are based on high capacity 1 0 non blocking cross connection technology With modularized design Mercury provides diversified interfaces for terminating network circuits and connecting various Data Voice Video equipment DSO traffic can be consolidated groomed and connected among network interfaces and service interfaces In any combinations full time slot interchange TSI among ports are possible One alarm contact connector in front or rear panel and LED display in front panel provide alarm indicators for operator to monitor and maintain the system The interface card for Mercury 800 is the same as Mercury 3600 3600 and 3820 but with different internal connector design The built in non channelized router module for Mercury 800 or 16 channels Channelized router module 32 timeslots totally for Mercury 3600 3820 for SNMP agent function are supported Also the firmware of Mercury 800 and 3600 3820 can be upgraded by using TFTP program Mercury 800 Mercury 800 is a small size multi access platform for 64 Kbps base unit It supports built in 2 E1 interface and router module other 2 slots are used for optional modules in different applications This compact 2 port mini multi service device is best suitabl
111. the router and other devices B Statistics Monitoring MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 Current Config Routing Table ARP Table Statistics Buffer DHCP View Device Statistics Enter select ESC previous menu lt left gt right TAB next item LAN WAN AUX Rx Octets 11265415 201421296 0 Rx Right Packets 75398 179206 0 Rx Broadcast Packets 82521 0 0 Rx Discarded Packets 0 0 0 Rx Error Packets 1 0 0 Rx Unknow Protocols 12725 0 0 Tx Octets 201682346 5207276 0 Tx Packets 135856 117713 0 Tx Broadcast Packets 2 0 0 Tx Discarded Packets 0 0 0 Rx Throughput Octets 286 24 0 Tx Throughput Octets 400 25 0 Press any key to return Figure 5 15 The sub menu for current statistics The Statistics provides a snapshot view of interface packets flow count the screen will automatically refresh to provide the current status 173 Chapter 5 Router Configuration B NAT Buffer Monitoring MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 Current Config Routing Table ARP Table Statistics Buffer DHCP View NAT s Free Buffers Enter select ESC previous menu lt left gt right TAB next item TCP Free IP 300 TCP Free Connection 1500 UDP Free IP 200 UDP Free Connection 500 ICMP Free IP 20 ICMP Free Connection 50 Press any key to return Figure 5 16 The sub menu to show current NAT Buffer Field Description TCP Free IP Th
112. with the managed Mercury system via the serial RS 232 communication ports The serial port is generally configured as a DTE for Mercury 800 3600 and 3820 or DCE for Mercury 3600 port for direct connection to a terminal The Null Modem Kit may be required when it works in DTE mode it can also connect the terminal via a leased line modem link or a low speed data multiplexer channel Thus a remote operator can perform all the functions available from a craft terminal connected to the Mercury system Remote Management using Telnet over IP The Mercury system supports the Telnet communication protocol which enables any IP host to access the Mercury system supervision facility using TCP IP communication The Telnet user has access to the same command line interface that is available to the user of a craft terminal For Mercury 3600 one of the Channelize or Non channelize Router modules is requiring to provide this function 6 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 2 General Application This section presents typical Mercury applications and explains special application considerations 1 2 1 1 Converter The Mercury systems be used as programmable T1 E1 converters A typical system configuration is shown in Figure 1 1 To perform the required conversion the Mercury system must include both module and E1 modules and the time slots must be routed as required between port and an port T1 to E1 Converter
113. 0 0 0 0 0 000000000000 0 0 0 0 000000000000 Figure 5 46 The sub menu of DHCP settings Field Description Default Lease Time This field specifies an IP address lease time for clients Secs It is base on seconds and the default value is 86400 24 hrs Gateway Those fields specify an IP default gateway DNS server and DNS Server WINS server to Windows 95 98 Windows NT and other 196 5 6 8 5 6 8 1 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Field Description WINS Server systems that support the DHCP client The default value for Gateway 1s the LAN IP address of this device IP address pool for Setup the dynamic IP scope in this field IP will be assigned Dynamic Leases to client machines in this range IP Ethernet Address Assign the fixed IP to special clients or other server Mapping for Fixed machines e g servers for mail FTP telnet web etc that you Leases may have to their known Ethernet address Figure 5 47 Descriptions of DHCP parameters Note There aren t any configurations about Network Mask for clients because Router Module will use the Network Mask value from configuration item of the LAN encapsulation The fix IP address should not be include inside the IP address pool range of dynamic leases else there will be an IP conflict in your network The Default Lease Time suggestion If you have some hosts move in and move out frequently a short lease time 15 preferred If hosts
114. 0 Return loss 5 10 Mhz gt 15db Impedance balance 20Mhz lt 29 17log 5 10 Common mode output voltage 50mV Differential mode output voltage See 802 3 14 1 pulse template Input impedance 5 10 850 1110 Transmission length 100m Ratio Isolated resistor gt 2MQ Leakage current At 1 5kv 10ma Table 1 3 Physical Characteristic of E1 El Interface 1 4 E1 2CB U General Description 2 or 4 ports 1 card with Balance or Unbalance interface Electrical Characteristic Line Rate 2 048 Mbps 50 ppm Line Code HDB3 Input Signal ITU T G 703 Coding ITU T G 704 Jitter ITU T G 823 Framing CCS CAS Unframed o Timeslot Allocation User defined any time slot 0 31 to any time slot mapping Clock Source Can be set to derived external clock from received port A or C B E amp M Interface 4P POTS E amp M General Description The 4P POTS E amp M Card can provides four analog voice interfaces Either 2 wire or 4 wire can selected by Dip Switch the impedance of the 2 wire can select 600ohm or 900ohm by Dip Switch and the 4 wire impedance is 600ohm its supported Signaling Type is E amp M Signaling Type I V and Jumper selectable The configuration of its driver mode is E Lead Originated or called Side B Signaling Unit Side 15 Chapter 1 Introduction The analog signals can converted to 64Kbps PCM digital signals with A law u law which selected by soft
115. 0 3600 and 3820 units use modular 19 chassis Mercury 800 uses modular 9 5 chassis Each chassis provides various physical slots that can be installed with different modules by the user to obtain the desired configuration The Power Supply system can include redundant power supply module except for the 5 Chapter 1 Introduction Mercury 800 which uses external power supply on I O slot When redundant power module is installed they share the load current In case one of them fails the other takes over the full load without disruption normal operation User interfacing system consists of I O modules The number of I O modules that can be installed in a chassis depends on the chassis type Handling of Alarm and Performance Conditions The Mercury Series Product provides indications regarding problems on one of its link to the other link The alarm indications will support the current alarm and performance monitoring in the individual data link System Management The Mercury Series Product supports two system management options Use of a craft terminal controlled by the CLI Command Line Interface program stored in the Mercury Local and remote management by generic IP hosts using the Telnet communication protocol the management functions being similar to those provided by a craft terminal Craft Terminal Capabilities The craft terminal provides a simple command line interface The terminals can communicate
116. 0ABCD bit Mercury help sigidl Usage Setup idle signal Syntax SIGIDL code Params code hexadecimal value between 0 and F 0000ABCD bit NOTE 1 view idle signal code if no parameter 2 idle signal code for 1 and el only Mercury sigidl idle signal code 09 Figure 3 42 SIGIDL Command Screen 3 6 42 Stat Command B Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 B Purpose 96 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Display the current status information that is stored in the alarm buffer including the configuration and cross connect table for a selected port B Syntax STAT port B Param None Show the status for all ports port Port identifier for the selected port B Example STAT View status for all plugged in ports in Mercury STAT View port status Mercury gt stat CH TYPE CLK TOTAL UAR ER SER CV BPV ALARM DAC Lzzzzlzlzlzlzzlzzlzl hour mm sszzzzzzzzzzlzl llzlzllllzllllllllllll l l Maj Min 1 0 0 5 0 0 1 0 0 1D 4IDSL NO 0007 15 35 1 0E 00 0 0E 00 0 0E 00 N A 0001 0000 ON 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 Mercury stat 3a TYPE 1E1 75 Cross Connect 5000 1 000 1 001 1 002 XXXXXX XXXXXX 5008 XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX 5016 5024
117. 1 DSRRS530 Data Set Ready signal default act 1 DCD RS530 Data Carrier Detect signal default act 1 5530 Ring Indicator signal default act 0 act O signalinactive 1 signal active INV TxC and RxC clock polarity 0 TxC normal amp RxC normal default 1 normal amp RxC inverted 2 TxC inverted amp RxC normal 3 TxC inverted amp RxC inverted B Example RS530 2a 1 6 dsr 0 Setup the speed for RS530 card on port 2A to 384 Kbps start from time slot 1 and end with time slot 6 Deactivate the DSR signal 91 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Mercury gt help rs530 Usage Setup RS530 parameters Syntax RS530 port sts ets CTS act DSR act DCD act RI act Params port sts ets CTS DSR DCD RI INV act inv NOTE INV inv port identifier start time slot number end time slot number RS530 CTS signal RS530 DSR signal RS530 DCD signal RS530 RI signal TXC and RXC polarity 0 signal inactive 1 signal active 0 TXC normal amp RXC normal 1 TXC normal amp RXC inverted 2 TXC inverted amp RXC normal 3 TXC inverted amp RXC inverted 1 valid time slot number is between 1 and 31 2 ets is optional if one time slot selected Mercury rs530 2 1 6 dsr 0 Mercury stat 2a TYPE 1RS530 CLK NO ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Configuration RL no Speed 384 Kbps RTS off DTR off CTS on DSR off DCD on RI off Time Slot 01 02 03 04 05 06 Connection active TXC norm
118. 1 Usage Setup IDSL Parameters Syntax IDSL port OP op RDL rdl Params port port identifier OP operation mode RDL remote digital loopback mode op 0 1 1 1 2 ssp 3 dt 4 41 5 quiet 0 normal 1 2B D 2 B1 3 B2 Notes RDL operation is valid when connected op 0 Mercury idsl 1 0 Mercury gt idsl 1 1 Mercury stat 1b TYPE 4IDSL CLK NO ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Configuration MODE al Figure 3 23 IDSL Command Screen Link Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 Purpose Enable the local and remote loopback testing for most of the tributary cards By the way this LINK command can also enable disable the alarm or cross connect service DAC B Syntax LINK port LL sw RL sw ACT act B Param port Setup the indicated port o LL Enable the local loopback the outgoing signal is looped back through the internal digital time slot interchanged circuit All DSO time slots are looped back to the received path This will check the time slot cross connected table and the physical connection to the user equipment that provides the signal RL Enable the remote loopback it returns the outside received signal back to the original user equipment This will check the data port including the interface physical cable and connectors which connects to the remote user equipment O SW 0 disable l enable 2 enable with AIS only available for LL command the internal s
119. 115 Voice Card Application Diagram 116 Fiber 2 Application 117 Fiber B Application Diagram 117 Router Application Diagram 118 Figure 3 62 Figure 3 63 Figure 3 64 Figure 3 65 Figure 3 66 Figure 3 67 Figure 3 68 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Figure 5 9 Figure 5 10 Figure 5 11 Figure 5 12 Figure 5 13 Figure 5 14 Figure 5 15 Figure 5 16 Figure 5 17 Figure 5 18 Figure 5 19 Figure 5 20 Figure 5 21 Figure 5 22 Figure 5 23 Figure 5 24 Figure 5 25 Figure 5 26 Figure 5 27 Figure 5 28 Figure 5 29 Figure 5 30 Mercury Series User s Manual Rev 1 6 Protection ieena 119 CP Command 1 1 Hee 121 1 1 Revertive Protection with priority 4 0200 123 N 1 Revertive Proction 125 Ring Protection E 127 Ring Protecti N Ed EN 128 ERE 129 Loop to it pci e e E recita 153 Remote Loop tee rennen nenne
120. 176 Drop the time slot 17 to 23 from ring in port 4A out port 3A to the destination port 1A Drop 4a 24 3a 24 2b 24 7 Drop the time slot 24 to 30 from ring in port 4A ring out port 3A to the destinated port 2B Chapter 4 Maintenance Chapter 4 Maintenance ABOUT THIS CHAPTER This Chapter describes the alarm message performance monitoring and loop testing function for diagnostic 4 1 Status of Alarm Message Description This section provides information on the alarms generated by each module specifies their type and provides instructions for using the module specific diagnostic functions The Mercury maintains an alarm buffer The buffer can store one alarm event of each type and a maximum of 100 alarms can be displayed on the terminal This section will present the alarm messages displayed on the terminal by module and lists the actions required to correct the alarm condition To correct the reported problem perform the corrective actions in the order given in the table until the problem is rectified If problem cannot be corrected by carrying out the listed actions the Mercury has to be checked by qualified technical support personnel E1 Module Table 4 1 lists the alarm messages generated by the E1 module specifies their class major or minor type alarm or performance monitoring and explains their meaning Message Description Corrective Actions Type C
121. 1A during normal stage 1B 1A 1B 1C When Loopl fails port 1A detects the alarm criteria which can be set by user system will execute the pre defined profile 2 and change the uni directional connection from 1A 1B to 1C IB then all the traffic will be transmitted and received through port 1B and 1C 1B 1C 1B14A System will keep detecting the alarm on port 1A If the alarm is cleared system will reload profile 1 and revert back to original traffic path 118 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring B Structure Mercury A Mercury B oe pue 1A 1C ES p Figure 3 62 1 1 Protection Actions on Port 1A Alarm Alarm off gt on on gt off Run profile 2 Run profile 1 xcs 1c 1b xcs 1a 1b able3 15 states table B Configurations Mercury A e Clk int Setup to internal clock Mercury B e 1 Setup the master clock received from port the slave clock is from port 1C Mercury A amp B e Xclalb Cross port 1A to port 1B e Xcs 1b 1 Uni directional cross from source port 1B to destination port 1 e Cplaoff10n 2sw l Enable the call profile facility on port 1A if the criteria of Major or Minor alarm are detected system will execute profile 2 and change the traffic to Loop2 If the alarm is cleared on port 1A system will execute profile 1 to change the traffic back to Loopl Profiles saved in both Mercury A amp B Logb
122. 1P SHDSL V card is a signal port Single pair High speed Digital Subscriber Line SHDSL system and a high performance transmission technology is fully conforming to ITU T G 991 2 It supports CPE mode and CO mode application and select with software set It supports multi rate trunk solution for Mercury 3820 and low cost service The data rate is directly with T1 E1 Nx64k bps e 1P SHDSL V card also provide voice signaling information transmission function It is included a mode Signaling mode to transmit voice 17 Chapter 1 Introduction signaling information ABCD bits Therefore it can be a trunk for voice application In signaling mode Timeslot 0 is used to transmit signaling bits ABCD bits Therefore it only could be able to transmit signaling bits in Frame mode 1P SHDSL V card provides 31 channels in Frame mode And it can support 30 channels voice data at most o Electrical Characteristic Meet ITU T G 991 2 relative requirements Loop performance and performance test meet ITU T G 991 2 requirements EOC embedded operation channel supporting Power back off supporting Line code Trellis Coded Pulse Amplitude Modulation TC PAM LTU and NTU mode Wetting current source sub module Line protection ITU T K 20 Port Number One port per card Line Speed Multi rate 200 2064 Kbps increment step 64K bps Date rate 64K to 2 048M bps increment step 64K bps Connector RJ 45 135 ohm balanced via
123. 2 1 2 2 3 Jump Pin 2 3 1 2 1 2 2 3 Channel 3 Channel 4 Header 19 JT11 JTI2 Header JT13 JT14 5 JT16 Jump Pin 2 3 1 2 1 2 2 3 Jump Pin 2 3 1 2 1 2 2 3 PIN ASSIGNMENT 2 JT15 JT14 JT11 JT10 JT7 JT6 JT2 JT16 JT13 JT12 JT9 JT8 JT5 JTl JTA JT3 TYPE IV Channel Channel Header Header Jump Pin Jump Pin Channel Header Jump Pin PIN ASSIGNMENT 2 JT15 JT14 JT11 JT10 JT7 JT6 JT2 JT16 JT13 JT12 JT9 JT8 JT5 JT1 JT4 JT3 TYPE V Channel Channel Header Header Jump Pin Jump Pin Channel Channel Header Header Jump Pin Jump Pin PIN ASSIGNMENT 2 3 JT15 JT14 11 JT10 JT2 JT16 JT13 1 JT9 JT1 B 2W 4W AND IMPEDANCE SELECTIOR It used a DIP Switch to configure a 2 Wire mode or 4 Wire mode in this circuit And connected into 600ohm or 900ohm in 2 Wire mode or into 600ohm in 4 wire mode 235 Appendix A 2 Wire 6000 2 Wire 9000 4 Wire 6000 Figure A 18 2W 4W AND IMPEDANCE SELECTIOR Appendix B Appendix B Ordering Information B 1 Product Code Part Number 00010 00003 Mercury 800 Order Information Description MERCURY 800 BASE UNIT ASSEMBLY Main Option Equipment Annex Option Equipment 00010 00023 00010 00004 MERCURY 800 BASE UNIT WITH DC MERCURY 800 4 1 1200 33010 00025 DB25 gt 4
124. 25 IDB25 M gt 4 RJ 48 cable 33008 00010 IRJ 45 CABLE 24AWG 2M 33010 00006 IDB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 35015 00001 00008 40004 MERCURY 4E1 BOARD 750 IRJ 45 PHONE BOX Product Code Part Number 33010 00024 Description Main Option Equipment DB25 M gt 8BNC cable Appendix B Annex Option Equipment 33010 00026 DB25 M 2 8BNC cable F 09100 60047 IBNC F gt F connector 33010 00006 00008 40005 MERCURY 2 1 BOARD 750 DB25 M 2 F cable 1 8m 33010 00024 DB25 M gt SBNC cable 33010 00026 DB25 M 2 8BNC cable F 09100 60047 IBNC F gt F connector 33010 00006 00008 40006 MERCURY 2E1 BOARD 1200 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 33010 00025 IDB25 M gt 4 RJ 48 cable 33008 00010 IRJ 45 CABLE 24AWG 2M 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 35015 00001 00008 40007 MERCURY 2 1 BOARD 100Q 45 PHONE BOX 33010 00025 IDB25 M gt 4 RJ 48 cable 33008 00010 IRJ 45 CABLE 24AWG 2M 33010 00006 IDB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 35015 00001 00008 40011 00008 40012 MERCURY A uBOARD MERCURY 2V35 BOARD 45 PHONE BOX 33010 00002 IDB25 M gt V 35 cable 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 33010 00013 DB25 M gt 35 M cable 35014 00011 00008 40013 00008 40014 MERCUR
125. 35 00 0192 5 4 SPACE refresh page lt page gt page down ESC abort Figure 5 68 The sub menu to view current ARP table IP Address The IP address of the learned LAN devices Ethernet This field lists the Media Access Control MAC addresses of the MAC learned LAN devices Table 5 24 Descriptions of ARP Table of Monitoring menu 5 7 4 4 Statistics of Ch r module The Statistics provides a snapshot view of packet flow on all interfaces This table can be viewed from the Monitoring Statistics menu Monitoring Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d Interface Routing Table ARP Table Statistics View Interface Statistics Iface RX octets pkts err pkts TX octets pkts 1 WAN 01 1070320 15278 0 1104464 15533 2 WAN 02 1070320 15278 0 1104464 15533 3 WAN 03 0 0 0 0 0 4 WAN 04 1063241 10215 0 1125411 10323 5 WAN 05 0 0 0 0 0 6 WAN 06 0 0 0 0 0 7 WAN 07 0 0 0 0 0 8 WAN 08 0 0 0 0 0 9 WAN 09 0 0 0 0 0 10 WAN 10 0 0 0 0 0 11 WAN 11 0 0 0 0 0 12 WAN 12 0 0 0 0 0 SPACE refresh page lt page up gt page down ESC abort Figure 5 69 The sub menu to view the statistics of each interface 213 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 7 5 5 7 5 1 Ifece To identify the Network interface including LAN and WAN interface RX octets Number of octets received by the LAN or WAN interface RX pkts Number of correct packets received by the LAN or WAN interface RX err pkts Number of er
126. 3600 and 3820 the router module is already built into the systems The NET command is for entering the TCS Terminal Configuration System mode with a user friendly configuration interface provided by the Router module itself for configuring and monitoring it The default password is root for entering into Router module For more detailed settings please refer to the Manual of Router Module For Mercury 3820 and 3600 there is a different syntax for this Net command and please refer to the following page B Syntax NET port B Param Port The port number which Router module located B Example NET 5A Enter into Router module on port 5A Mercury gt help net Usage Setup Network Device Syntax NET port Params port port identifier Mercury net 5a Mercury Welcome to use MERCURY Router Module Please Enter Password Figure 3 33 NET Command Screen B Accommodate Mercury 3600 3820 B Purpose The NET command of Mercury 3600 and 3820 allow the equipment to enter TCS mode provided by Router module In Mercury 3820 it is located at 11A in Mercury 3600 it is located at 6A It also lets user enable the DAC sharing function with port10B of Mercury 3820 and port 5B of Mercury 3600 if the user wants to make this router module perform in band management function by cross connecting the WAN port to other interface and establish WAN connection to the remote router When user wants to use the WAN p
127. 45 8P8C TWIST PAIR 33010 00002 DB25 M gt V35 F CABLE 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F CABLE 1 8M 33010 00013 DB25 M gt V35 CABLE 33010 00023 DB25 M 2 DB15 F 20cm FOR X 21 33010 00004 DB25 M 2 DB37 F FOR RS 449 33010 00011 00010 00028 MERCURY 800 4P V24 DCE gt DCE SYNC NULL MODEM 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F CABLE 1 8M 33010 00011 00007 70001 ROUTER MODULE DCE gt DCE SYNC NULL MODEM 33008 00011 RJ 45 PHONE WIRE GRAY 8P8C 2M 24AWG TWIST CROSS 35014 00011 DCE gt DCE sync null modem DB25P M DB25P F 35015 00001 00007 70006 CHANNELIZE ROUTER RJ 45 PHONE BOX 33008 00011 RJ 45 PHONE WIRE GRAY 8P8C 2M 24AWG TWIST CROSS 35014 00011 DCE gt DCE sync null modem DB25P M DB25P F Appendix B B 2 Product Code Part Number 00008 40001 1 Mercury 3600 Order Information Description MERCURY 3600 ASSEMBLY Main Option Equipment Annex Option Equipment m Main Option Mercury 800 Order Information Annex Option Equipment 00008 40009 2 secondary power 00008 40010 MERCURY 3600 ASSEMBLY WITH DC 00008 40008 IDC 2 secondary power 00008 40002 33010 00025 MERCURY 4E1 BOARD 1200 DB25 gt 4 RJ 48 cable 33008 00010 45 CABLE 24AWG 2M 33010 00006 IDB25 M gt cable 1
128. 5 70 Manipulation Frame Relay via Mercury Series 185 Application of Bridging 2 21 0 185 The sub menu to setup Ethernet Bridging sss 186 The sub menu of RIP function eese nentes 187 An application of the 189 The sub menu of routing table eese cese nnne 189 The sub menu of setting the Static routes 189 The sub menu of setting Default 190 The sub menu of NAT configuration menu 191 Example of NAT nennen 192 Choose the tcr e rbi i 193 Proxy Port Eist Selllp uii poet tiere ti ertt b 193 Statie Configuring 194 The sub menu of Incoming Filter 8 00001012 194 The sub menu of Incoming 195 The sub menu of DACP settings ie prebere hes 196 Descriptions of DHCP 197 The sub menu of SNMP settings s ase se euet 198 TELP Server settings rnern
129. 5 card 0 DTE without clock default 1 DTE with clock 2 DCE without clock 3 DTE with clock and TxC RxC ExC 4 DCE with clock and TxC RxC ExC TxC and RxC clock polarity 0 TxC normal amp RxC normal default 1 TxC normal amp RxC inverted 2 TxC inverted amp RxC normal 3 TxC inverted amp RxC inverted o V35 la 1 10 dev 3 e Setup the speed for V 35 card on port 1A to 640 Kbps start from time slot 1 and end with time slot 10 Set the clock mode to dev 3 DTE with clock and TxC RxC ExC DEV 0 DEV 1 TxC ExC Mercury XC y DEV Mercury TxC y 2V35 RxC DTE 2V35 RxC DCE without DCE ExC Seck mode clock mode qe DEV 2 DEV 3 DEV 4 TxC ExC TxC RxC ExC TxC RxC ExC M TxC ercury DEV Mercury gt DEV Mercury DEV mode LEXO clock mode xC clock mode clock NULL NULL Modem Modem 105 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Mercury help v35 Usage Setup V 35 parameters Syntax V35 port sts ets CTS act DSR act DCD act RI act DEV dev INV inv SW decimal value Params port port identifier sts start time slot number ets end time slot number CTS V 35 CTS signal DSR V 35 DSR signal DCD V 35 DCD signal RI V 35 RI signal DEV the type of device connected to INV TXC and RXC polarity act signal inactive 1 signal active dev DTE without clock 1 DTE with clock DCE without
130. 76 Success to upgrade the Firmware After file transfer is complete follow the instructions and Cold Start the Ch r module 217 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 7 6 5 7 6 1 Diagnosis Menu There are two submenus included in the Diagnosis menu More detailed descriptions are as follows B Ping This command will help you verify the connectivity with remote host B Information This option shows the current version of BOOT ROM and FLASH firmware Diagnosis Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 07 Ping Information IP Connectivity ENTER select TAB next left right ESC previous menu Figure 5 77 The sub menu tree of Diagnosis menu Ping command When you encounter an IP routing problem such as not being able to communicate with a remote host or if you simply want to verify the connectivity you can use the ping command to help you perform diagnosis This command is available from the Diagnosis Ping menu Diagnosis Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 07 Ping Information IP Connectivity Host Reachability Target IP Address 172 16 3 58 Datagram Size 100 Timeout in Seconds 2 PING 172 16 3 58 with 100 bytes of data Reply from 172 16 Reply from 172 16 Reply from 172 16 Reply from 172 16 Reply from 172 16 58 bytes 100 time 8ms 58 bytes 100 time 8ms 58 bytes 100 time 8ms 58 bytes 100 time 8ms 58 bytes 100 time 8ms WwW UO Press any
131. 8m 35015 00001 00008 40003 MERCURY 4 1 BOARD 1000 45 PHONE BOX 33010 00025 DB25 M gt 4 RJ 48 cable 33008 00010 45 CABLE 24AWG 2M 33010 00006 IDB25 M gt cable 1 8m 35015 00001 00008 40004 MERCURY 4 1 BOARD 750 45 PHONE BOX 33010 00024 DB25 M gt SBNC cable 33010 00026 DB25 M gt 8BNC cable F 09100 60047 IBNC gt F connector 33010 00006 00008 40005 MERCURY 2 1 BOARD 750 IDB25 gt cable 1 8m Product Code Part Number 33010 00024 Description Main Option Equipment DB25 M 2 8BNC cable Appendix B Annex Option Equipment 33010 00026 09100 60047 DB25 M 2 8BNC cable F IBNC F gt F connector 33010 00006 00008 40006 MERCURY 2E1 BOARD 1200 DB25 gt F cable 1 8m 33010 00025 IDB25 M gt 4 RJ 48 cable 33008 00010 IRJ 45 CABLE 24AWG 2M 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 35015 00001 00008 40007 MERCURY 2T1 BOARD 1000 45 PHONE BOX 33010 00025 IDB25 M gt 4 RJ 48 cable 33008 00010 IRJ 45 CABLE 24AWG 2M 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 35015 00001 00008 40011 00008 40012 MERCURY A u BOARD MERCURY 2V35 BOARD 45 PHONE BOX 33010 00002 DB25 M gt 35 F cable 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 33010
132. AC address and IP assigned lease time Device Control Device Control Warm Start Cold Start Restore Default Firmware Upgrade Figure 5 18 The sub menu tree of Device Control menu Device Control menu allows you to restore the default parameters and update the firmware B Warm Start This command will cause the system to restart and reload the new parameters it also interprets the WAN and LAN connection B Cold Start Cold start will reboot the Router Module this command can be used if and only if you have updated the firmware W Restore Default This command will restart the system and restore the factory default parameters 175 Chapter 5 Router Configuration B Firmware Upgrade This function allows you to update the Router software using a TFTP Server refer to chapter 9 for more detailed procedures 5 6 3 5 Diagnosis Menu Diagnosis Figure 5 19 The sub menu tree of Diagnosis menu There are two submenus included in diagnosis menu Ping and Information B Ping Diagnosis MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 Ping Information Debug IP Connectivity Enter select ESC previous menu lt left gt right TAB next item Target IP Address 172 16 5 41 Repeat Count 5 Datagram Size 100 Timeout in seconds 2 5 of 5 0 01 seconds Success 5 5 100 Average Time 0 01 seconds Max 0 01 seconds Min 0 01 seconds Press any key to continue Figure 5 20 The Pi
133. Actions Type Class QUIET Quiet Analogy output Informative alert State Minor disable on the specify port ALM OFF Alarm Off Alarm report has Informative message no State Minor been switch off at port action required ALM amp DA Alarm and DAC Off Alarm Informative message no State Minor C Orr and DAC function has action required been switch off at specified port Table4 7 IDSL module alarm message FXS Voice Module Table 4 8 lists the alarm messages generated by the FXS voice module specifies their class Major or Minor type Alarm Performance Monitoring and State and explains their meaning Message Description Corrective Actions Type Class MICO FAIL MICO Fail 2015 chipset Replace the FXS module Alarm Major initial failed given PCM to IOM 2 signal convert error PCM LOS PCM Lost Detected PCM 1 Check cable connections Alarm Major signal lost to the FXS connector 2 Check clock source on network facilities 3 Replace the data module 3265 FAIL 3265 Chipset fail Fail Re boot system Alarm Major reading amp writing with Check any unsettled PEB 3265 chipset over two voltage on the phone times during re boot line 3 Replace the FXS module 15 ES Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Errored Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 SES Severely Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Severel
134. Alarm Off Alarm report Informative message no State Minor has been switch off at port action required ALM amp DAC Alarm and DAC Off Informative message no State Minor OFF Alarm report and DAC action required function has been switch off at specified port Table4 8 FXS voice module alarm message 4 1 9 SDSL Module Table 4 9 lists the alarm messages generated by the SDSL module specifies their class Major or Minor type Alarm Performance Monitoring and State and explains their meaning Message Description Corrective Actions Type Class FAIL Fail System fail on Replace the SDSL module Alarm Major register LOS Lost of Synchronous Have the link checked Alarm Major Local lost of synchronous on SDSL link Check the operating mode on the network equipment NTU LTU or connect with Chapter 4 Maintenance Message Description Corrective Actions Type Class Xstream 1300 Replace the SDSL module 15 8 Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Errored Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 SES Severely Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Severely Errored Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 UA Unavailable Second Informative alert PM Major Counting Unavailable Second over 15 minutes threshold 1H ES Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting
135. C ExC Mercury y DEV Mercury X DEV 4PRata RxC DTE 4Ppgpatai RxC DTE with md without med i ExC clock 5 clock 74 DEV 2 DEV 3 DEV 4 TxC ExC RxC TxC RxC TxC ExC RxC Mercury C gt pev Mercury Cp 2C pgy Mercuyp XO 4P Datai RxC 4P pata ExC 4RxC 4 4RxC rec man Em me mc mu e 4 XS dock NULL NULL Modem Modem DEV 5 DEV 6 TxC TCC Mercury C gt DEV Meroury XC DEV 4PRata RxC DCE 4Pppetai RXC DCE with med without clock i ExC clock ExC e Hee and RxC clock polarity Inv 0 TxC normal amp RxC normal default normal amp RxC inverted 2 TxC inverted amp RxC normal 3 TxC inverted amp RxC inverted B Example DATA 4a 10 type 2 dev 4 e Setup 4P Data card on port 4A to RS 530 type speed 640 Kbps count number is 10 start from time slot 0 and end to time slot 9 And set the clock mode to dev 4 DCE with clock and TxC RxC ExC DATA 4b 20 type 4 Setup 4P Data card on port to V 35 type speed 1280 Kbps count number is 20 start from time slot 0 and end with time slot 19 The clock mode is default value dev 0 DTE without clock and TxC RxC 67 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Mercury gt help data Usage Setup Data Parameters Syntax DATA port
136. CE port A B C D 4 14 24 34 Data set ready port A B C D 5 15 25 35 Terminal timing DTE port A B C D 6 16 26 36 Data carrier detect port A B C D 7 17 27 37 Clear to send port A B C D 8 18 28 38 Request to send port A B C D 9 19 29 39 Data terminal ready port A B C D 10 20 30 40 Signal ground port A B C D Table A 24 4P V24 Interface SCSI II PIN assignment Figure A 14 SCSI II 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 oO OQ COO OD OO QC XA QOO OUO OX EX 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Figure A 15 DB25 4 POTS Voice FXS Interface The 4 POTS FXO FXS interface uses DB44 connector and are described bellow The marked symbol is reserved for future use Description Pin Number Description 31 MI2 E12 32 IRINGIA RINGI ITIPIA 33 N C 34 N C TIP2 M21 35 M22 232 A 23 Appendix A L 6 24 522 36 IRING2A ITIP2A 37 N C 8 235 NC 38 NC 9 4 39 G3A 2 40 M31 4l E42 44 M42 Table 25 4 POTS FXO FXS Interface DB44 PIN assignment CONNECT N ame Function DB44 PIN RJ 11 PIN Channel 1 Tip Ring Channel 2 Tip Ring Channel 3 Tip Ring Channel 4 Tip Ring Table A 26 Adaptor cable DB44 to RJ 11 x 4 PIN assignment Figure A 16 4 POTS FXO FXS DB44 to 4 x RJ 11 adaptor 1P SHDS
137. CRC tx crc RCRC rx crc CV cv bpv AIS Alarm Indication Signal SIDLE Signal Idle DET Signal Detect Number CHG Signal Change Number fr 0 fas 1 unframe cas 0 ccs 1 cas act 0 disable 1 enable 0 cv 1 bpv ais 0 disable 1 enable sig value between 0 and 15 ABCD bit Notes 1 TCRC and RCRC are disable when changing to unframe 2 Unframe needs to assign 32 timeslots 3 BAL and HAUL is for Mercury 800 built in E1 port only Mercury el fr 0 cas 1 tcrc 0 rcrc 0 bal 1 haul 1 Mercury stat 3a TYPE 2E1 120 CLK YES ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Configuration LL no RL no RCRC no TCRC no SIGNAL CAS FRAME FAS CV CV AIS off HAUL long SIDLE 09h DET 00h CHG 00h Figure 3 19 E1 Command Screen 3 6 15 EM Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3820 B Purpose The EM Card is the module of the Mercury and can via a console to control it The command as below B Usage Setup E amp M Parameters Syntax EM Port MOD mod DL act TSA act TONE act LAW law Tgain tgain Rgain rgain B Params Por Port identifier MOD Setup E amp M mode DL Digital loopback TSA TSA loopback TONE tone injection LAW Setup PCM CODING mode Tgain Tx direction relative gain Rgain direction relative gain Mod 0 2 wire 600 ohm default 1 2 wire 900 ohm 72 3 6 16 3 6 17 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring 2 4 wire 600 ohm act 0 off 1 on o
138. Current Config Routing Table ARP Table Statistics NAT Buffer DHCP View Current Configuration Enter select ESC previous menu lt left gt right TAB next item UP 1 172 16 15 254 255 255 240 0 0090bb910521 WAN Type Status PPP UP WAN Local IP Address 192 168 0 1 WAN IP NetMask 255 255 255 255 WAN Remote IP Address 192 168 0 2 AUX Status PPP DOWN AUX Local IP Address 0 0 0 0 AUX IP NetMask 0 0 0 0 AUX Remote IP Address 0 0 0 0 Press any key to return Figure 5 12 Using current configuration submenu to diagnosis the type and status of each The sub menu to view current configuration interface 171 Chapter 5 Router Configuration B Routing Table Monitoring MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 Current Config Routing Table ARP Table Statistics NAT Buffer DHCP View Current Routing Table Enter select ESC previous menu lt left gt right TAB next item Destination NetMask NextHop Mtr IF TYPE Protocol IP default 192 168 0 2 1 WAN US 127 0 0 1 255 255 255 255 127 0 0 1 0 LPBK UI 172 16 0 0 255 255 240 0 172 16 15 254 0 LAN UI 192 168 0 2 255 255 255 255 192 168 0 1 0 WAN UI Press any key to return Figure 5 13 The sub menu to show the current routing table The Routing table shows all the routing information and it includes Static Routes RIP v1 and RIP v2 The next table will describe the fields Field Description Destination It specifie
139. DHCP application and SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol for network management and monitoring DHCP Configuration Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is used for the dynamic distribution of IP address to client machines which allows the individual clients workstations to obtain the TCP IP configuration at start up from centralized DHCP server The Mercury or Tainet WANpro product has built in DHCP server capability the DHCP function can be found under Configuration System menu Here you can configure the DHCP server settings for IP default gateway DNS server and WINS Server Enable Fixed Leases Address Map allows you to assign up to 8 permanent IP leases to clients by entering the client S NIC Network Interface Card Ethernet Address MAC address Configuration MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 System PPP FR RIP Route Table Security NAT Filter SNMP DHCP DHCP Daemon Configuration Enter select ESC previous menu lt left 2 right TAB next item Default Lease Time in secs 86400 Gateway 172 16 15 254 1 DNS Server 0 0 0 0 WINS Server 0 0 0 0 IP Address Pool for Dynamic Leases Range from 0 0 0 0 to 0 0 0 0 IP Ethernet Address Mapping for Fixed Leases IP Address Ethernet Address IP Address Ethernet Address 0 0 0 0 000000000000 0 0 0 0 1000000000000 0 0 0 0 000000000000 0 0 0 0 000000000000 0 0 0 0 000000000000 0 0 0 0 100000000000
140. Describe the operation window when access into Router module Operation Key Description Move down to ENTER To access in to a submenu sub menu Move up to ESC Press the ESC key to move back to the previous menu previous menu Move the lt gt TAB Use lt or gt to move cursor left and right or up and down Cursor press TAB to move cursor sequence Enter Fill in or press You need to fill in two types of fields The First requires information SPACE BAR to type in the appropriate information The second to toggle allows you to cycle through the available choices by pressing the SPACE BAR Confirm your ENTER Save your configuration by selecting Y ES at the pop up Configuration Confirm message In most cases it will take you to the previous menu Exit the TCS To exit the TCS interface press ESC at the Main Menu prompt and pop up message Logout select YES Table 5 3 operations of router module Configuration of Router module N R The Description of N R Configuration The N Router module for Mercury 800 named Router L can also be equipped into TAINET MSDSL modem Xstream 1300 with different jump connection on its main board On Router L s main board there is a Jump selection JP2 as shown in the following figure for M800 please short Pin 2 amp 3 and for Xstream 1300 please just short pin 1 amp 2 165 Chapter 5 Router Configuration JP2 X1300 12 modem
141. E without clock TxC and RxC clock polarity Table 3 10 2 4P Data Card Inv 0 TxC normal and RxC normal Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring 4P V24 Card Command Description Default Setting V24 port MOD mod Setup V24 card Sync Async mode and its data format mod 2 Async 8 n 1 data format V24 port SPD spd Setup channel speed 1200 to 19200 spd 3 9600bps Setup channel DCD signal 1 on when sync Setup channel CTS signal cts 1 follow Local RTS Channel clock polarity inv 0 Normal type Enable local loopback act 0 disable Enable remote loopback act 0 disable Enable the port combined function Table 3 11 DATA Command 0 none Description Default Setting Digital loop back testing act 0 disable TSA loop back testing reserved for factory act 0 disable 1KHz tone injection act 0 disable Tx direction relative gain tgain 0 0 dBr Tx direction relative gain tgain 0 0 dBr 3 6 Ring off time Table 3 12 Command Command Set Description time 6 6 sec This Section describes the detail description and parameters of Mercury Series Command Set The following is all Command Set of Mercury Series 3 6 1 Help Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 Display the Help message for the index of all the command sets in Help message
142. ER IDAUL PORT FIBER MERCURY XCODE 45 PHONE BOX Appendix B Product Code 2P SHDSL Part Number 00008 40051 00008 40029 Description IDAUL PORT GSHDSL MERCURY 2 1 BOARD 100Q Main Option Equipment Annex Option Equipment 33010 00025 IDB25 M gt 4 RJ 48 cable 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE 24AWG 2M 33010 00006 35015 00001 00008 40032 MERCURY 4P V24 BOARD IDB25 M gt cable 1 8m IRJ 45 PHONE BOX 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 35014 00011 00008 40033 00008 40034 MERCURY 4P FXO CARD MERCURY 2P DATA CARD IDCE gt DCE sync null modem 33010 00002 DB25 M gt V35 CABLE 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F CABLE 1 8M 33010 00013 DB25 M gt V35 M CABLE 1 8M 33010 00023 DB25 M gt DB15 F 20cm FOR 21 33010 00004 DB25 M 2 DB37 FOR RS449 35014 00011 00010 20005 MERCURY 3820 4FXSD RJ 11 gt DCE SYNC null modem 35015 00002 00007 70002 ROUTER MODULE 11 33008 00011 45 PHONE WIRE GRAY 8P8C 2M 24AWG TWIST CROSS 35014 00011 IDCE gt DCE sync null modem DB25P M DB25P F 35015 00001 00007 70003 CHANNELIZE ROUTER 45 PHONE BOX 33008 00011 RJ 45 PHONE WIRE GRAY 8P8C 2M 24AWG TWIST CROSS 35014 00011 IDCE gt DCE sync null modem IDB25P M DB25P F 35015 00001
143. ES RIP advertises subnets NO RIP does not advertise subnets Note A denotes the default value of RP parameter Table 5 12 RIP Setup Menu Handle Routing Protocol configuration B Router Module firmware version before and include 2 13 Router Module sends both of RIP 1 and RIP 2 in broadcasting mode if you have third party router connected with Router Module in the same network segment or remote node please configure the third party router RIP 2 to broadcasting mode therefore the third party router can receive the RIP 2 form Route Module because it does not support RIP 2 with multicasting mode Generally if RIP 2 operates in multicasting mode it does not listen to the RIP 2 broadcasting and so will not receive the RIP 2 packets However if one router uses broadcasting then all routers on your network must use broadcasting For Router Module Firmware version after 2 13 RIP 2 protocol supports multicasting so be sure you have turned off Next Hop Advertise example on CISCO Router needs to configure Neighbor Route so routing protocol can be built up in between Configuring Static Routes amp Default Routes Routes between network segments sometimes have to be added manually There are several advantages that static routes have over dynamic routes One advantage is that there are fewer overheads for the router since it doesn t have to perform calculations on the fly and send out router updates Each re
144. Errored Seconds over 1 hour threshold 1H SES Severely Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Severely Errored Seconds over hour threshold 1H UA Unavailable Second Informative alert PM Major Counting unavailable Second over 1 hour threshold 1D ES Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Errored Seconds over day threshold 1D SES Severely Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Severely Errored Seconds over day threshold 1D UA Unavailable Second Informative alert PM Major Counting Unavailable Second over 1 day threshold CRC CRC errors CRC error Have the SDSL link Alarm Minor detected in the SDSL link checked receive signal DIS Disconnect SDSL card Check the operating mode Alarm Minor persisted on the handshake on the network equipment situation NTU LTU or connect with Xstream 1300 Have the remote equipment check ALM OFF Alarm Off Alarm report Informative message no State Minor has been switch off at action required specified port ALM amp DAC Alarm and DAC Informative message no State Minor OFF Alarm report and DAC action required function has been switch 145 Chapter 4 Maintenance 4 1 10 2 AP Data Module Message Description Corrective Actions Type Class off at specified port Table4 9 SDSL alarm message Table 4 10 lists the alarm messages g
145. ING 0 SPEED 4800bps RTS off DCD on when sync CTS local RTS CLOCK normal LL no RL no CC abc Mercury stat 6d Configuration MODE sync SYNC loss REMOTE SIGNALLING 0 SPEED 19200bps RTS off DCD on when sync CTS local RTS CLOCK normal LL no RL no CC abc Figure 3 48 V24 Command Screen 3 6 48 V35 Command B Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 B Purpose Define V 35 port parameters The DTE transmit speed N x 64 Kbps is determined by the sts starting time slot and ets end time slot for 512 Kbps 8 x 64 Kbps it may start from time slot 1 to time slot 8 So the parameter sts is 1 and ets 15 8 The valid time slot number is between 1 and 31 but for 2V35 card it is between 0 and 31 time slot 0 can be used for 2V35 card only 104 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Syntax V35 port sts ets CTS act DSR act DCD act RI act DEV dev INV inv B Param O port sts 1 ets CTS DSR DCD 1 act DEV Dev INV Inv B Example Port identifier for the indicated V 35 port The start time slot number The end time slot number V 35 Clear to Send signal default act 1 V 35 Data Set Ready signal default act 1 V 35 Data Carrier Detect signal default act 1 V 35 Ring Indicator signal default act 0 O signal inactive l signal active The clock type for which device connected to and illustrated as following and only valid for 2V3
146. IP addresses cannot be used on the Internet and are mostly used on Local Area Networks LANs Public addresses are valid on the Internet and must be properly registered so information can be sent to them Configuration of NAT can be found under the Configuration Menu NAT Configuration MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 System PPP FR RIP Route_Table Security NAT Filter SNMP DHCP Setup NAT Configuration Enter select ESC previous menu lt left gt right TAB next item Network Address Port Translation NAPT Public IP 0 0 0 0 Netmask 0 0 0 0 Porxy Port List Protocol PORT IP Protocol PORT IP TCP 0 0 0 0 0 TCP 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 TCP 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 TCP 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 TCP 0 0 0 0 0 ICMP 0 0 0 0 Static Network Address Translation static NAT Public IP lt gt Private IP Public IP lt gt Private IP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 lt gt 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Figure 5 39 The sub menu of NAT configuration menu NAT described in RFC 3022 allows local IP addresses on the LAN to be converted into global IP addresses on the Internet Router Module uses Network Address Port Translation device which maps ALL the local IP addresses into a SINGLE global IP a
147. L V interface The 1P SHDSL V interface uses RJ 45 connector as interface the detail pin assignment as described bellow PIN Number Signal 1 Tip Ring N C N C Table 27 1P SHDSL V RJ 45 PIN assignment Nn Appendix A A 24 4P POTS E amp M interface The 4P POTS E amp M interface uses RJ 45 connector as interface the detail pin assignment as described bellow En2 SG Pin 8 nn RING Pin 4 IRINGnA RING 1 Pin 3 r Mal Pin 2 4 SB Pin 1 Figure A 17 Pin Assignment of RJ 45 Conncetor E amp M SIGNALINT TYPE CONFIGURE The 4P POTS E amp M Card can support E amp M I V type signaling The signaling type selected by Jumper and the configuration of any type is illustrate as below TYPEI Channel Channel Header JT4 Header Jump Pin X Jump Pin PIN ASSIGNMENT 2 3 JT15 JT14 JT11 JT10 JT7 JT6 JT2 JT4 Pa JT3 TYPEII Channel Channel Header Header Jump Pin Jump Pin Channel Channel Header Header Jump Pin Jump Pin PIN ASSIGNMENT 2 3 JT15 JT14 9111 110 JT7 JT6 JT2 JT16 JT13 JT12 JT9 JT8 JT5 JTl 1774 JT3 Appendix A TYPE III Channel 1 Channel 2 Header JT2 JT3 JT4 Header JTS JT6 JT7 JT8 Jump 2 3 1
148. LAN IP NetMask 255 255 240 0 1 WAN Protocol Frame Relay Figure 5 27 Frame Relay WAN Encapsulation 182 5 6 4 5 5 6 4 6 5 6 4 7 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Configuration MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14a System PPP FR RIP Route Table Security NAT Filter SNMP DHCP Setup WAN Local IP SubNetMask Remote IP over Frame Relay Enter select ESC previous menu lt left gt right TAB next item LMI Type ANSI T1 617 Annex D DLCI No IP Address IP NetMask Remote IP NAT Filter 1 0 110 0 0 0 110 0 0 0 110 0 0 0 Disable Disable Press SPACE BAR to Change Value Figure 5 28 Frame Relay Encapsulations to setup LMI and DLCI Encapsulation The Router Module supports IP over Frame Relay encapsulation as described in RFC 1490 which is the method for carrying network interconnect traffic over a frame relay backbone It also describes a simple fragmentation procedure for carrying large frames over a frame relay network with a smaller MTU LMI The carrier also gives you the LMI Local Management Interface types The LMI is a set of enhancements to the basic Frame Relay specification LMI includes support for keepalives a multicast mechanism global addressing and a status mechanism Your Router Module supports three LMI standards ANSI 71 617 Annex D CCITT Q 933a Annex A and LMI by Frame Relay Forum DLCI The carrier gives you a specific DLCI Data Link Connection Identifier number for ea
149. Line Signal Detector B DTE Ready B Ext Transmit Signal Element Timing B Ext Transmit Element Timing A Transmit Signal Element Timing B Test Mode Clear to Send B Table A 12 Single Port RS 530 PIN definition for Mercury 3600 225 Appendix A A 12 A 13 X21 Interface Figure A 4 RS 530 X 21 Adapting Cable for Mercury 3600 The X 21 interface for Mercury 3600 only uses a 15 pin standard connector The pin descriptions are shown in the following table Pin number Description Pin number Shield Description Transmit B Transmit A Control B Control A Receive B Receive A Indication B Indication A Signal Timing B Signal Timing A GND Table 13 X 21 PIN definition for Mercury 3600 V36 RS 449 Interface Figure A 5 RS 530 RS 449 Adapting Cable for Mercury 3600 The V 36 RS 449 interface for Mercury 3600 uses a 37 pin standard connector The pin descriptions are shown in the following table Pin number Description Pin number Description 1 Shield 20 Receive Common 2 Signal Rate Indicator 21 Unassigned 3 Unassigned 22 Send Data B 4 Send Data A 23 Send Timing B 5 Send Timing A 24 Receive Data B 6 Receive Data A 25 Request to Send B 7 Request to Send A 26 Receive Timing B 226 A 14 A 15 Receive Timing A
150. MODE master CLOCK MODE manual LAST PORT 3A NEXT PORT 4A CLOCK TIMESLOT 31 RING PROTECT on Figure 3 37 RP Command Screen 90 3 6 36 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Caution There are some limitations associated with Ring Protection Ring Protection requires the equipment to operate under frame mode We suggest the user choose one time slot to carry the clock source This will guide all of the ring nodes to follow the same clock source coming from the Master node This function robs one time slot from the system El therefore has only 30 time slots available on CCS mode and 29 time slots available on CAS mode while T1 has 23 time slots available So far the Ring Protection system is limited to only one ring in the entire network and only ports A and C on the Mercury in Salve Mode can be the Ring nodes RS530 Command B Accommodate Mercury 3600 B Purpose Define RS530 port parameters The DTE transmit speed N x 64 Kbps is determined by the sts starting time slot and ets end time slot for 512 Kbps 8 x 64 Kbps it may start from time slot 1 to time slot 8 So the parameter sts is 1 and ets 1s 8 The valid time slot number is between 1 and 31 B Syntax RS530 port sts ets CTS act DSR act DCD act RI act INV inv B Param port Port identifier for the indicated RS530 port sts start time slot number ets The end time slot number CTS RS530 Clear to Send signal default act
151. Mercury gt help v24 Usage Setup V24 Parameters Syntax V24 port MOD mod SPD spd DCD dcd CTS cts INV inv LL act RL act CC cc Params port port identifier MOD channel mode SPD channel speed DCD channel DCD signal CTS channel CTS signal INV channel clock polarity LL local loopback RL remote loopback CC combined channel mod 0 sync 1 7 2 async8 spd 0 1200 1 2400 2 4800 3 9600 4 19200 dcd 0 force on 1 on when sync 2 remote RTS 3 off cts 0 on 1 1 1 RTS inv 0 normal 1 inverted act O0 disable 1 enable cc 0 none 1 ab combined 2 ab combined cd combimed 3 abc combined 4 abcd combined Notes 1 ports which combined means that the transmitted data of these ports are in the same timeslot 2 In abc combined state the speed of a b c port are up to 9600bps 3 In abcd combined state the speed of all ports are up to 9600bps Mercury v24 6a mod 2 spd 3 cc 3 Mercury v24 6b mod 1 spd 0 dcd 1 cts 1 Mercury v24 6c mod 0 spd 2 Mercury v24 6d mod 0 spd 4 Mercury stat 6a TYPE 4V24 CLK NO ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Configuration MODE async8 SYNC loss REMOTE SIGNALLING 0 SPEED 9600bps RTS off DCD on when sync CTS local RTS CLOCK normal LL no RL no CC abc Mercury stat 6b Configuration MODE async7 SYNC loss REMOTE SIGNALLING 0 SPEED 1200bps RTS off DCD on when sync CTS local RTS CLOCK normal LL no RL no CC abc Mercury stat 6c Configuration MODE sync SYNC loss REMOTE SIGNALL
152. Module to make the new setting effective Organization of TCS menu tree The TCS Terminal Configuration System is user friendly configuration interface To use TCS you can configure and monitor the Router Module for advanced management The following diagram will help you easily understand the TCS Organization menu Main Menu Router Module Configuration Monitoring Device Control Diagnosis Figure 5 9 The main menu tree in router module There are four categories in Main Menu B Configuration This menu includes all configuration of WAN and LAN and some advanced management The detailed settings of this menu will be discussed in later sections B Monitoring Use monitoring menu to view system status interface statistics and routing table Device Control The device control menu allows you to restore the default parameter upgrade Mercury s firmware or warm start your Router Module to running the current parameters M Diagnosis 169 Chapter 5 Router Configuration In the diagnosis menu you can use ICMP ping echo to perform diagnostic checks on your network or view current software version of BOOT ROM and FLASH 5 6 3 2 Configuration Menu Configuration System FR RIP Route Table Security NAT SNMP DHCP Filter Static Routing Table Default Gateway Outgoing Filter Incoming Filter Figure 5 10 The sub menu tree of Configuration menu Configuratio
153. Most often used port numbers Step 3 Configuring the Static NAT Assign the remaining public IP to the workstation or server in your LAN Enter select Public IP 168 192 0 2 168 192 0 3 168 192 0 4 168 192 0 5 Configuration MENU ESC previous menu Network Address Port Translation TAINET Router Module System PPP FR RIP Route Table Security NAT Setup NAT Configuration lt left tors Netmask 255 255 255 248 Porxy Port List Public IP 168 192 0 1 Protocol PORT IP TCP 21 192 168 1 24 TCP 0 0 0 0 0 TCP 0 0 0 0 0 TCP 0 0 0 0 0 ICMP 0 0 0 0 lt gt Private IP 192 168 1 26 192 168 1 27 192 168 1 28 192 168 1 29 Protocol PORT TCP 80 TCP 0 0 0 Static Network Address Translation static NAT Public IP 168 192 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 hank wa wax right TAB next item Version 2 146 Filter SNMP DHCP IP 192 168 1 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 lt gt Private 192 168 1 30 lt gt 0 0 0 0 1 lt gt 0 0 0 0 lt gt 0 0 0 0 IP Filter Setting Figure 5 43 Static NAT Configuring Your Router Module uses filters to decide whether or not to allow passage of a packet IP filters are divided into incoming and outgoing filters depending on the direction of the packet relative to a serial port WAN port To e
154. PT Network Address Port Translation support popular Internet application such as ICQ IRC RealAudio VDOLive and PPTP No configuration is needed to support these applications Full Network Management SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol support Accessing TCS Terminal Configuration System through a telnet connection Filters The IP filtering functions for N R allows administrator added network security and management 5 3 Application of Router Module 5 3 1 Internet Access For SOHO Small Office Home Office environment the Router Module offers the NAT feature that allows multiple users on the LAN Local Area Network to access the Internet concurrently for the cost effective solution Auxiliary port can provide the Internet access with another PPP encapsulation link to the branch office or remote node by low speed modem such as analog modem or IDSL modem See Figure 5 1 Modem Modem gt Route Sync Async Sync Async 2D Phone AUX m Ethernet RS 232 Sa fs j 2 1 2 1 1 HUB Mercury 3600 E1 TI Router Fiber e HE Mercury 3600 f Mercury 3600 Ethernet e H Router my Router 25 fs i Edge Router Figure 5 1 Internet Access with Mercury 3600 160 5 3 2 Chapter 5 Router Configuration HUB Mercury 3600 Router A LAN I F Analog Mode H
155. Port Physical Layer Signal IEEE802 3 Electric Signal IEEE802 3 Connector RJ 45 10BaseT WAN Port e Support 32 channels WAN INTERFACE e Protocol PPP RFC compliant IP RFC compliant ARP RFC compliant TELNET RFC compliant SNMP RFC compliant Timeslot Allocation User defined any time slot 0 31 to any time slot mapping Clock Source e Follow the active system clock of Mercury only A U law card A U Law General Description Non blocking A law u law conversion of 120 time slot It is used for transferring the voice signal between and voice switch Electrical Characteristic e ITU T G 711 Pulse code modulation PCM of voice frequencies Timeslot Allocation No necessary to assigned the time slot Clock Source e Follow the active system clock of Mercury only B 50 card 50 5 X50 MUX 4C X50 DACS 2C General Description X 50 cards have 5 Physical ports with RS232 I F characteristics and the SCSI II cable to 5 DB25 female connector is necessary By using X 50 multiplexing it supports low speed data rate for data service so that 5 ports use for one 64 K time slot e X50 MUX SC For Each port 5 port Speed 2400 4800 9600 19200 Sync only e X50 MUX 4C For each port 4 port Speed 2400 4800 9600 19200 Sync mode for each port Async mode only use in 1 2 port 25 Chapter 1 Introduction e X50 DACS 2C For each port 2 port
156. SI II Description Signal ground Request to send Jw Clear to send Data set ready Data carrier detect Data terminal ready Ring indicator Transmitted data a Receiver data a Transmitted data b Receiver data b Terminal timing a Receiver timing a Terminal timing b Receiver timing b Transmit timing a Transmit timing b i HSI SIN gt lt lt a re Immo s E c lt Table A 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ooo0oo0o000000000O QULA ME Ctr XO 2 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Figure A 2 DB25 224 Single port V 35 PIN definition for Mercury 3600 A 11 RS530 Interface Figure A 3 Appendix A RS 530 Data Interface module for Mercury 3600 The RS 530 interface for Mercury 3600 uses a 25 pin standard connector The pin descriptions are shown in the following table Pin number Description Pin number Description 1 Shield 14 Transmitted B 2 Transmitted Data A 15 Transmit Signal Element A 3 Received Data A 16 Received Data B Request to Send A Receiver Signal Element Timing A Clear to Send A Local Loopback DCE Ready A Request to Send B Signal Ground DTE Ready A Received Line Signal Detector A Remote Loopback Receiver Signal Element Timing B DCE Ready B Received
157. Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 800 31 The suitable I O module for Mercury Series 35 Front Panel Description of Mercury 800 4 39 Rear Panel Description of Mercury 800 40 Front Panel Description of Mercury 3600 41 Rear Panel Description of Mercury 3600 3600 42 Front Panel Description of Mercury 3820 0 440000002 43 Rear Panel Description of Mercury 3820 45 Platform s pported eoe 47 System Command of Mercury ee ka e ER caa cues 53 NO COMMMIAMC 53 ET commandas PE 54 24 EET 54 Ip Command UTE RTT NEN 54 FXS Command pe 55 A DU COmftigl d oues ceto intestatus cte toI A aS ERN ERU anes 55 SDSL Command ses anene E 55 PIA Data AEE 55 OMNI ANG 56 COM UMN fies TL 56 Table 3 15 Table 3 13 Table 3 14 Table 4 1 Table 4 2 Table 4 3 Table 4 4 Table 4 5 Table 4 6 Table 4 7 Table 4 8 Table 4 9 Table 4 10 Table 4 11 Table 4
158. Source e The SDSL card that acts as NTU mode can receive clock from LTU Compatibility Compatible hardware and software for Mercury 3600 Hardware version Compatible Software Flash ROM SDSL card V1 0 V1 xx 2M Not support V2 0 V5 xx 4M Supported 1 The difference between Mercury 3600 hardware version V1 0 with software version V1 xx and V2 0 with software version V5 xx is that only hardware V2 0 supports SDSL card and all other functions are the same 2 Sothe SDSL card is available for Mercury 3600 hardware version V2 0 and software version V5 00 or above Table 1 18 Compatible hardware and software for Mercury 3600 Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 800 Boot version Flash Version SDSL card V1 02 V1 04 Supported Table 1 19 Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 800 Caution For Mercury 3600 3820 all released versions will support the SDSL card Fiber Optical card Fiber 1 Fiber 2 Fiber B General Description 3types of Fiber Optical cards are provided for the uplink trunk These cards can aggregate all the tributary data with electrical characteristic and convert them through the optical trunk link e The FOM card Fiber B can provide automatic protection switching function for optical link when Optical signal fails switching is completed in less than 30ms The FOM can provide alarm and status indicator
159. T NUMBER One port includes 128 time slots per card DATA RATE amp LINE RATE Line Speed 8 192Mbps e Date rate 10 24Mbps VOICE CHANNEL 128 voice channels per card at most OPTICAL INTERFACE e Optical Source Laser Single Mode e Operating Wavelength Range 1310nm 1280nm 1350nm e Optical Connector FC PC type Fiber size 9 125 u m Optical Transceiver Operating Temperature 0 70 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS Temperature Operation 0 50 Storage 10 C 70 C Relative Humidity 32 1 3 2 1 3 3 1 3 4 1 3 5 Chapter 1 Introduction Operation 095 9096 Non Condensing Storage 099 9596 Non Condensing Timeslot Allocation User defined any time slot 0 127 to any time slot mapping Clock Source Can be set to derived external clock from received port A Timing Control Internal clock Received for the indicated ports B 14 Clock mode switch automatically Operation Environment B Temperature Humidity Storage 20 C 70 95 Operation 0 C 50 90 Power Requirement B Mercury 800 n DC 36 72V AC 90 260V 50 60Hz B Mercury 3600 DC 36 72V 90 260V 50 60Hz B Mercury 3600 DC 36 72V AC 90 260V 47 63Hz B Mercury 3820 Power module 1 AC Input voltage 90 260V 47 63Hz Output voltage DC SV tolerance 0 05V load 20mA 6A Power mod
160. Usage Setup Call Profile Syntax CP port PFF no NO no SW sw MAJ alm MIN alm Params port port identifier OFF no alarm detection ON alarm detection SW profile execution switch MAJ major alarm code for detection MIN minor alarm code for detection no profile number 0 disable sw 0 disable 1 enable alm 0000 FFFF hex Notes 1 view all call profiles if no parameter 2 available for E1 T1 Fiber SDSL GSDSL only Mercury cp CH OFF ALARM SWITCH STATUS 1A 4 1 75 2 0002 0080 ENABLE OFF 2A 4 1 75 0 0002 0080 DISABLE 1 0 3A 2Fiber 0 5 0002 0010 ENABLE ON 3C 2Fiber 3 4 0002 0010 DISABLE OFF Mercury cp la off 1 on 2 sw 1 maj 0002 min 0001 Figure 3 14 CP Command Screen Card Type 4E1 120 75 2E1 120 75 1E1 120 75 4TI 2T1 Fiber 1FiberCB 2Fiber 0x0008 0x0008 0x0010 CVV 0x0010 0x0001 0x0001 SDSL 0x0002 ae 0x0002 DIS 0x0004 CRC Table 3 15 Alarms are supported by CP command 65 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Note Alarm code with the symbol is the default value for CP command 3 6 11 Data Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 B Purpose Define 4P Data port parameters This 4P Data port be software configurable to change its type to RS530A RS530 X21 V35 interface And all of the
161. V1 6 TAINET MERCURY SERIES Digital Cross Connect System User s Manual The Professional Partner TAINET COMMUNICATION SYSTEM CORP Headquarters Beijing Branch No 25 Alley 15 Lane 120 Sec 1 Nei Hu E Wing Center 3rd Floor Building A 113 Rd Zhi Chun Lu HaiDian District Beijing Taipei 114 Taiwan China Postal Code 10086 TEL 886 2 26583000 TEL 86 10 62522076 86 10 62522079 FAX 886 2 26583232 FAX 86 10 62522077 07008 00067 2005 12 07 Mercury Series User s Manual Rev 1 6 Copyright 2005 TAINET COMMUNICATION SYSTEM CORP All right reserved Printed in Taiwan R O C Notice This document is protected by the international copyright law No part of this publication may be reproduced by any means without the permission of Tainet Communication System Corporation TAINET is a registered trademark and Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 are trademarks of Tainet Communication System Corporation Other product names mentioned in this manual are used for identification purposes only and may be trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies The information provided from Tainet Communication System Corporation is believed to be accurate Any changes and enhancements to the product and to the information thereof will be documented and issued as a new release to this manual Trademark products and services mentioned herein are the trademarks service marks registered trademarks or registered
162. XXXXXX low latency frame integrity voice conversion loopback x idle z Dacs ch loss mark timeslot is one way cross amp combined channel Figure 3 57 XTS Command Screen 3 7 Application and Settings 3 7 1 FXO FXS SDSL card Description Extend the Voice card to remote site via SDSL connection B Structure 115 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Site B Site A E1 Tx to Rx 3 1s FXO Mercury3600 Xstream1300 TAINET PBX Figure 3 58 Voice Card Application Diagram B Configurations Site A e Clk int Setup to internal clock e El 1 card that crossed to FXO card should be set to CAS mode e El3bcas 0 The physical connection of 1 port must to set to CCS mode e Xtvla03al Cross connect FXO to 1 with mode 5451 4a mod 2 31 Setup SDSL card to mod 2 to 1300 frame mode and end of time slot is 31 e Xt3b14al Cross connect El to SDSL card treat as data e Xt 3b 16 4a 16 Cross connect the signaling time slot 16 to SDSL card and send to remote site B Site Xstream 1300 modem load profile 8 NTU EI Fr Rcv e Clk Setup the clock received from port3A e El 3acas 1 1 card that crossed to FXS card should be set to CAS mode e Xtvla03al Cross connect FXS to E1 with mode 3 7 2 Fiber Applications Description 116 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Extend the operation distance through th
163. Y 41081 BOARD RJ 11 MERCURY X 50 BOARD IDCE gt DCE sync null modem 33010 00022 SCSI II gt 5DB25 F cable 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m Appendix B Product Code Part Number Description Main Option Equipment Annex Option Equipment 35014 00011 IDCE gt DCE sync null modem X50 MUX 4C 00008 40017 MERCURY X 50 BOARD 33010 00022 SCSI II gt 5DB25 F cable 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 35014 00011 00008 40018 MERCURY X 50 BOARD IDCE gt DCE sync null modem 33010 00022 SCSIII 25 IDB25 F cable 33010 00006 DB25 M 2 F cable 1 8m 35014 00011 00008 40019 00008 40024 MERCURY 4IDSL BOARD TB MERCURY 4 1 BOARD 1000 IDCE gt DCE sync null modem 33010 00025 IDB25 M gt 4 RJ 48 cable 33008 00010 7 45 CABLE 24AWG 2M 33010 00006 IDB25 M gt cable 1 8m 35015 00001 45 PHONE BOX FIBER B 00008 40025 WITH 1 1 BACKUP FIBER 1 FIBER 2 XCODE 2P SHDSL 00008 40026 00008 40027 00008 40028 00008 40051 00008 40029 SIGNAL OPTICAL FIBER IDAUL PORT FIBER MERCURY XCODE IDAUL PORT GSHDSL MERCURY 2T1 BOARD 1000 33010 00025 DB25 gt 4 RJ 48 cable 33008 00010 RJ 45 CABLE 24AWG 2M 33010 00006 DB25 M 2 F cable 1 8m 35015 00001 00008 40032 MERCURY 4P V24 BOARD IRJ 45 PHONE BOX
164. a transmission When in Unframed mode E1 data uses the 2 048 Mbps bit rate 1 signal with no synchronization signal and needs to assign 32 time slots fr 0 fas default unframe CAS Select CAS Channel Associated Signaling or CCS Common Channel Signaling under the FAS framing mode In both CAS and CCS mode time slot 0 is always indicated to a fixed synchronization pattern and frame alignment word But in CAS mode time slot 16 is usually indicated to channel signaling So in CAS mode time slot 0 and 16 are not used for data transmission totally 30 time slots In CCS mode only time slot 0 can not used totally 31 time slots cas 0 ccs default cas TCRC CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check on Tx port 70 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring RCRC CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check on Rx port act 0 disable enable default Select CV Code Violation or BPV Bipolar Violation 0 cv default 1 bpv AIS Alarm Indication Signal AIS If the signal is cut off between two terminals loss of port signal or there is a local loss of synchronization to remote port signal red alarm condition this AIS is sent to inform the next terminal that data is not valid The AIS signal is always an all ones unframed signal This function is always used for whole channel E1 to E1 El to T1 TI to T1 cross connection SIDLE Signal Idle code this is used to setup the digital
165. able Device Control The device control menu allows you to restore the default parameters or warm start your Router Module using the current parameters M Diagnosis In the diagnosis menu you can use ICMP ping echo to perform diagnosis on your network MAIN Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d Configuration Monitoring Device Control Diagnosis System AUX Port Interface TSA Routing Table SNMP ENTER select TAB next left right ESC previous menu Figure 5 55 The main menu tree in Ch r module Configuration Menu Configuration Menu includes most general settings and features for your Router Module you will find more detailed setting information in the following sections B System This field includes the Ethernet IP and AUX interface setup and also allows you to choose the WAN interface encapsulation and traffic type You can activate the DHCP server and SNMP agent in this field B AUX Port Set up your PPP encapsulation for WAN interface in this field You can activate the NAT and Filter feature here 203 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Interface Setup the PPP local remote IP and its net mask You can activate each WAN interface here B 5 Time Slot Assignment for each WAN port B Routing Table Configure the static routing table and default route for your network in this field B SNMP Enable the SNMP function in this field Configuration Mercury Channelized Router V
166. address for the WAN port on a remote lt PPP gt router when the protocol is selected PPP Local IP lt FR gt This parameter identifies the IP address for local WAN interface when the protocol is selected Frame Relay IP NetMask The IP net mask for WAN when protocol is selected Frame Relay lt FR gt Remote IP FR This parameter identifies the IP address for the WAN port on a remote router when the protocol is selected Frame Relay 166 Chapter 5 Router Configuration LMI type FR A management protocol called LMI Local Management Interface provides information about the status of PVC to network access devices It defines management frames for monitoring the integrity of a link and whether a link is active or not Carrier provide DLCI number The specific DLCI Data Link Connection Identifier for each PVC FR which is a path number of a portion of the PVC the DLCI changes for each hop through the network not the address of the destination It is a logical identifier with local significance only Identifiers can range from 16 to 991 AUX Port Enable or Disable the AUX interface Local IP lt gt This parameter identifies the IP address for local AUX interface IP NetMask The IP net mask for AUX interface lt AUX gt Remote IP This parameter identifies the IP address for the AUX port on a remote lt AUX gt router AUX Port Speed Selected the AUX port speed and d
167. ade from TFTP Server CAUTION ftt Download process vill ERASE the program code in the device DO NOT interrupt the dounload process If you suspect that it failed wait for a time out and then start the download process again If the file transfer DOES NOT verify DO NOT power cycle or reboot the unit Go back and start the download process again If the file transfer DOES verify DO pouer cycle or reboot the unit New program code will be in use Press ENTER to continue download process m ENTER select TAB next lt left gt right ESC previous menu Figure 5 50 Firmware update Step 4 Start uploading firmware file Input the IP of TFTP server workstation and the firmware file name Continue to press Enter and begin uploads id exe telnet 172 16 5 250 Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 88 Warm Start Cold Start Restore Default Firmware Upgrade Firmware Upgrade from TFTP Server Firmware Upgrade TFTP Server IP Address 172 16 2 52 TFTP Server File Name fvi 88 bin Input ASCII SPACE BS DEL ENTER next field lt left gt right ESC abort Figure 5 51 TFTP Server settings Step 5 Restart Router Module After file transfer is complete select Cold_Start to restart the Router Module 200 Warm Start Reboot Module Cold Start ENTER select TfiB next Figure 5 52 lt sleft
168. agnostic Capability DL Local Digital Loopback AL Analog Loopback RDL Remote Digital Loopback Near End and Far End Block Error Count Timing Internal clock fsc 8Khz PCM 2 048Mhz Power consumption Less than 1 5 Watts Operating Temperature 0 50 C Storage Temperature 25 C 70 Relative Humidity up to 95 non condensing o Timeslot Allocation Time Slot 0 1 2 3 Ids Bl B2 Reserve D bits 7 6 Table 1 17 IDSL Port time slot assignment Clock Source Follow the active system clock of Mercury only SDSL card SDSL General Description SDSL card is a single port card with CAP modulation that works in LTU and NTU mode via 2 wire copper line Electrical Characteristic LTU and NTU mode Line Coding CAP Line Speed multi rate 144 2064 Kbps Line Requirement 2 wire unconditioned unloaded twisted Line Operating Range 3 7 Km over 26 gauge wire 2064 Kbps 5 2 Km over 24 gauge wire 2064 Kbps SDSL interface according to ITU T standard G 991 1 Line Interface RJ 45 Connector Line Impedance Balanced 135 Output Level 13 14dBm Timing PCM side fsc 8K Hz clock 2 048MHz Power consumption Less than 1 3 Watts Operating Temperature 0 50 C Storage 20 C 70 C Relative Humidity up to 95 non condensing 30 Chapter 1 Introduction Timeslot Allocation User defined any time slot 0 31 to any time slot mapping Clock
169. al RXC normal 3 6 37 Sdsl Command Figure 3 38 RS530 Command Screen B Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 B Purpose To specify the SDSL port location of module setup the operation mode frame type testing diagnosis and connection speed Mercury Series Product supports single port SDSL card which can be set to work as LTU NTU To 1300 mode With 2 wire lines connection and CAP modulation technology the operational distance can be extended for data rate up to 2 048 Mbps The SDSL card also provides the Local and Remote loopback testing for diagnostic When the loopback testing is activated the front panel LED indicator will keep blinking Syntax SDSL port MOD mod TEST test FR fr EOC eoc count B Param O port MOD mod TEST test Port identifier for the indicated SDSL port The mode of SDSL card type It can be set to LTU NTU mode or 1300 if connect to remote stand alone Xstream 1300 0 LTU 1 NTU default 2 To 1300 Enable the loopback testing function for diagnoistic 0 normal default 1 local loopback 2 remote loopback Configure the indicated SDSL port to Frame mode or Unframed mode In Frame mode it starts from time slot 0 and must setup the ets to specify the data rate When in Unframe mode the data rate is 2 048 Mbps 92 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring o fr 0 frame default 1 unframed EOC Enabl
170. alarm detection on port 1C Loge 1 loopl e Stop and save the above commands into the 1 profile with the name 1 Logb Starting logging command scripts Xcs 1c Ib e Uni directional cross from to 1B Cp la off 0 on 2 sw 0 e Disable the call profile facility and alarm detection on port off 0 on 1 sw 1 e Enable the call profile facility on port if the criteria of Major or Minor alarm is detected system will execute profile 1 The traffic will stay in Loop2 even if the alarm on port 1C is cleared Loge 2 loop2 e Stop and save the above commands into the 274 profile with the name loop2 Note In this case the parameter alarm code for CP command uses default value Users may refer to table 3 7 2 the alarm code list to set their own criteria 3 7 6 1 1 Revertive Protection with Priority B Description Mercury provides the protection facility such as 1 1 Revertive protection with Priority which is attached in the following figure The data coming from port 1B through Main Loop has more important data with higher priority than the lower priority data coming from 1D through Protect Loop If the Main Loop fails port 1A detects the alarm criteria which can be set by user and system will execute the pre defined profile 2 and switch the higher priority data to pass through the Protect Loop At that time the lower priority data on 1D will be cut out S
171. also translating transport identifier e g TCP and UDP port numbers ICMP query identifiers This allows the transport identifiers of a number of private hosts to be multiplexed into the transport identifiers of a single external address NAPT allows a set of hosts to share a single external address Network Any time you connect 2 or more computers together so that they can share resources you have a computer network Connect 2 or more networks together and you have an internet Node Any single computer connected to a network PAP Password Authentication Protocol PAP is a security protocol that requires users to enter password before accessing a security system The user s name and password are sent over the wire to a server there they are compared with a database of user account names and password This technical is vulnerable to wiretapping eavesdropping because the password can be captured and used by someone to log onto the system Port An Internet port refers to a number that is part of a URL appearing after a colon right after the domain name Every service on an Internet server listens on a particular port number on that server Most services have standard port numbers e g Web servers normally listen on port 80 Port H W An interface on a computer for connecting peripherals or device to the computer A printer port for example is an interface that is designed to have a printer connected
172. ame Alignment Synchronization Loss Detected FAS error occur over critical limited 8 bits sec Only on El links operating with G732S framing 1 Check cable connections to the link connector 2 Check line and or other communication equipment providing the link to the specified E1 module 3 Replace the E1 module Alarm Minor CRC CRC errors Error detected Have the 1 link checked Alarm Minor 132 Chapter 4 Maintenance Message Description Corrective Actions Type Class in the E1 link receive signal lt 2 bits sec Updated once per second Only on El links operating with G732S frame plus CRC CV BPV Code Violation Bipolar Violation error Detected error occur over critical limited lt 2048 bits sec Updated once per second Have the link checked Alarm Minor EBT E Bit error The E bit error rate of the link receive signal lt 1000 bits sec Only on El links operating with G732S framing Problem in network facilities Alarm Minor UAI Receive Unframed One Unframed ones sequence in received in the link data stream Problem at the remote equipment Alarm Minor RRA Receive Remote Alarm Receive the remote loss of frame synchronization alarm on the specified link Problem at the remote equipment Alarm Minor 15 CV 15 Minute
173. amed mode T1 data uses the 1 544 Mbps bit rate T1 signal with no framed structure and needs to assign 24 time slots o fr O ESF default 1 04 2 Unframe o LI Line Driver also called Line Built Out For line interface the internal equalizer can be set to equivalent cable distance from 0 feet to 800 feet oli 0 0ft 1 133ft default 2 266ft 3 399ft 4 533ft 5 655ft 6 800ft RRL Request remote site Mercury Series Product to start or stop the line remote loopback rrl 0 remote loopback stop 1 remote loopback start default DRL Enable or Disable the function to accept remote site loopback testing request or not drl 0 remote loopback off 1 remote loopback on default AIS Alarm Indication Signal AIS If the signal is cut off between two terminals loss of port signal or local loss of synchronization to remote port signal red alarm condition this AIS is sent to inform the next terminal that data is not valid The AIS signal is always an all ones unframed signal This function is always used for whole channel E1 to E1 or El to T1 or T1 to T1 cross connection ais O disable default 1 enable SIDLE Signal Idle code this is used to setup the digital idel code when connect to EI PBX DET Signal Detect code this is used to check the ABCD bit code detected by system then convert to required code by parameter CHG Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring CHG Signal Change code this is
174. an only monitor system status Twenty user profiles Operators can create their personal profiles or loaded a default power up profile when system is being initialized The total capacity of those 20 profiles syntax is 2K System clock source System clock source can be defined to be Internal or received from the designated ports User can select the Master and Secondary clock as the system clock from the designated ports If the Master clock is lost the internal PLL will activate then auto switch to the Secondary clock System also supports Holdover if both the Master and Secondary clocks are lost Performance monitor Errored Seconds ES Severely Errored Seconds SES unavailable second UAS are supported by Mercury s performance monitoring features The historical performance data include 15 min 1 hour 1 day report that complies with ITU T G 826 G 821 Alarm table history Displays the latest 100 alarms status for easy system monitoring General Features 3 different sized Mercury Series Product for different requirements Data port slots can be inserted with the various optional modules B 2 built in El ports for Mercury 800 with software selectable balance unbalance interface Built in Ethernet control interface for Mercury 800 3820 3600 following IEEE 802 3 protocol and based on 10baseT with RJ 45 connector and support SNMP protocol Mercury 800 3600 3820 PPP port supports asynchronous
175. and Screen 88 PM Command 5 89 ISP Gorimand SCreen er eere fere end v ee Tee TY Pere dee und 90 RS530 Command Screen 92 SDSL Command Screen 93 SECC Command 5 94 SECE Command 5 2 95 SIGIDL Command 5 96 STAT Command 5 97 T1 Command 5 99 THRE Command Screen 1 0 1 0001 enne 101 TIME Command 5 99 101 USER Command 102 V24 Command 2 41 20000000000 104 V 35 Command Screen 106 P SsloR amp see loms rm 107 X 50 Command 5 108 XC Command 109 XSLT Command 5 110 nnne 111 XV Command Screen ete ett ttd 112 XCS Command 5 2 2 0000 00000000000 114 XTS Command 5
176. ata format AUX interface is using PPP encapsulation Routing Table Default Gateway In this field enter the IP of the remote node that is the gateway for the static route Device Control Warm Start Use this field to reload the new parameter this is requiring when any value in LAN Setup WAN Setup and AUX Setup has been modified Restore Default This field will restart the system and restore the factory default parameters Monitor LAN Rx Packets The number of received packets from LAN port LAN Packets The number of transferred packets from LAN port LAN Rx Errors The number of packets that are received from the LAN port with specific errors CRC error frame error missed packet unknown or unsupported protocol etc LAN RIP This field shows the current RIP status of LAN interface WAN Rx Packets The number of received packets from WAN port WAN Tx Packets The number of transferred packets from WAN port WAN Rx Errors The number of packets that received from the WAN port with specific errors CRC error frame error missed packet unknown or unsupported protocol etc WAN RIP This field shows the current RIP status of WAN interface AUX Rx Packets The number of received packets from AUX port AUX Tx Packets The number of transferred packets from AUX port AUX Rx Errors The number of packets that receive
177. ation to the users These symbols are explained below Warning This symbol and associated text are used when death or injury to the user may result if operating instructions are not followed properly Caution This symbol and associated text are used when damages to the equipment or impact to the operation may result if operating instructions are not followed properly Note This symbol and associated text are used to provide the users with extra information that may be helpful when following the main instructions in this manual Mercury Series User s Manual Rev 1 6 WARRANTY AND SERVICE Contact If there are any questions contact your local sales representative service representative or distributor directly for any help needed You might use one of the following methods Via the Internet visit our World Wide Web site at http www tainet net Or via Sales Representatives HQ No 25 Alley 15 Lane 120 Sec 1 Nei Hu Rd Taipei Taiwan R O C Phone 886 2 2658 3000 E mail sales tainet net Fax 886 2 2658 3232 URL http www tainet net Moscow Branch Phone 7 095 518 5777 URL http www tainet ru Beijing Branch E Wing Center 3rd Floor Building 113 Zhi Chun Lu HaiDian District Beijing China Postal Code 10086 TEL 86 10 62522076 62522079 E mail marketing tainet com cn FAX 86 10 62522077 URL http www tainet com cn iv CHAPTER 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 3 1 1 4
178. ation when error rate less than 5x 10 4 Protocol ITU T X 50 V 24 V 28 o Timeslot Allocation 5 ports occupy 64 Kbps bandwidth allocated on time slot 0 Clock Source Follow the active system clock of Mercury only 4 24 card 4P V24 General Description 4 Physical ports RS232 I F with SCSI II cable converter to 5 DB25 female ports but the 5th port is un used 4 ports can select individual 64K time slot or combined few of them in 1 time slot for saving the bandwidth Data Rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 bps Data format support Synchronous and Asynchronous mode Synchronous Internal clock the outside equipment should follow Mercury s clock Asynchronous Supports 7 or 8 data bits 1 stop bit none parity and none flow control mode Electrical Characteristic Data Transmission Interface Physical V 24 V 28 4 ports DCE external Null modem is necessary when act in DTE mode RS232 interface IN RTS EC OUT RD CTS TC RC DCD DSR Test Access interfaces Loop on Network side LL Loop on tributary side RL Temperature Operation 0 50 C Storage 10 70 C Relative Humidity Operation 0 90 non condensing Storage 0 95 non condensing 27 Chapter 1 Introduction Power Consumption 0 93 Watt when 4 ports A B C D are used simultaneously Timeslot Allocation e All 4 ports can select individual 64K time slot that located on time slo
179. atus of protocol on the WAN interface Table 5 18 Descriptions of WAN port parameters 5 7 3 4 Time Slot Assignment Setup This menu allows administrator to assign the time slots of the Ch r module for the WAN interface in the Configuration TSA menu 207 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Configuration Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d System AUX Port Interface TSA Routing Table SNMP Time Slot Assignment Time Slot 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 Access WAN 01 WAN 01 01 02 WAN 02 none none Provision yes yes yes no no no no no Time Slot 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Access none none WAN 03 WAN 03 none none WAN 16 Provision no no no yes yes no no yes Time Slot 16 LT 18 19 20 21 22 23 Access WAN 16 WAN 16 WAN 16 WAN 16 none none none Provision yes yes yes yes no no no no Time Slot 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Access none none none none none none none Provision no no no no no no no no TAB next forward backward ENTER select ESC done Figure 5 61 Sub menu of TSA settings for Ch r module Configuration Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d System AUX Port Interface TSA Routing Table SNMP Time Slot Assignment Time Slot 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 Access 01 Interface Provision no n lt gt WAN 01 02 WAN O3 no no WAN 04 WAN 05 WAN 06 WAN O7 Time Slot 08 0 WAN 08 WAN 09 WAN 10 WAN 11 14
180. b sites and web browsers It is also prone to certain kinds of attack IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol Employed by IP hosts the protocol that reports their multicast group membership to an adjacent multicast router IP Internet Protocol The IP currently IP version 4 is the underlying protocol for routing packets on the Internet and other TCP IP based networks IP Pool Internet Protocol Pool refers to the collective group of IP address locates in any particular place ISP Internet Service Provide connections into the Internet for home users and businesses There are local regional national and global ISPs You can think of 258 KEYWORD Appendix E EXPLANATION local ISPs as the gatekeepers into Internet Jack Type Different type of jacks RJ 11 RJ 45 or RJ 48 can be used for an ISDN line The RJ 11 is the most common in the world and is most often used for analog phones modems and fax machines RJ 48 and RJ 45 are essentially the same as they both have the same 8 pin configuration An RJ 11 jack can fit into an RJ 45 RJ 48 connector however an RJ 45 RJ 48 cannot fit into an RJ 11 connector LAN Local Area Network is a shared communication system to which many computers are attached A LAN as its mane implies is limited to a local area This has to do more with the electrical characteristics of the medium than the fact that many early LANs LED Light Emitting Diode LED are visual indicato
181. can be set to different time slot Speed 2400 4800 9600 19200 Sync Async mode Electrical Characteristic Data Transmission Interface Physical V 24 V 28 5 ports DCE external Null modem is necessary when act in DTE mode e Electrical specification X 50 Division 3 multiplexing e Sync mode Bit stream transparent e DTE speed 2400 4800 9600 19200 only the first two ports support 19200 RS232 interface IN TD RTS DTR OUT RD CTS TC RC DCD DSR Network DTE Mode DCE Mode Function TD RD Force off mark when not in sync Data out In RD TD Data input Out CTS CTS Follow RTS state Force on In DCD RTS ON when network OK Out DSR Connect to DTR input pin Out RTS DCD On when Synchronization established RTS DCD signaling Out EXC TC RC Clock of Transmission rate In Data terminal ready Table 1 14 RS232 Network mode e Maintenance Access Interfaces FAS error count e Test Access interfaces Loop on Network side LL Loop on tributary side RL Interface signaling Selectable to send the RTS to remote DCD Performance Requirement Full follow X 50 division 3 20 8 bits envelop Structure so provide 48k 64 Kbps affiance Transmission propagation Delay time lt 50ms 26 Chapter 1 Introduction e Noise immunity System can synchronize the trunk transmission link error rate less than 1x10 4 and keep synchroniz
182. cated port for the current I5minute 1day period and the previous thirty two seven 15minute 1day period reports view0 15min PM history 1 1day PM history CLRClear the 15minute 1day PM report and for Access mode only 0 15min PM history 1 1day PM history 2 15min amp l1day PM history B Example PM view 1 View Iday PM history for all ports PM view 0 View the 15minute PM history for port PM clr 2 Clear all 15minute amp 1 day PM history for all ports PM 4aclr 0 Clear I5minute PM history for port 4A 88 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Mercury gt help pm Usage Performance Monitor Syntax PM port VIEW view CLR clr Params port port identifier VIEW view 15min lday PM history CLR clear 15min lday PM history view 0 15min PM history 1 1day PM history clr 0 15min PM history 1 1day PM history 2 15min amp lday PM history 1 VIEW or CLR all PM history if no port parameter 2 Either of VIEW and CLR parameters must be required 3 CLR for access mode only Mercury pm 3a view 0 15min PM history Period CH TYPE Unavailable Error Seconds Severely ES 10 00 00 1 1 75 00593 6 6E 01 00000 0 0E 00 00000 0 0E 00 10 15 00 1E1 75 00900 1 0E 00 00000 0 0 00 00000 0 0E 00 10 30 00 1 1 75 00900 1 0E 00 00000 0 0 00 00000 0 0E 00 Press SPACE key for more or ESC to abort Mercury pm clr 2 Mercury gt pm 4a clr 0 Figure 3 36 PM Command Screen
183. ccess cross and DAC connect functions Sigidl Idle signal code OF Sece Secc Setup and Confirm the Login ID ID PW and PW For Mercury 800 TAINET 1800 For Mercury 3600 TAINET 3600 For Mercury 3600 TAINET 3600 For Mercury 3820 TAINET 3820 Thre type UA ua Setup PM threshold UA ES SES and ES es SES ses CV cv Including UA ES SES CV CA all 0 disable Table 3 2 System Command of Mercury Description Default Setting V 35 card Clear to Send Signal act 1 signal active V 35 card Data Set Ready Signal act 1 signal active V 35 card Data Carrier Detect Signal act 1 signal active V 35 card Ring Indicator Signal act 0 signal inactive Clock type for the connected device dev 0 DTE without clock TxC and RxC clock polarity Table3 3 V 35 Command Inv 0 TxC normal and RxC normal Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Description Default Setting Framing mode FAS Frame Alignment Signal or Unframed mode fr 0 FAS mode CCS Common Channel Signaling or CAS Channel Associated Signaling cas 0 CCS mode CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check on Tx port tcrc 1 Enable CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check on Rx port rcrc 1 Enable CV Code Violation or BPV Bipolar Violation mode cv 0 CV Balance 120 Ohm or Unbalance 75 Ohm bal 0 Unbalance El port HAUL haul Short haul or Long haul selection
184. ch PVC that is a path number of a portion the DLCI changes for each hop through the network not the address of the destination It is a logical identifier with local significance only Identifiers can range from 16 to 991 183 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 6 4 8 X Manipulation Frame Relay via WAN Configuration MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14a System PPP FR RIP Route Table Security NAT Filter SNMP DHCP Setup WAN Local IP SubNetMask Remote IP over Frame Relay Enter select ESC previous menu lt left 2 right TAB next item LMI Type ANSI T1 617 Annex D DLCI No IP Address IP NetMask Remote IP NAT Filter 1 110 10 0 0 1 11255 255 255 0 11168 192 0 1 Disable Disable Figure 5 29 An example of manipulation Frame Relay DLCI parameter table allows you to configure the remote IP nodes Information of DLCI parameters should match those of the Frame Relay switch Manipulation Frame Relay sJ Frame Relay via xDSL Modem gt TT xDSL Modem Router Module Ffeme Relay Frame Relay Witcl Network Modem vary 3 Frame Relay a 2 0 Switch A xDSL Modem xDSL Modem _ Router Module Frame Relay Switch Figure 5 30 Manipulation Frame Relay via xDSL Modem 5 6 5 5 6 5 1 Manipulation Frame Relay via Mercury 3600 p A 2 Mercury CSU DSU CSU DSU 3600 or or Modem Modem Figure 5 31 Chapter 5 Router Configuration
185. command for Diagnosis in Diagnosis 176 System Ercapsulate ttu hti otii tuto ftans 177 PPP configure for WAN 22 178 WAN port Point to Point connection ssssssssemme 178 WAN IP unnumbered n eta tu idee eng ae 179 PPP configure for AUX interface ccccceeeeeeeseeeeceeceeeeeeeeseeeenneeeeneeeeeeeeees 180 AUX TEE lius ridotte tat iro RU e ERR due eeu 181 Frame Relay WAN 182 Frame Relay Encapsulations to setup LMI and 2 183 An example of manipulation Frame 184 Manipulation Frame Relay via xDSL 184 Xiii Mercury Series User s Manual Rev 1 6 Figure 5 31 Figure 5 32 Figure 5 33 Figure 5 34 Figure 5 35 Figure 5 36 Figure 5 37 Figure 5 38 Figure 5 39 Figure 5 40 Figure 5 41 Figure 5 42 Figure 5 43 Figure 5 44 Figure 5 45 Figure 5 46 Figure 5 47 Figure 5 48 Figure 5 49 Figure 5 50 Figure 5 51 Figure 5 52 Figure 5 53 Figure 5 54 Figure 5 55 Figure 5 56 Figure 5 57 Figure 5 58 Figure 5 59 Figure 5 60 Figure 5 61 Figure 5 62 Figure 5 63 Figure 5 64 Figure 5 65 Figure 5 66 Figure 5 67 Figure 5 68 Figure 5 69 Figure
186. count TYPE type CTS act DSR act DCD act RI act DEV dev INV inv Params port port identifier count time slot count TYPE interface type CTS CTS signal DSR DSR signal DCD DCD signal RI RI signal DEV the type of device connected to INV TXC amp RXC polarity type N A 1 RS530A 2 RS530 3 X 21 4 V 35 act signal inactive 1 signal active dev DTE without clock TXC RXC DTE without clock TXC EXC DTE with clock TXC RXC EXC DCE without clock TXC EXC DCE with clock TXC RXC EXC DTE without clock TXC TCC DTE with clock TXC EXC TCC TXC normal RXC normal 1 TXC normal RXC inverted TXC inverted RXC normal 3 TXC inverted RXC inverted NOTE 1 start timeslot be set 0 Mercury gt data 4a 10 type 2 dev 4 Mercury gt stat 4a TYPE 4DATA CLK YES ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Configuration TYPE RS530 LL no RL no Speed 640Kbps RTS on DTR on CTS on DSR on DCD on RI off Time Slot 0 9 TXC normal RXC normal External Device DCE with clock TXC RXC EXC Mercury data 4b 20 type 4 Mercury stat 4b TYPE 4DATA CLK YES ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Configuration TYPE V 35 LL no RL no Speed 1280Kbps RTS on DTR on CTS on DSR on DCD on RI off Time Slot 0 19 TXC normal RXC normal External Device DTE without clock TXC RXC 0 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 2 Figure 3 16 DATA Command Screen 3 6 12 Date Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 B Purpose Set the Date for Mercury Internal clock B Syntax DATE yyyy m
187. cribed below Local Loop When activated on a selected port the local loopback connects the port transmit signal to the input of the receive path The test signal is provided by the equipment which is routed by the DXC data pump to that port This equipment must receive its own transmission Mercury Unit Unit DCX Interfa Ea Bort 3 Equipment Interface 9 Gd LOCAL LOOP Loopback Figure 4 1 Local Loop back This loopback test is activated by the LINK command Syntax LINK port LL act REMOTE LOOP When activated on a selected port the remote loopback returns the received signal towards the remote user equipment connected to the same port The remote loopback is performed by connecting the port receiving the signal after regeneration to the transmit path The test signal is provided by user s equipment which is connected to the remote end of the link and it must receive its own transmission 153 Chapter 4 Maintenance 4 3 2 3 4 4 Mercury Unit Port Blu Pat HER TSi Interface Unit DCX Interface Equipment Figure 4 2 Remote Loop back This loopback test is activated by the LINK command Syntax LINK port RL act PAYLOAD LOOP Payload loopback shows as below diagram The incoming signal is looped back to the receive path through the DXC data pump This loopback is used for constructing the loop to verify if the modules are currently working in the Mercury Port Digita
188. cury Series Alarm port DB 9 Female For Mercury 800 s PCB Hardware version V1 2 and Mercury 3600 DB9 female Pin2 Pin3 Pin4 Pin5 Pin6 Pin7 Ping Pin9 Signal Table A 4 Craft port pin assignment for Mercury 3600 For Mercury 800 s PCB Hardware version V1 3 or above and Mercury 3820 Signal MinB MinL MajB MinB MinL Table 5 Alarm port pin assignment for Mercury 800 3600 3820 Mercury 800 3820 On Board Ethernet port RJ 45 Pin 3 Pin4 Pin 5 Pin6 Pin7 Pin8 Pin9 Table A 6 On Board Ethernet port for Mercury 800 3820 Mercury 800 On Board E1 120 Ohm interface Balance Pin 3 Pin4 Pin5 Pin6 Pin7 Pin8 Pin9 Ttip Tring Table A 7 On Board E1 120 Ohm port for Mercury 800 E1 2 4C B U and T1 2 4C B interface The E1 T1 interface uses a D sub25 connector Pin descriptions are shown in the following table Pin number Description Pin number Description 1 14 transmit 2 PortD transmit 15 3 PortD receiver 16 PortD receiver 4 17 PortC receiver 5 PortC receiver 18 6 PortC transmit 19 PortC transmit 7 20 PortB transmit 222 Appendix A 8 PortB transmit 21 9 PortB receiver 22 PortB receiver 10 23 PortA receiver 11 PortA receiver 24 12 PortA transmit 25 PortA transmit 13
189. d PW are changed please memorize them otherwise the Mercury must be sent back to TAINET for servicing before operation can be restored Forgotten ID and PW will be lost forever 3 6 40 SHDSL Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 W Purpose Setup SHDSL parameters B Syntax SHDSL port MOD mod TEST test FR fr PSD psd TM tm count SIG act SIDLE sig DET sig CHG sig B Param Port port identifier MOD Setup LTU NTU mode 95 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring TEST Test function Frame mode PSD Power spectrum density o TM Transmission mode SIG Signaling mode SIDLE Signal Idle DET Signal Detect Number CHG Signal Change Number mod 0 LTU 1 NTU test 0 disable 1 local loopback 2 remote loopback LTU mode only Oo fr O frame 1 unframed psd O symmetric 1 asymmetric Htm 0 annex a l annex b count timeslot count 1 31 LTU mode only act 0 off L1 sig value between 0 and 15 ABCD bit B Note Remote loopback and time slot count S for LTU mode only Timeslot 0 is used to transmit signaling data in signaling mode 3 6 41 Sigidl Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 Purpose Set up idle signaling code ABCD bit for FXS and FXO only Syntax SIGIDL code Param None View current idle signal setting if no parameter Code Hexadecimal value between 0 and F 000
190. d from the AUX port with specific errors CRC error frame error missed packet unknown or unsupported protocol etc AUX RIP This field shows the current RIP status of AUX interface DHCP Server This field identifies the DHCP Server function has enabled or disabled SNMP Agent This field identifies SNMP Agent function has enabled or disabled IP Filter This field identifies IP Filter function has enabled or disabled NAT This field identifies NAT function has enabled or disabled 167 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 6 2 Diagnosis Ping In this field enter the IP address you wish to ping shows device is successful receiving responses from destination IP shows a failure Table 5 4 Description of Router Setting Caution BE SURE TO WARM START YOUR ROUTER MODULE IF YOU HAVE CHANGED THE SETTING OF ANY PARAMETERS UNDER SYSTEM SETUP LAN SETUP WAN Setup PPP SETUP FRRELAY SETUP AND AUX Note Each sub menu contains the individual selectable items Some of the sub menu trees might be changed and come after later version User could download the updated software through Tainet s Internet Web site http www tainet net tech upgrade_fam htm Change the System Password Make a preliminary inspection of the shipping container before unpacking Evidence of damage should be noted and reported immediately to the nearest Tainet representative You should change the password t
191. d port detects the alarm then the system will execute another profile and switch all traffic back to the original Loopl Structure 120 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring 1 1 Protection Normal Working Path 3 Protecting Path Mercury A Mercury B oo UN Figure 3 63 CP Command 1 1 protection Actions on Port 1A Actions on Port 1C Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm off gt on on gt off off gt on on gt off Run profile 2 No Run profile 1 No xcs 1c 1b Actions xcs 1 1b Actions Table 3 16 Alarm statues for CP command B Configurations Mercury A e Clk int Setup to internal clock Mercury B e Clk la 1 Setup the master clock received from port 1A the slave clock is from port 1C Mercury A amp B Xcla Ib Cross port 1A to 1B e Xcs Ib 1 Uni directional cross from 1B to 1C e Logr 1 Run profile 1 when following profiles are created Profiles saved in both Mercury A amp B Logb Starting logging command scripts Xcs la Ib e Uni directional cross from 1A to 1B Cp la off 0 on 2 sw 1 e Enable the call profile facility on port 1A if the criteria of Major or Minor alarm are detected system will execute profile 2 The traffic will stay in Loopl even if the alarm on port 1A 15 cleared 121 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Cp 1c off 0 on 1 sw 0 e Disable the call profile facility and
192. d table or syntax 2 port identifier 1A 1B 1C 1D 2A 4A 5A Figure 3 3 Mercury Help Screen Caution Once the Login ID and PW are changed please memorize it otherwise the Mercury must be sent back to TAINET for service while the ID or PW will be lost forever The Basic Concept in Configuring Mercury After entering the Access mode user may follow the instructions below to become familiar with Mercury Series Product This section will explain the basic concepts while configuring Mercury System clock Define the system clock to be Internal or externally received from the designated ports Here you can also select the Master and Secondary clock as the system clock from the indicated ports If the port providing the Master clock fails the alternative port for Secondary clock will become active as a backup clock Only ports A and C with certain specified modules can be locked onto the external clock Refer to Section 3 6 6 for more detailed description and examples B Command Set CLK INT port port 51 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring 3 4 2 3 4 3 3 4 4 3 5 Tributary cards parameters Setup the parameters for each tributary card such as the Line Coding Framing mode for T1 or El card physical signal transmission speed start and end time slot for V 35 card Refer to Section 3 6 for more detailed description and examples Cross Connection Establish the internal communication link between tw
193. ddress as assigned by an ISP The PAT will perform a mapping of global port numbers to the several hosts of local servers The advantage of this scheme in addition to those mentioned above is cost savings only one ISP account and IP address is required In addition the PAT scheme provides privacy since the internal LAN is unavailable to hosts on the Internet all they can see is the single IP address interface provided by the PAT device 191 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 192 168 1 1 LAN I F Private IP m in this LAN segment is 192 168 1 0 27 FTP Server 192 168 1 24 tf x Modem outer IDSL PPP Link ISP Router A 4 Modem Web Server gt 192 168 1 25 xs A 2 IDSL IP 10 0 0 2 30 Serial IP 10 0 0 1 30 168 192 0 2 168 192 0 6 0 IP Pass Through match to 192 168 1 26 192 168 1 3 E pon by ISP is NAT enable 168 192 0 i TN in ISP Router bed 248 ip route 168 192 0 0 255 255 255 248 10 0 02 Figure 5 40 Example of NAT Application With Proxy Port List function you can view inside servers for different services they perform e g web or FTP visible to the outside users even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single entity to the outside world The port number and protocol identify the service e g web service is on port 80 TCP and TFTP is on port 69 UDP The protocol supported in this feature ar
194. densing Feature of Router Module Your Router Module is packed with a number of features that give it the flexibility to provide a complete networking solution for small and medium size businesses or remote offices Easy to Install Your Router Module is designed for quick intuitive and easy installation B Frame Relay Support Frame relay for N R employs a simple form of packet switching that perfectly suits today s powerful PCs workstations and servers Its high throughput and reliability easily copes with bandwidth hungry business applications B Full duplex Ethernet LAN interface The Router Module with 10 Mbps auto negotiating LAN interface enables fast data transfer in either half duplex or full duplex mode depending on your Ethernet network Protocols Supported IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol Point to Point Protocol PPP over HDLC RFC1661 RFC1662 Frame Relay Multi protocol over Frame Relay for N R only RFC1490 NAT Network Address Translation for N R only B DHCP Support DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol allows N R to automatically assign TCP IP settings to workstations on your network Your Router Module can act as a DHCP server B NAT provide Static NAT for Internet Access 159 Chapter 5 Router Configuration The NAT feature for N R allows multiple user Internet access for the cost of a single IP account The NA
195. dle PCM_CODING A law DL off TSA_LOOPBACK off INJECTION on TX GAIN 3dBr RX GAIN 4dBr RING OFF TIME 5second s Figure 3 20 FXO Command Screen 3 6 18 FXS Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 B Purpose The 4 port FXS telephone card can provide point to point Hot Line application by cross connecting time slots to the specified voice channel When the connection is established make one site s hand set go off hook will provide ring tone to the distant site handset Establish the Hot Line connection via El CAS Common Associate Signaling R2 mode voice channel can be integrated to the El network in this application the Hot Line voice channel can be created and extended to the far end remote branch This FXS card only supports A law PCM coding and loop start signaling Syntax FXS port R r DL dl TTX ttx RING ring Tgain tgain Rgain rgain TSA act TONE act B Param port setup the assigned port R setup the line impedance Or 0 600 Ohm default 1 900 Ohm DL digital loopback dl 0 disable default 1 enable TTX teltex tone ttx 0 off default 1 12KHz ttx on 2 16KHz ttx on RING ring frequency and cadency 0 17 Hz 1 sec 2 sec off 75 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring 17 Hz 1 sec on 3 sec off 22 Hz 1 sec on 2 sec off 22 Hz 1 sec on 3 sec off 25 Hz 1 sec 2 sec off default 25 Hz 1
196. e PPP port is located on the back plane of the router card It s a RJ 45 connector with RS 232 V 28 electric signal interface The pin definition is listed in the following Table SIGNAL SOURCE Panel socket Adaptor Input FUNCTION RJ 45 DB 25 Male Output N Transmitted Data DTE 3 2 Oupu Received Data DCE 5 3 mw RequesttoSend DIE 2 4 Oups ClarToSend DCE 7 5 CamierDetct DCE 6 8 mw 229 Appendix A A 19 Receive DCE 8 17 mw Table 20 RJ 45 TO DB25 PIN DEFINATION AUX Transmit Clock LAN ACT AUX WAN EN 208 0 Figure A 10 Router C Interface Ethernet port can be connected via Ethernet 10 Base T interface Pin definition is listed in Table A 21 Pin Number Description TP Driver Output TP Receive Input Table A 21 Pin definition of Ethernet interface of Router C WAN LAN ACT 5 Figure 11 Router C Module Interface 4 FXS 4 FXS D Interface RJ 11 Pin Number Signal Table 22 FXS interface PIN assignment Four 6 pin RJ 11 connectors or one 8 pin Terminal block per card Power consumption Max power consumption 9 watts 4 channels are FXS mode and all active off hook A 20 Appendix A P RING RING RING RING Figure A 12 4 FXS rear panel terminal block XS A IP RED RING GREEN aka Figur
197. e for CPE side lower capacity requirement of voice and data application Mercury 800 has optional rack mount hardware for mounting into a 19 rack Mercury 3600 Mercury 3600 is a 1U high platform with 4 generic slots and 1 management slot It can support higher capacity for voice data and video application The 5th slot can be plugged in with a Router interface with SNMP agent It is especially suitable for use as an economic compact remote distribution node It comes with rack mount hardware for mounting in a 19 rack Chapter 1 Introduction Mercury 3600 Mercury 3600 is a 1U high platform with 5 generic slots and Built in channelized router module is supported with SNMP agent It can support higher capacity for voice data and video application It is especially suitable for use as an economic compact remote distribution node It comes with rack mount hardware for mounting in a 19 rack Mercury 3820 Mercury 3820 is a 3U high platform with 10 slots Built in channelized router module is supported The high capacity platform will be the best application for edge office and POP site It shares the same modules and cards of Mercury 3600 It also comes with rack mount hardware for mounting in a 19 rack Command line setup mode It s user friendly operation mode in special command line Any emulated terminal software such as VT100 ANSI can be used to configure it Craft port For Mercury 800 3600 and 3820 the
198. e specifies their class Major or Minor type Alarm Performance Monitoring and State and explains their meaning Message Description Corrective Actions Type Class LOS Loss of Synchronous Local 1 Check cable connections to Alarm Major lost of multi frame the link connector synchronization alarm on the 2 Check line and or other specified link communication equipment providing the link to the specified FOM module 3 Replace the FOM module 4 Check the clock settings RCL Receive Carrier Loss Check cable connection to Alarm Major Receive carrier data loss from the link connector has been the remote equipment plug properly CV Code Violation error Have the fiber link checked Alarm Major Detected the particular code error over critical limited gt 2048 bits sec Updated once per second 15 ES Errored Seconds Counting Informative alert Major Errored Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 SES Severely Errored Seconds Informative alert Major Counting Severely Errored Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 UA Unavailable Second Informative alert Major Counting Unavailable Second over 15 minutes threshold 136 Chapter 4 Maintenance Message Description Corrective Actions Type Class 1H ES Errored Seconds Counting Errored Seconds over 1 hour threshold Informative alert
199. e 5 sets of ID and PW can be set in system ID The identification for log into Access mode P W The password for the corresponding ID Mode There are two modes for this specified user Supervisor has full authority to operate Mercury including adding and modifying the newer Login ID and PW When operator is assigned as Normal user he can also fully operate Mercury but cannot add the newer Login ID and PW only can modify his own ID and PW Supervisor e N Normal User default B Example SECE 5 Test test n 94 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring e Add a newer Normal user with No 5 ID is Test and PW is test SECC 5 Test test n e Confirm the new ID and PW USER e Display all user ID and PW in Mercury Mercury gt help secc Usage Setup ID amp P W confirm Syntax SECC No ID P W mode Params No user number ID identification P W password mode S supervisor N normal user Notes 1 Method of ID amp P W Modification Step 1 use SECE to select new user No ID amp P W Step 2 use SECC to confirm new user No ID amp P W 2 ID amp P W are case sensitive Mercury sece 5 Test n use SECC to confirm new ID amp password Mercury secc 5 Test n new ID amp password is confirmed and changed Mercury user No ID Password User Mode Active 1 2 3 TAINET 800 Supervisor 4 5 Test test Normal Figure 3 41 SECE Command Screen Caution Once the Login ID an
200. e A 13 4 FXS rear panel RJ 11 2 AP Data Interface The 2 4P Data Module uses a 2 SCSI II D sub50 connector The pin descriptions are shown as follows CONNECT Function SCSI II DB25 1 26 51 76 1 Classis ground 7 32 57 82 7 SG B Signal ground 4 29 54 79 4 RTS C Request To Send 5 30 55 80 5 CTS D Clear To Send 6 31 56 81 6 DSR E Data Set Ready 8 33 58 83 8 DCD F Data Carrier Detect 20 45 70 95 20 DTR H Data Terminal Ready 22 47 72 97 22 RI Ring Indicator 3 28 53 78 3 RD A R Receive Data a 16 41 66 91 16 RD B T Receive Data b 17 42 67 92 17 Rxc A V Receive Timing a 9 34 59 84 9 Rxc B X Receive Timing b 2 27 52 77 2 TD A P Transmitted Data a 14 39 64 89 14 TD B S Transmitted Data b 24 49 74 99 24 Exc A U Ext Transmit Timing a 11 36 61 86 11 Exc B W Ext Transmit Timing b 15 40 65 90 15 Txc A Y Transmit Timing a 12 37 62 87 12 Txc B AA Transmit Timing b 18 43 68 93 18 DCE timing 21 46 71 96 21 DCE timing b Table 23 SCSI II gt DB 25 CABLE PIN assignment 231 Appendix A A 21 A 22 4P V24 Interface The 4P V24 interface uses SCSI II D sub50 connector The pin out descriptions areas follows SCSI II pin number Description 1 11 21 31 Receiver data port A B C D 2 12 22 32 Transmitted data port A B C D 3 13 23 33 Receiver timing and Terminal timing D
201. e TCP UDP and ICMP Static NAT function maintains a simple one to one mapping between a local and global IP address for each host on the LAN The main benefit of this is to avoid reconfiguration of local IP addresses on each host Figure 5 7 13 shows you how NAT work with the public and private IP Assume you have applied the network segment of public IP from your ISP say 168 192 0 0 29 the public IP for you to use is between 168 192 0 0 168 192 0 7 so you have only 5 public IP one for router another two for net ID and broadcast for your LAN But in reality you have a total of 30 computers in your LAN including workstations and a few servers NAT will help you resolve this situation the configuration of this example is as follows Step 1 Selected the public IP for PAT Choose one IP between 168 192 0 1 168 192 0 6 for PAT The Net Mask should match the network segment that ISP assigns to you 192 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Configuration MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 System PPP FR RIP Route Table Security NAT Filter SNMP DHCP Setup NAT Configuration Enter select ESC previous menu lt left gt right TAB next item Network Address Port Translation NAPT Public IP 168 192 0 1 Netmask 255 255 255 248 Figure 5 41 Choose the NAPT Note For some LAN to WAN applications the IP used for NAPT are mostly chosen based on WAN IP address serial interface In this case you ca
202. e extended to any desired number of trunks TDM Modular Integrated Access Device TDM Integrated Access Device Mercury Series Mercury Series Fractional E1 T1 oa HO fo Fm qm FXSFXOESM Figure 1 6 TDM Modular Integrated Access Device Mercury system is an 1 1 or Fractional E1 T1 modular integrated access device IAD It can operate multiple applications simultaneously Mercury enables service providers to bundle voice services and Internet access over a single El or T1 line A variety of voice interfaces are available 1 1 for digital PBX connectivity or analog voice interfaces FXS FXO or E amp M for connecting an analog PBX or telephones Mercury system can be also treated as a Multiplexer for variant services and de multiplex those data stream at the remote site via upper trunk such as 1 xDSL or Fiber optical links Mercury can also be connected to the E1 interface which may be dropped from the SDH network and set up to follow the clock coming from the dedicated port The Mercury has programmable timeslot assignment allowing data from the LAN sub E1 T1 port analog voice ports and data port to be placed into timeslots either consecutively or alternately Mercury also allows flexible timeslot allocation of the data port timeslots Each timeslot of the sub E1 T1 port is placed on the same timeslot of the main 1 1 link 11 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 2 7 E1 T1 Channeli
203. e fiber optical card which can carry 4E1 128 time slots capacity Fiber 1 Signal port fiber card totally 128 time slots Fiber 2 Dual ports fiber card totally 256 time slots 128 ts port Fiber b 1 1 fiber for backup totally 128 time slots B Structure Router x d J 1 IP Network Fiber 1 X EP E1 Fiber 2 FXO Fiber Link Sooo i 3600 LE X1300 2 Equi t quipmen Mercury 800 Equipment Figure 3 59 Fiber 2 Application Diagram E 4 EIL IP Network L Rotuer Wenig Router 1 Fiber B Fiber B he FXO EU Fiber Link TEMP PBX Protection Phone Equipment Equipment Figure 3 60 Fiber B Application Diagram B Configurations There is no necessary to setup the parameters of fiber module Just cross connect the dedicated port to fiber module by using XT or XC command 3 7 3 Built in Ch router for Mercury 3820 Description Build up the IP network from the built in Ch router of Mercury 3820 at CO site to the router of Mercury 3600 at CPE site and to provide the IP network for VoIP application with Venus 2804 gateway At CPE site connect the voice port of Venus 2804 to Mercury 3600 FXO card Extend the distance through the E1 network established by ADM 7500 then pass the v
204. e remaining IP address available for NAT process with TCP protocol maximum IP allows for TCP are 300 TCP Free The remaining connections available for NAT process with TCP protocol Connection maximum connections allow for TCP are 1500 UDP Free IP The remaining IP address available for NAT process with UDP protocol maximum IP allows for UDP are 200 UDP Free The remaining connections available for NAT process with UDP protocol Connection maximum connections allow for UDP are 500 ICMP Free IP The remaining IP address available for NAT process with ICMP protocol maximum IP allows for ICMP are 20 ICMP Connection The remaining connections available for NAT process with ICMP protocol maximum connections allow for ICMP are 50 Table 5 6 Buffer description 174 5 6 3 4 Chapter 5 Router Configuration B DHCP Table Monitoring MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 Current Config Routing Table ARP Table Statistics NAT Buffer DHCP View Dynamic Leases Currently in Use Enter select ESC previous menu lt left gt right TAB next item IP Address Currently Used in The Dynamic Leases IP Address Ethernet Address Lease Time Remaining Lease Time Press any key to return Figure 5 17 The sub menu for DHCP table The DHCP table shows the IP lease situation and you can view the remaining time for the IP address which has been dynamically and statically leased It also shows the corresponding M
205. e the EOC channel for remote control device eoc 0 off 1 on count timeslot count 1 31 Example sdsl 2a mod 2 fr 0 15 e Setup SDSL card located on port2A to LTU type Frame mode and speed is 1024 Kbps start from time slot 1 and the ets is 15 Mercury gt help sdsl Usage Setup SDSL Parameters Syntax SDSL port MOD mod TEST test FR fr ets Params port port identifier MOD setup LTU NTU To 1300 mode TEST test function FR frame mode mod 0 LTU 1 NTU 2 To 1300 test 0 normal 1 1 1 loopback 2 remote loopback fr 0 frame 1 unframe ets end time slot 1 31 Mercury sdsl 2a mod 0 fr 0 15 Mercury stat 2a TYPE 1SDSL CLK YES ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Configuration MODE LTU LL no RL no SPECTRUM TEST no FRAME frame EOC on S N 38db RCV GAIN Odb TX POWER 7dbm REMOTE GAIN Odb REMOTE TX POWER 8dbm Time slot 00 O1 02 03 04 O05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 Figure 3 39 SDSL Command Screen 3 6 38 Secc Command B Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 B Purpose The SECC command is going to reconfirm the newer Login ID and PW after they are first entered in by SECE command B Syntax SECC No ID P W mode B Param No The user number from 1 to 5 there are 5 sets of ID and PW can be set in system ID The identification for log into Access mode P W The password for the corresponding ID mode There are two modes for this specified user Supervisor has
206. eck cable connections Alarm Minor Synchronization Loss to the link connector Detected FAS error occur 2 Check line and or other over critical limited 8 communication bits sec equipment providing the link to the specified X 50 module 3 Replace the X 50 module TXSI Transmit Elastic Store Slip Problem at unstable clock Alarm Minor Detected Tx clock slip on source port 1 TXS2 Transmit Elastic Store Slip Problem at unstable clock Alarm Minor Detected Tx clock slip on source port 2 TXS3 Transmit Elastic Store Slip Problem at unstable clock Alarm Minor Detected Tx clock slip on source port 3 TXS4 Transmit Elastic Store Slip Problem at unstable clock Alarm Minor Detected Tx clock slip on source port 4 TXS5 Transmit Elastic Store Slip Problem at unstable clock Alarm Minor Detected Tx clock slip on source port 5 ALM OFF Alarm Alarm report has Informative message State Minor been switch off at specified action required port ALM amp DA Alarm and DAC Off Alarm Informative message no State Minor C Orr report DAC function has action required been switch off at specified port Table 4 6 lists the alarm messages generated by the Router module specifies their Table 4 5 X 50 module alarm message Channelized Router amp Non Channelized Router Module class Major or Minor type Alarm Performance Monitoring and State and explains their meaning
207. ed bits in the frame is converted in accordance with user s selection to channel associated signaling CAS on the 1 trunk and vice versa The CAS information is inserted in time slot 16 and therefore G 732S framing is always used Since time slot 16 must be reserved for CAS it is not cross connected between the E1 and T1 trunks When CCS signaling is used e g in ISDN PRI access applications the framing mode is G 732N and robbed bit signaling is disabled on the side Thus A law u law conversion can be performed on voice time slots and time slot 16 of the 1 frame must be transferred to the T1 side to continue the signaling path Transport of T1 frame over E1 Transmission Facilities Typical T1 Transport Application Mercury Series T1 E1 L E1 Public Network Mercury Series Figure 1 2 Transport of T1 frame over E1 transmission Facilities The Mercury system allows the transport of a T1 frame across El transmission facilities This function can be performed as shown in Figure 1 2 In the transport application it is necessary to transfer the T1 trunk data including the F bit transparently without any conversion from end to end therefore the T1 frames must be processed in accordance with ITU T Rec G 802 amp Chapter 1 Introduction 1 2 3 Channel Relocation Digital Access and Cross Connect Application Channel Relocation amp Digital Cross Connect Application Mercur
208. ed on the indicated port the following profile number will be executed automatically Profile number that is created by command LOGB LOGE at first Profile no 0 is disable the action when alarm is detected or cleared o SW Profile execution switch to enable or disable the CP command SW 0 disable 1 enable MAJ Major alarm code for detection o MIN Minor alarm code for detection 63 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Alm alarm code from 0000 FFFF hex refer to the following alarm table B Example CP View all call profiles CP la of 1 on 2 sw 1 maj 0002 min 0080 e Enable the call profile function on port 1A when system detects the E1 major alarm RCL with code 0002 or E1 minor alarm with code 0080 then profile no 2 will be executed On the other hand when the above alarms are cleared the system will run profile no 1 automatically Caution Currently the CP function is only available for T1 El Fiber SDSL card The trunk link should be connected to port or C which can be set to derive the clock coming from another site if another Mercury will be receiving the clock from trunk link The switching time is less than 50 ms depending on the loading of the CPU Mercury supports 20 sets of user defined profiles each of them is 2k bytes and can save about 100 command sets 64 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Mercury gt help cp
209. enerated by the 2 4P Data module specifies their class Major or Minor type Alarm Performance Monitoring and State and explains their meaning Message Description Corrective Actions Type Class LOS Loss of Synchronous 1 Check cable connections Alarm Major Local lost of to the link connector synchronization alarm on 2 Check line and or other the specified link communication equipment providing the link to the specified data module 3 Replace the data module No CLK No clock source input from 1 Check cable connections Alarm Major the indicated port to the link connector 2 Check line and or other communication equipment providing the link to the specified data module 3 Replace the data module 15 ES Errored Seconds Informative alert Major Counting Errored Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 SES Severely Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Severely Errored Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 UA Unavailable Second Informative alert PM Major Counting Unavailable Second over 15 minutes threshold 1H ES Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Errored Seconds over 1 hour threshold 1H SES Severely Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Severely Errored Seconds over hour threshold 1H UA Unavailable Second Informative alert PM Major Counting unavailable Second over 1 hour thresho
210. eness against the purchase order Inspect equipment for shipping damage including bent or loose hardware or broken connectors To prevent electrostatic discharge ESD damage avoid touching the internal components Before plugging in any user interface module please turn the power off Caution Turn off the power then remove the top cover before changing or installing any module on the Mercury 800 base unit For Mercury 3600 be sure to turn off the power before replacing any module otherwise the device may be damaged Mercury s shipping package should includes the following items A Mercury stand alone unit User Manual in CD type A power adapter and or a power cord A RJ 45 to DB 9 adapter with null modem crossed inside and a 24 AWG RJ 45 cable for Mercury 800 3600 and 3820 craft port operation for Mercury 3600 a DB 9 adapter cable is included A RJ 45 to DB25 adapter is for Mercury 800 3820 PPP port operations Optional modules and cables 37 Chapter 2 Installation 2 2 2 3 Site Selection The AC power for the power adapter of Mercury Series Product must be installed into an easily accessible grounded AC outlet with a range of 100 to 240 VAC as described in National Electrical Code NEC handbook The Mercury Series Product must be grounded during operation at all times and must remain grounded whenever connected to power In addition Mercury Series Product provides grounding screw located on
211. enu allows the administrator to configure the network parameters of the Ch r module for each WAN interface Chapter 5 Router Configuration Configuration Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d System AUX Port Interface TSA Routing Table SNMP Interface Configuration Interface Name WAN 01 Local IP Address 192 168 1 1 Remote IP Address 192 168 1 2 NetMask 255 255 255 0 1 Connection enable Status err prov Input 0 9 SPACE BS DEL TAB ENTER next field left right ESC abort Figure 5 60 PPP settings of WAN 1 Local IP The IP address is a unique 4 byte 32 bit numeric value used to Address identify a network and a local host on that network Remote IP The IP address is a unique 4 byte 32 bit numeric value used to Address identify a network and a local host on that network NetMask An IP address net mask also 32 bits written in dotted decimal notation is used in conjunction with an IP address to specify which bits of the address make up the network part and which make up the host part Connection Enable or Disable the WAN interface Status Closed The WAN interface is Disabled No T S No access to any Time Slot on the WAN interface No prev Time slot access to the WAN interface 15 not available on the Device Platform Err prev Time slot access to the WAN interface has error on the Device Platform Up Link status of protocol on the WAN interface Down Link st
212. ersion 1 05d System AUX Port Interface TSA Routing Table SNMP System Configuration ENTER select TAB next left right ESC previous menu Figure 5 56 The sub menu tree of Configuration menu 5 7 3 1 Ethernet Setup You can have TCP IP setup for your Ch router module at Configuration System menu Configuration Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d System AUX Port Interface TSA Routing Table SNMP System Configuration LAN Parameters Ethernet MAC 0090BB104491 LAN IP Address 172 16 8 119 LAN IP NetMask 255 255 240 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 System Functions SNMP Agent disable Telnet enable Front Panel disable System Security Console Password root Telnet Username root Telnet Password root Input 0 9 SPACE BS DEL P TAB ENTER next field left right ESC abort Figure 5 57 System configuration Chapter 5 Router Configuration Ethernet The Ethernet Interface Media Access Control MAC address of MAC LAN port LAN The IP address is a unique 4 byte 32 bit numeric value used to IP Address identify a network and a local host on that network Each IP address consists of four sets of decimal numbers separated by periods e g 192 72 243 1 Each address is composed of two parts a network part and a host part The network part identifies the unique subnet containing the host the host part identifies the actual host device
213. es their class Major or Minor type Alarm Performance Monitoring and State and explains their meaning Message Description Corrective Actions Type Class LOS Loss of Synchronous Local 1 Check cable connections to Alarm Major lost of synchronization alarm on the specified link the link connector 2 Check line and or other communication equipment 137 Chapter 4 Maintenance 4 1 5 Message Description Corrective Actions Type Class providing the link to the specified data module 3 Replace the data module 15 ES Errored Seconds Counting Informative alert PM Major Errored Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 SES Severely Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Severely Errored Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 UA Unavailable Second Informative alert PM Major Counting Unavailable Second over 15 minutes threshold 1H ES Errored Seconds Counting Informative alert PM Major Errored Seconds over 1 hour threshold 1H SES Severely Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Severely Errored Seconds over 1 hour threshold 1H UA Unavailable Second Informative alert PM Major Counting unavailable Second over hour threshold 1D ES Errored Seconds Counting Informative alert PM Major Errored Seconds over 1 day threshold 1D SES Severely Errored Seconds
214. escription 4 ports FXO voice card The 4P POTS Voice card provide 3 different sub modules that can support FXS FXO and 2 4 wire E amp M with changing the sub modules only The voice signal can be multiplexed as a 22 Chapter 1 Introduction 64 Kbps signal then transfer into a digital network 4 ports FXO voice card o Electrical Characteristic Digitizing technique 64 Kbps A law PCM coding specified in ITU T G 711 Analog interface FXO 2 wires POTS interface Analog characteristics 2 wire operation at 64 Kbps ITU T G 712 Nominal level 10 dBm Impedance 600 ohms Return loss 300 to 3400 Hz Better than 20 dB Relative levels Input level 0 to 5 dBr adjustable in steps of 1dB Output level 2 to 7 5 dBr adjustable in steps of 1dB Total distortion Comply with Figure 11 of ITU T G 712 Idle channel noise Weighted noise not exceed 65 dBmO Single frequency noise Not exceed 73 dBmO in voice band Signaling loop start Ring generation gt 35 VRMS reference at 25Hz DC impedance Off hook 2300 Ohms at 25mA feed Diagnostics test Full Digital loopback TSA loopback 1 KHz tone injection Timeslot Allocation Each channel occupies 64 Kbps bandwidth allocated on time slot 0 Clock Source e Follow the active system clock of Mercury only Compatibility Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 800 Boot Version Flash Version 4 POTS FXO
215. et net support tainet net Release Time Tue Nov 29 11 32 56 2005 POVER Power 1 5U Power 2 5U External Power 48U 1 S74 Front Panel Ui1 88 Mercury 3666 channelize gt U1 84T DACS Card DACS1 7 Middle Board 01 01 Figure 3 6 About Command Screen for 3600 Mercury gt about i for Mercury 3820 c gt Copyright TAINET Communication System Corp Headquarters 25 Alley 15 Lane 128 Sec 1 Nei Hu Rd Taipei 114 Taiwan URL http www tainet net TEL 886 2 26583666 FAX 886 2 26583232 E mail sales8tainet net support tainet net Release Time Tue Nov 29 11 08 38 2005 1 Power 1 5U Power 2 None External Power None 1 15 01 Front Panel U1 66 Mercury 382 lt channelize gt U1 88 DACS Card DACS33 Middle Board 01 00 Figure 3 7 About Command Screen for 3820 3 6 3 3 6 4 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Alm Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 B Purpose Display the current alarm messages with the dates and times that are stored in the alarm buffer B Syntax ALM CLR port B Param port Indicated port CLR Clear alarm history B Example ALM e Display all alarm messages in buffer ALM CLR e Clear the alarm saved in buffer ALM 4A e Display the alarm message with specified port 4A Mercury gt alm Alarm History 4A 2001 08 31 14 49 31 MAJ LOS RCL 3A 2001 08 31 14 49 32 MAJ LOS RCL
216. first test should be a local line Loopback for us to see if the line is good If all the tests with loopback wiring have been passed then the problem could be elsewhere Using BERT Test Set If a BERT Bit Error Rate Test set such as the WG PFA 35 is available then a comprehensive suite of tests can be performed to examine the conditions of the Mercury With a BERT each port of the Mercury can be tested individually The user must configure the BERT in exactly the same way that the Mercury is configured If all the configurations match for both sides and one of the ports fails then the corresponding module of the Mercury is defective 156 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Chapter 5 Router Configuration ABOUT THIS CHAPTER This Chapter describes how to setup the Router interface that is already built in on board For free future product updates and information please visit our online web site Attp www tainet net 5 1 5 1 1 5 1 1 1 5 1 1 2 Specification There are two model of Router Module for Mercury Series Products Channelize Router Module Ch R order number 000077 0003 The Channelize Router Module makes fractional E1 framing properly and supports multiple WAN applications with up to 32 PPP links It supports PPP function with static routes only Non Channelize Router Module N R order number 000077 0002 Non Channelize Router Module it has the same configuration and similar appl
217. for directly connected networks Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number Table 5 13 Descriptions the parameter of Static Routes Configuring Default Gateway Imagine in large network and internetworks every router cannot know the exact route to every other router This is why the default gateway sometimes called default route is useful The default route specifies where to send non local packets The router will know what to do with it If the next router doesn t know the necessary route it sends the packet to its own default gateway and this process continues on until the destination network is reached Configuration of default gateway is performed by Configuration Routing Table Default Gateway Route Table MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 Static Routing Table Default Gateway Edit Default Gateway Table Enter select ESC previous menu lt left gt right TAB next item Primary Default Gateway 1172 16 15 254 1 Figure 5 38 sub menu of setting Default Gateway NAT amp IP Filter This section shows you how NAT work with your Mercury or Tainet WANpro product and discusses the function of IP filter 190 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 6 6 1 NAT Setting We can classify IP addresses in two kinds local private and global public Local
218. for N R only DHCP Server an automatic assignment of IP address mask default gateway DNS server address and WINS server address to work stations RFC 2131 RFC 2132 IP Address Translation for N R only NAT NAPT Network Address and Network Address Port Translation RFC 3022 Provide enhanced security and flexibility by hiding all IP address on the LAN behind a single static IP on the Internet Sophisticated extension NAT that provides security of a NAT wall to hide LAN IP addresses while providing flexible use of all addresses offered by Internet Service Provider ISP Security for N R only Static IP Filter Incoming and Outgoing Management 5 1157 and MIB II 1213 TELNET RFC 854 ICMP Ping RFC 792 Local management through Console port Firmware Upgrade TFTP RFC 1350 Hardware LAN Interface Ethernet 10 Base T RJ 45 WAN Interface Provides private interface connected to Main board DIN 3 16 158 5 1 2 3 5 1 2 4 5 1 2 5 5 2 Chapter 5 Router Configuration B Through put 440 pps for Router Module 575 pps for Router C Module AUX Interface for N R only Provides RS 232 DTE interface RJ 45 Synchronous up to 128 Kbps and Asynchronous up to 115200 bps data format Processor B 32 768 MHz Motorola MC68EN360 QUICC B MByte Flash memory and 4 Mbyte DRAM Operating Environment B Temperature 0 to 50 B Humidity 5 90 non con
219. front panel button Craft PPP to switch between these two modes Chapter 5 Router Configuration Configuration Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 07 System AUX Port Interface TSA Routing Table SNMP AUX Port Configuration AUX Port Parameters AUX Port console AUX Speed Sync External AUX Local IP Address 192 168 10 1 AUX IP NetMask 255 255 255 0 1 AUX Remote IP Address 192 168 10 2 Input 0 9 SPACE BS DEL TAB ENTER next field left right ESC abort Figure 5 58 AUX port Configuration AUX port Current status of AUX port AUX speed Selected the AUX port speed and data format AUX interface is using PPP encapsulation AUX Local IP The IP address of Local AUX interface AUX Netmask IP net mask for AUX port AUX Remote The IP address for the AUX port on a remote router Table 5 17 Descriptions of AUX port parameters 5 7 3 3 WAN Setup You can setup the WAN parameters for your Ch router module in the Configuration Interface menu Configuration Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d System AUX Port Interface TSA Routing Table SNMP Interface Configuration lt WAN 01 gt WAN 02 03 WAN 04 WAN 05 WAN 06 07 WAN 08 WAN 09 WAN 10 WAN 11 WAN 12 WAN 13 WAN 14 WAN 15 WAN 16 TAB next forward lt backward ENTER select ESC abort Figure 5 59 WAN Interface Configuration When selecting WAN interface the m
220. fter 10 consecutive seconds of data are processed without a SES Current code variation errored CV The code variation will count any error bit detection derived from the data stream transmitted end to end the code variation will only be performed on T1 and FOM module Displaying the performance data The performance data can be displayed on the craft terminal by means of the STAT and PM command by using parameter CLR you can reset all the performance diagnostics registers or to the specified port only Diagnostic with Loop Test function Power up Self test When the system is powered up a complete self test routine is performed such as follows Checking all I O port ROM SRAM FLASH memory Cross connect action Real time clock Installed Modules The self test helps to validate system s integrity During the system self test Ready LED will be extinguished until the self test has been completed 152 4 3 2 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 2 Chapter 4 Maintenance Loopback function The Mercury I O modules support two types of user controlled loopback local analog loopback and remote digital loopback The available test and loopback functions are described in the following paragraphs The loopback is identified by the designation displayed on a craft terminal and front panel LED of Mercury The loopback supported by I O modules with E1 2P V35 4P Data Fiber 1P V35 and RS530 module are des
221. g sent received Off An Ethernet is unconnected properly PWR Green Power ON Off Power OFF PPP CRAFT The rear panel PPP Craft port change to Auxiliary PPP mode The rear panel PPP Craft port change to Craft mode Alarm Cut Off button press to clear the alarm Reset the hardware by pressing this button Table 2 1 Front Panel Description of Mercury 800 The Front panel PPP Craft button can be selected to switch the PPP Craft port on the rear panel to serve as a normal Craft port or an Auxiliary PPP port Auxiliary PPP serial interface operates at standard RS 232 V 24 DTE mode and there should be a RJ 45 cable and RJ 45 to DB25 Male adapter when you unpack It supports both Asynchronous and Synchronous data transmission format It can be connected to the remote site Router and built up a WAN with PPP protocol This facility is for user to control Mercury Series Product via IP Network through its Auxiliary PPP port when there is no local LAN at the installation site Asynchronous selectable data rate are 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps 8 data bits none parity 1 stop bit and none flow control Synchronous data transmission supports up to 128 Kbps Chapter 2 Installation 2 4 Caution Upon pressing the PPP Craft button to switch between normal craft mode or auxiliary PPP mode action will be in effect when system is restarted Please remember to press the RST reset button to initialize system the settings
222. gain Roff time B Param O port o DL TSA act Tgain tgain Rgain Rgain Roff o time B Example TONE Setup the assigned port Digital loopback TSA loopback reserved for factory testing IKHz tone injection 0 off default 1 Tx direction relative gain 0 0 dBr default 1 1 dBr 2 2 dBr 3 3 dBr 4 4 dBr 5 5 dBr Rx direction relative gain 0 OdBr default 1 1dBr 2 2dBr 3 3dBr 4 4dBr 5 5dBr 6 6dBr Ring off time 1 10 second s default is 6 seconds FXO 2a tone 1 tgain 3 rgain 4 roff 5 Setup 2A FXO card to Tx direction gain to 3dBr and Rx direction gain to 4dBr Roff time to 5 seconds and enable the 1 KHz tone injection Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Mercury help fxo Usage Setup FXO Parameters Syntax FXO port DL act TSA act TONE act Tgain tgain Rgain rgain Roff time Params port port identifier DL digital loopback TSA TSA loopback TONE 1KHz tone injection Tgain Tx direction relative gain Rgain Rx direction relative gain Roff Ring off time act 0 off 1 on tgain 0 0dBr 1 1dBr 2 2dBr 3 3dBr 4 4dBr 5 5dBr rgain 0 0dBr 1 1dBr 2 2dBr 3 3dBr 4 44 5 5dBr 6 6dBr time 1 410 second s Mercury gt fxo 2a tone 1 tgain 3 rgain 4 roff 5 Mercury stat 2a TYPE 4FXO CLK NO ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Cross Connect Table TS000 xxxxxxx Configuration MODE terminate STATUS i
223. gs 95 Sigid Command otto a REEL HOP esiste ite Mu tuto d 96 Stat Command ienis 96 Commiand E 97 ARE command 99 Time Comwmand cei rper Rer ebbe e 101 User Command e EET 102 N24 COMMANG PREE E E 102 M35 Comrmatrid eei ie e ERR EA E RR A beans 104 X50 C mmand 106 eR LR 108 Xobr Gomtr nds tutes 109 XT Comtmiarnd i eie eie terapie ee e Enid 110 XN Command esci deett e 111 IGS COMMA ooo AFOSR prede e ent RE 113 P Sexe E 114 SETTINGS ceto cene ce Lacer e e Hoe CO EKSEKO 115 EXO EXSI SDSE card etes eet ete ee dote t te ERI OD e E E ER REX De Yo 115 Fiber nnne 116 Mercury Series User s Manual Rev 1 6 3 7 3 3 7 4 3 7 5 3 7 6 3 7 7 3 7 8 3 7 9 CHAPTER 4 4 1 4 1 1 4 1 2 4 1 3 4 1 4 4 1 5 4 1 6 4 1 7 4 1 8 4 1 9 4 1 10 4 1 11 4 1 12 4 1 13 4 2 4 3 4 3 1 4 3 2 4 4 4 4 1 4 4 2 4 4 3 CHAPTER 5 5 1 5 1 1 5 1 2 5 2 5 3 Built in Ch router for Mercury 3820 2 117 1 1 Revertive 118 1 1 Non Revertive
224. h G732S framing Problem in network facilities Alarm Major 15 ES Errored Seconds Counting Errored Seconds over 15 minutes threshold Informative alert P M Major 15 SES Severely Errored Seconds Counting Severe Errored Seconds over 15 minutes threshold Informative alert Major 15 UA Unavailable Second Counting Unavailable Second over 15 minutes threshold Informative alert Major 1H ES Errored Seconds Counting Errored Seconds over 1 hour threshold Informative alert Major 1H SES Severely Errored Seconds Counting Severely Errored Seconds over 1 hour threshold Informative alert Major Unavailable Second Counting Unavailable Second over 1 hour threshold Informative alert Major 1D ES Errored Seconds Counting Errored Seconds over day threshold Informative alert Major 1D SES Severely Errored Seconds Counting Severely Errored Seconds over 1 day threshold Informative alert Major 1D UA Unavailable Second Counting Unavailable Second over 1 day threshold Informative alert P M Minor TXS Transmit Elastic Store Slip Detected Tx clock slip Problem at unstable clock source Alarm Minor RXS Receive Elastic Store Slip Detected Rx clock slip Problem at unstable clock source Alarm Minor FAS Fr
225. hat is the slot number for the specified slot Mercury 800 supports 5 physical slots Slots 1 and 2 can be plugged into with any kind of interface module and Slots 3 4 and 5 are built into Mercury 800 when ordered Slots 3 4 are interface and Slot 5 is Router interface For Mercury 3820 3600 the built in Router interface is located in slot 11A and 6A B Channel Number Suppose that there is a 4 1 card which has 4 ports installed in slot number 1 and we name these 4 ports as Port Port B Port C and Port D The Channel Number is then designated as combining the slot number with the port name Hence the channel number for the first port of the 4 1 is 1A and the second port will be 1B and so on B Time Slot Number For each channel the data transfer speed can be divided into several time slots and each of the time slots is based on 64 Kbps throughputs Numbers 0 through 31 are assigned to the time slots such numbers are the time slot number Time slot number 0 means the first time slot and time slot number 31 will be the last one Starting Configuration When the connection is established by using terminal emulation or telnet protocol the welcome message will appear on the terminal screen There are two operating modes Monitoring and Access mode in Mercury Series system Press Help or after the prompt Mercury gt will display the help index of the commands in Mercury Series Product
226. he RIP version 1 advertisement RIP 2 Enable the RIP version 2 advertisement Reveive Version Controls the version s of RIP updates that are accepted OFF Disable the version s of RIP upgrades that are accepted RIP 1 Enable the version of RIP 1 upgrades that are accepted RIP 2 Enable the version of RIP 2 upgrades that are accepted RIP 1 amp 2 Enable the versions of RIP 1 and RIP 2 upgrades that are accepted Default Route Controls and sets the Mercury or Tainet WANpro product to advertise itself as the default router 0 Disable 1 15 Enable and specify the number of hops to a destination Horizon Controls the spilt horizon and poison reverse mechanisms Available with active RIP only SPLIT Split horizon POISON Poison reverse Next Hop Advertise Specify whether or not the next hop value is included in the RIP version 2 advertisements Available with active RIP only 187 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 6 5 3 YES Next hop value will not be included in the RIP version 2 advertisements NO Next hop value will not be included in the RIP version 2 advertisements Sub Accept Control whether or not subnet routes are accepted in updates YES Subnet routes will be accepted in updates NO Subnet routes will not be accepted in updates Sub Advertise Controls whether or not the RIP advertises subnets Available with active RIP only Y
227. he specified link communication equipment providing the link to the specified data module 3 Replace the data module 15 ES Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Errored Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 SES Severely Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Severely Errored Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 UA Unavailable Second Informative alert PM Major Counting Unavailable Second over 15 minutes threshold 147 Chapter 4 Maintenance 4 1 11 Message Description Corrective Actions Type Class 1H ES Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Errored Seconds over 1 hour threshold 1H SES Severely Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Severely Errored Seconds over hour threshold 1H UA Unavailable Second Informative alert PM Major Counting unavailable Second over 1 hour threshold 1D ES Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Errored Seconds over day threshold 1D SES Severely Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Severely Errored Seconds over day threshold 1D UA Unavailable Second Informative alert PM Major Counting Unavailable Second over 1 day threshold FAS Frame Alignment 1 Check cable connections Alarm Minor Synchronization Loss to the link connector 2 Check line and
228. he sub menu to view the Interface status Iface To identify the Network interface include LAN and WAN interface Link Closed The WAN interface is disabled No T S No access to any Time Slot on the WAN interface No prev Time slot access to the WAN interface is not available on Device Platform Err prev Time slot access to the WAN interface has error on Device Platform Up Link status of protocol in the WAN interface Down Link status of protocol in the WAN interface Local The IP address is a unique 4 byte 32 bit numeric value used to identify a network and a local host on that network 211 Chapter 5 Router Configuration host part identify a network and a local host on that network NetMask An IP address net mask also 32 bits written in dotted decimal notation is used in conjunction with an IP address to specify which bits of the address make up the network part and which make up the Remote The IP address is a unique 4 byte 32 bit numeric value used to Table 5 22 Descriptions of Interface status of Monitoring menu 5 7 4 2 Routing Table Status The routing list shows current routing status and this status is in the Monitoring Routing Table menu Interface Routing Table ARP Table Statistics View Routing Table Destination NetMask Nexthop iface type 1 127 0 0 1 255 255 255 255 127 0 0 1 LPBK U 2 172 16 0 0 255 255 240 0 172 16 8 119 LAN U SPACE refresh page lt page
229. hernet Firmware Upgrade By TFTP Replace EPROM By TFTP By TFTP 2 port El Interface None None None On Board 1 0 Long Short haul configurable Interfaces 75 120 Ohms configurable Number of I O 2 5 5 10 Slots Not Supported Supported Supported Supported Open case to mount Insert I O Insert I O Insert I O Plug in I O modules Modules Modules Modules without open without open without open case case case Hot Swappable Modules Not Supported Not Supported Supported Supported Mercury 3600 Mercury 3600 Mercury 3600 Module Modules ae 3600 3820 3600 3820 3600 3820 independent to Correspondency use same use same use same others modules modules modules Built in AC or Built in AC or 12 slots for power AC DC DC power DC power module Power Supply PRESE supply supply AC or DC power adapter Redundant Redundant module power module power module Redundant and 4 Chapter 1 Introduction Mercury 800 Mercury 3600 Mercury 3600 Mercury 3820 optional optional Hot swappable power module optional Operation temp Operation temp Operation temp temp 0 0 50 0 50 C 0 50 C Storage temp Storage temp Storage temp St temp 25 25 70 25 70 C 25 70 Environment 70C PE Humidity 0 Humidity 0 Humidity 0 95 RH 95 RH 95 RH 95 RH 2 non condensin
230. ication relative to the previous leased line xDSL modem It supports Routing Bridge access PPP Frame Relay WAN protocol static RIP routing protocol NAT NAPT and filter function For Mercury series product the Non Channelize Router module is built into Mercury 800 and a 16 channels Channelize Router module 32 timeslots totally is built into Mercury 3820 for SNMP agent function Software PPP RFC 1661 RFC 1662 Frame Relay for N R only Multi protocol Interconnect over Frame Relay 1490 B HDLC packet based format link layer Three generally implemented specification of Local Management Interfaces LMI o ANSI T1 617 Annex D CCITT ITU T Q 933 Annex A LMI Frame Relay Forum implementation agreement The one multi connection of virtual link by Data Link Connection Identifier DLCI and Permanent Virtual Circuit PVC only 157 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 1 1 3 5 1 1 4 5 1 1 5 5 1 1 6 5 1 1 7 5 1 1 8 5 1 1 9 5 1 2 5 1 2 1 5 1 2 2 Routing with 1058 RIP2 2543 or static routing on the LAN WAN up to 16 static routes with default route and the option to not advertise routes for Ch R only supports static routes no RIP supported Ethernet Bridge for N R only Automatic learning and aging 3000 MAC address LAN table 1500 frames per second filtering and forwarding rate Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
231. idel code when connect to PBX DET Signal Detect code this is used to check the ABCD bit code detected by system then convert to required code by parameter CHG X Signal Change code this is comes with when system detect the ABCD bit code defined by DET command then convert to the code set by CHG 0 sig ABCD bit value between 0 to 15 SA Sa bit Tx switch sa 0 disable 1 transparent 2 user definition SAD Sa bit TX difinition val value between 0 and 31 BAL Mercury 800 supports Balance 120 Ohm or Unbalanced 75Ohm connector and is software configurable for Mercury 800 built in E1 module only bal O unbalance default 1 balance HAUL Select Mercury 800 built in E1 to Short haul or Long haul For Short haul there will be 6dB attenuation at 1024KHz And for Long haul there will be 30dB attenuation at 1024K Hz for Mercury 800 built in E1 module only haul O short default 1 long B Example fr 0 cas 1 terc 0 0 bal 1 haul 1 e Setup El port to FAS CAS mode disable TCRC and RCRC Balance 120 Ohm mode and Long Haul 71 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Mercury gt help el Usage Setup El Parameters Syntax El port Fr fr CAS cas TCRC act RCRC act CV cv AIS ais SIDLE sig DET sig CHG sig BAL bal HAUL haul Params port port identifier Fr frame mode CAS ccs cas T
232. ile name using command LOGE B Syntax LOGB B Example o LOGB Start logging profile Mercury gt help logb Usage Start Logging Profile Syntax LOGB Mercury gt logb Start logging command scripts Figure 3 25 LOGB Command Screen 3 6 23 Logd Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3820 80 3 6 24 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring PurposeDelete specified profiles Syntax LOGD prodile 1 profile 2 Param Profile profile number between 1 and 20 Loge Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 Purpose Stop and Save Append the command into the specified profile number and profile name Syntax LOGE profile proname A profile Param profile Specified profile number between 1 to 20 proname The profile name for the indicated profile number oA Appending existed profile Example LOGB Starting logging command scripts 1 IDSL 1a op 0 Enable the IDSL port 1A to link mode IDSL 1b op 4 e Enable the DL loopback testing on port 1B o LINK Ic act 2 e Disable the alarm and DAC function and move into out of service mode of port 1C fr 0 cas 0 0 0 Set EI port 3A to CCS FAS mode disable the on TX and RX port CLK 4 Select port 3A as the Master clock and port 4A as the Secondary clock LOGE 10 M800 e Stop and save the above commands into the 10 profile with the name 800 List all saved profiles
233. inside the System currently 81 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Mercury gt help loge Usage Stop amp Save Append Profile Syntax LOGE profile proname A profile Params profile profile number between 1 and 20 proname name of profile for identification A appending existed profile Mercury gt logb Start logging command scripts Mercury gt idsl la op 0 Mercury gt idsl 1b op 4 Mercury gt link 1c act 2 Mercury el fr 0 cas 0 tcrc 0 rerc 0 Mercury clk 3a 4a Master 3A Secondary 4A Active master Mercury gt loge 10 M800 profile 10 save success Mercury logl Profile List 01 test chamber 02 test 03 demo 04 test 10 M800 Figure 3 26 LOGE Command Screen 3 6 25 Logi Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 B Purpose Select the saved profiles while system reboots This allows supervisor to arrange for any of the profiles as the initial profiles using command LOGI when powering on or rebooting the system Mercury will load the indicated profiles and execute all commands following the power on sequence W Syntax LOGI profile 1 profile 2 B Param None Remove the initialized profiles while system rebooting profile Specified profile number between 1 to 20 B Example o LOGI 1014 Select profile 10 1 and 4 as the initialized profile LOGL e List all saved profiles inside the System currently this command also shows which
234. ion A 1 A 2 A 3 Mercury 800 3820 Craft port Interface RJ 45 to DB 9 Adapter with Null modem inside Mercury 800 3820 s Craft port uses the RJ 45 connector and pin descriptions for the RJ 45 to DB 9 are as shown in the following table The RS 232 V 28 electric signal interface RJ 45 pin DB9 pin Female Table A 1 RJ 45 to DB 9 Adapter for Mercury 800 3820 Craft port Mercury 800 3820 PPP port Interface RJ 45 to DB 25 Adapter Mercury 800 3820 s PPP port uses the RJ 45 connector and pin descriptions for the RJ 45 to DB 25 are shown in the following table RS232 V 28 electric signal interface RJ 45 pin Description DB25 pin male source 1 Transmit clock DCE Request to send DTE Transmitted data DTE Signal ground Common Received data DCE Carrier detect DCE Clear to send DCE Receive clock DCE Table 2 port pin assignment for Mercury 800 3820 Mercury 3600 Craft port Interface DB 9 Connector Mercury 3600 s Craft port uses DB 9 connector and pin descriptions for DB 9 lists are shown in the following table RS232 V 28 electric signal interface 221 Appendix A 4 5 6 A 7 Description DB9 pin male Source Transmitted data 2 DTE Received data 3 DCE Signal ground 5 Clear to send 7 DCE Request to send 8 DTE Table A 3 Craft port pin assignment for Mercury 3600 Mer
235. ity Stop bit Type Rate Bits Control Mercury 3600 DCE 19200 8 No 1 None Mercury 800 3820 DTE 19200 8 No 1 Table 5 2 craft port settings for Mercury 800 3600 3820 After the Router Module has been successfully connected to your network and has been assigned an IP address to the Router interface you can then establish a TELNET session Access via Telnet Mode If your Router Module has been assigned an IP address access to TCS by establishing a TELNET session onto the assign IP address of Router telnet IP address The default username and password for TELNET access are both root You can change username and password later on Please refer to Section 5 6 2 for more detail Caution If the IP address is changed during configuration and the changes are saved your TELNET session onto the router is broken You can then telnet to the new IP address assigned during the configuration The Router Module is assigned a default IP address when shipped 192 168 254 254 with Network Mask 255 255 255 0 This IP address can be used to access the router via LAN as follows If you temporarily reconfigure a terminal to use the same network number as the default IP address for example the terminal could be assigned the IP address 192 168 254 1 with a network mask of 255 255 255 0 163 Chapter 5 Router Configuration xDSL Modem p Router Module Terminal Router Module Configured with IP being co
236. ket at rear panel of Mercury 3820 And for Mercury 800 and 3600 no other external power is required 4 POTS Voice card 4 5 5 amp 4 POTS FXS LL type General Description 4 ports FXS voice card The 4P POTS Voice card provide 3 different sub modules that can support FXS FXO and 2 4 wire E amp M with changing the sub modules only The voice signal can be multiplexed as a 64 Kbps signal then transfer into a digital network 4 ports FXO voice card The FXS LL type module cannot be used with other normal FXS and FXO module for the Hotline application it can only use LL type to LL type module or use LL type module with or Fiber interface which has the voice signaling Note The LL type voice module can only be used for Mercury 3600 Electrical Characteristic Digitizing technique 64 Kbps A law PCM coding specified in ITU T G 711 Analog interface FXO 2 wire POTS interface Analog characteristics 2 wire operation at 64 Kbps ITU T G 712 Nominal level 10 dBm Impedance 600 ohms e Return loss 300 to 3400 Hz Better than 20 dB Relative levels Input level 0 to 5 dBr adjustable in steps of 1dB Output level 2 to 7 5 dBr adjustable in steps of 1dB Total distortion Comply with Figure 11 of ITUT G 712 Idle channel noise Weighted noise not exceed 65 dBm0 Single frequency noise Not exceed 73 dBm0 in voice band Signaling loop start excluding LL type Module
237. l Data BER Test Interface Processing Ror Equipment Unit DCX Interface PAYLOAD LOOP Loopback Figure 4 3 Payload Loop back This loopback test is activated by the XC command Syntax XC port a port a Verifying the Mercury Operation To trouble shoot the system more easily user needs to know the exact configuration of the network Standard network troubleshooting procedures involving sectionalizing the network and performing loopback tests on each section of the network should be followed This helps the user to determine whether the Mercury is defective 154 4 4 1 4 4 2 Chapter 4 Maintenance The procedures outlined here will depend on the test equipment and other equipment the user may have on hand The list of these procedures starts from the simple to more complicated procedures Once all the procedures have been done we may conclude that the Mercury equipment is at fault To check if the Mercury is defective or not specialized equipment such as a BERT bit error rate test set is needed Quick Verify the Equipment Check if the text displayed on LCD of the Mercury shows up normally If not then the Mercury has failed Secondly remove all the line connections to Mercury Disconnect the power and re apply the power a few seconds later Observe the power up self test sequence If this fails then Mercury is defective Check if the LEDs show any abnormal display in order to verify the cables and card
238. l This facility is for user to control Mercury Series Product via IP Network through its Auxiliary PPP port when there is no local LAN at the installation site Asynchronous Selectable data rates are 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps 8 data bits none parity 1 stop bit and none flow control Synchronous Data transmission support up to 128 Kbps Note When pressing the PPP Craft button to switch between normal craft mode or auxiliary PPP mode action will be in effect immediately when system has been restarted Please remember to press the RST reset button to initialize the system the settings for Mercury 3820 will be lost if they are not stored into profile in advance 44 2 8 2 9 Chapter 2 Installation Mercury 3820 Rear Panel Description Mercury 3820 enclosure has 10 selectable I O modules and power supply socket in the rear panel Figure 2 7 shows a typical rear view of Mercury 3820 Each slot is marked with a label that designates the slot type and definition The built in router module is located in port11A and will occupy TDM bus of port10A and share the same bus if El card is inserted into port10 Table 2 6 describes the function of each port Please refer to Section 1 4 about the compatible I O modules for Mercury 3820 Figure 2 7 Rear panel view of Mercury 3820 Description Data port 1 to 10 Built in ch router module located on
239. l T1 and E1 Access Point Fractional T1 and E1 Access Point Mercury Series Figure 1 4 Fractional T1 and E1 Access Point The Mercury system can be used to provide an access point for fractional 1 and E1 services as a replacement for dedicated fractional CSU DSU units For this service the Mercury system must include a High Speed Data Port RS530 P V35 2P V35 or 4P Data that connects to the user s equipment Those modules support connection at rates of nx64 Kbps where n 1 to 31 for RS530 and 1P V35 module 64 to 1984 Kbps respectively and n 1 to 32 for 2P V35 and 4P Data module 64 Kbps to 2048 Kbps The user s data stream is then routed to the desired time slots of a selected 1 or T1 port 1 2 5 1 Drop Insert and Bypass for Data amp Voice Location A Location C iy iy I Location B cn 5 s J Figure 1 5 T1 E1 Drop amp Insert for Data amp Voice In a drop insert and bypass application channels from a trunk connecting two locations are dropped at an intermediate location inserted for additional data or just bypassed to allow the data to continue on to the next location 10 1 2 6 Chapter 1 Introduction In the basic application shown in Figure 1 5 some of the channels of trunk A are routed to trunk B and others are routed to trunk C Similarly some of the channels of trunk B are routed to trunk C This arrangement can b
240. lass LOS Loss of Synchronous Local 1 Check cable connections to Alarm Major lost of multi frame the link connector synchronization alarm on the 2 Check line and or other specified link communication equipment providing the link to the specified E1 module 3 Replace the E1 module RCL Receive Carrier Loss Check cable connection to Alarm Major Receive carrier data loss from the link connector has been the remote equipment plug properly FAS Frame Alignment 1 Check cable connections to Alarm Major Synchronization Loss the link connector Detected FAS error occur 2 Check line and or other over critical limited gt 8 communication equipment bits sec providing the link to the Only on El links operating specified E1 module with 67325 framing 3 Replace the E1 module CRC errors Error detected Have the E1 link checked Alarm Major in the El link receive signal 131 Chapter 4 Maintenance Message Description Corrective Actions Type Class gt 2 bits sec Updated once per second Only on El links operating with G732S frame plus CV BPV Code Violation Bipolar Violation error Detected error occur over critical limited gt 2048 bits sec Updated once per second Have the link checked Alarm Major EBT E Bit error The E bit error rate of the link receive signal gt 1000 bits sec Only on El links operating wit
241. ld Chapter 4 Maintenance Message Description Corrective Actions Type Class 1D ES Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Errored Seconds over day threshold 1D SES Severely Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Severely Errored Seconds over day threshold 1D UA Unavailable Second Informative alert PM Major Counting Unavailable Second over 1 day threshold TXS Transmit Elastic Store Problem at unstable clock Alarm Minor Slip Detected Tx clock source slip RXS Receive Elastic Store Slip Problem at unstable clock Alarm Minor Detected Rx clock slip source ALM OFF Alarm Off Alarm report Informative message no State Minor has been switch off at action required specified port ALM amp DAC Alarm and DAC Off Informative message no State Minor OFF Alarm report and DAC action required function has been switch off at specified port Table 4 10 4P Data module alarm message 4P V24 ModuleTable 4 11 lists the alarm messages generated by the 4P V24 module specifies their class Major or Minor type Alarm Performance Monitoring and State and explains their meaning Message Description Corrective Actions Type Class LOS Loss of Synchronous 1 Check cable connections Alarm Major Local lost of to the link connector synchronization alarm on 2 Check line and or other t
242. lert PM Major Counting Severely Errored Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 UA Unavailable Second Informative alert PM Major Counting Unavailable Second over 15 minutes threshold 1H ES Errored Seconds Counting Informative alert PM Major Errored Seconds over 1 hour threshold 1H SES Severely Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Severely Errored Seconds over hour threshold 1H UA Unavailable Second Informative alert PM Major Counting unavailable Second over hour threshold 1D ES Errored Seconds Counting Informative alert PM Major Errored Seconds over day threshold 1D SES Severely Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Severely Errored Seconds over 1 day threshold 1D UA Unavailable Second Informative alert PM Major Counting Unavailable Second over 1 day threshold HAND Hand shake hand shake in Checked the line or remote Alarm Minor progress with specify port IDSL equipment didn t act as NT mode DT Data Through test mode Informative testing alert Alarm Minor diagnosis the line performance R amp D debug using only SSP Send Single Pulses test Informative testing alert Alarm Minor mode To diagnosis the line performance R amp D debug using only SLIP Slip Detecting elastic clock Problem at unstable clock Alarm Minor slip source Chapter 4 Maintenance Message Description Corrective
243. ly Errored Seconds over 1 day threshold Informative alert P M Major 1D UA Unavailable Second Counting Unavailable Second over 1 day threshold Informative alert Major ALM OFF Alarm Off Alarm report has been switch off at port Informative message no action required State Minor ALM amp DA C OFF Alarm and DAC Off Alarm report and DAC function has been switch off at specified port Informative message no action required State Minor Table 4 6 Router module alarm message IDSL LT Module Table 4 7 lists the alarm messages generated by the IDSL module specifies their class Major or Minor type Alarm Performance Monitoring and State and explains their meaning Message Description Corrective Actions Type Class LOS Loss of Signal Local lost of 1 Check cable connections Alarm Major signal on the specified link to the link connector 2 Check line and or other 141 Chapter 4 Maintenance Message Description Corrective Actions Type Class communication equipment providing the link to the specified data module 3 Replace the data module 15 ES Errored Seconds Counting Informative alert PM Major Errored Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 SES Severely Errored Seconds Informative a
244. m dd B Param None Display the current date for Mercury Yyyy Year 0000 9999 Mm Month 01 12 Date 01 31 B Example DATE Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring e Display the current date in Mercury DATE 2005 12 15 e Setup the date to 2005 12 15 Mercury gt date 2005 12 15 Mercury gt date 2005 12 15 10 52 20 Figure 3 17 Date Command Screen 3 6 13 Drop Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 B Purpose The DROP command always comes with command RP refer to section 3 6 35 RP Command and it works in the Ring Protection mode to drop the required time slots to the associated point Syntax DROP mode porta tsa portb tsb portd tsd count B Param mode Designate the data cross connect transmit mode omitted for frame integrity as default value Idle for sending idle code on the assign time slots e L lowlatency e F frame integrity default e V voice conversion e idle porta Identify the Ring In port last port tsa Designate the start time slot of Ring In port portb Identify the Ring Out port next port tsb Designate the start time slot of Ring Out port portd Identify the drop port whose connect to DTE Drop port could be any module of Mercury tsd Designate the start time slot of drop port count Number of continuity time slot omitted will be used as default value of 1 time slot Example drop la 1 1c 1 1b 130 dro
245. mote IP Address 100 0 0 2 SNMP Disable DHCP Daemon Disable Figure 5 25 Auxiliary serial interface operates at standard RS 232 V 24 DTE You should find the RJ 45 cable and RJ 45 to RS 232M adapter when you unpack it supports both Asynchronous and Synchronous data transmission format Asynchronous selectable data rates are 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps 8 data bits none parity 1 stop bit and none flow control Synchronous data transmission supports up to 128 Kbps PPP configure for AUX interface Chapter 5 Router Configuration Caution Upon pressing the front panel PPP Craft button to change to normal craft mode or auxiliary PPP mode please remember to enable the setting by removing and re connecting the power adapter to reset the system settings for Mercury 800 and 3820 may be lost if they are not stored into profile in advance Ethernet Ethernet g 100 0 0 1 24 100 0 0 2 24 A with AUX i B with AUX P PC Lease Line l CS I Lease Line Modem Router Module Figure 5 26 AUX PPP link Site A 100 0 0 1 24 Site B 100 0 0 2 24 Traffic IP Routing Traffic IP Routing Types Types Local IP Local IP 100 0 0 1 100 0 0 2 address address Encapsulate Encapsulate Net Mask 255 255 255 0 Net Mask 255 255 255 0 lt PPP gt lt PPP gt Remote IP Remote IP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 address address Table 5 10 Example
246. mote node specifies only the network to which the gateway is directly connected and the Router Module has no knowledge of the networks beyond For instance the Router Module knows about network B in the following diagram through remote node Router 1 However the Router Module is unable to route a packet to network C because it doesn t know that there is a route through remote node Router 1 via Router 2 The static routes are for you to tell the Router Module about the networks beyond the remote nodes Network A m PC Chapter 5 Router Configuration Network B zw xDSL Modem Router Module 7 Router 2 Router 1 Figure 5 35 An application of the router Configuring static routes and default gateway can be finding at Configuration Routing Table menu Route Table MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 Static Routing Table Default Gateway Edit Static Routing Table Enter select ESC previous menu lt left 2 right TAB next item Figure 5 36 The sub menu of routing table Route Table MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 Static Routing Table Default Gateway Edit Static Routing Table Enter select ESC previous menu lt left 2 right TAB next item Destination Address Net Mask Next Hop Metric 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
247. n with another user This capability is achieved by separating the handling of the receive and transmit paths in the time slot switching matrix of Mercury system this mode is called uni directional mode in contrast to the normal bi directional mode the system connects the transmit and receive paths between the same pair of ports Technical Specification Electrical Characteristic The on board interfaces for Mercury 800 refers to ITU T G703 Physical electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces Bit rate 2 048 Mbps 50ppm Line code HDB3 Pulse shape Meet G 703 Peak voltage of mark 2 37V t 10 75 3V 10 1200 Peak voltage of space 0 0 237V 75Q 0 0 3 1200 Pulse width 244ns 25ns Ratio of amplitude 0 95 to 1 05 Ratio of width 0 95 to 1 05 Output Jitter Refer to G 823 Input attenuation Attenuation gt 6db at 1024kHz 14 Chapter 1 Introduction Jitter tolerance Refer to G 823 Jitter transfer Refer to G 823 Wander Refer to G 823 Return loss 51 kHz 102 kHz 212dB 102 kHz 2048 kHz gt 18db 2048 kHz 3072 kHz 2 I4dB Table 1 2 Electrical Characteristic of E1 The on board Ethernet interface for Mercury 800 and 3820 refers to IEEE 802 3 Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection access method and physical layer specification with RJ 45 connector Output impedance 5 10 Mhz 850 11
248. n Menu includes most general settings and features for your Router Module you will find more detailed settings in a later session B System This field includes the Ethernet IP and AUX interface setup and also allows you to choose the WAN interface encapsulation and traffic type You can activate the DHCP server and SNMP agent in this field B PPP Setup your PPP encapsulation for WAN interface in this field You can activate the NAT and Filter feature in here B FR Setup the Frame Relay encapsulation for WAN interface in this field B RIP Router Module supports both RIP version 1 and version 2 routing protocol for your LAN WAN and AUX interfaces Route Table Configure the static routing table and default route for your network in this field Security This field allows you to change the Username and Password for Console and TELNET access NAT Setup the Static NAT and NAPT in this field SNMP Enable the SNMP function in this field DHCP Setup the DHCP Server in this field Filter Generate your Routing Access List in this field 170 5 6 3 3 Monitoring menu Chapter 5 Router Configuration Monitoring Current Config Routing Table ARP Table Figure 5 11 B Current Config Statistics NAT Buffer DHCP The sub menu tree of Monitoring menu Monitoring MENU LAN Status LAN IP Address LAN IP NetMask Active MAC Address TAINET Router Module Version 2 14
249. n leave both Public IP and Net Mask as 0 0 0 0 the Router Module will then automatically take on the WAN IP as your NAPT Step 2 Proxy Port List Use this function to make a Server visible to the outside world specify the port number of service and then assign inside IP address for Server behind NAT Enter the protocol and port number in the field and the inside IP address of the server in the Proxy IP Configuration MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14t System PPP FR RIP Route Table Security NAT Filter SNMP DHCP Setup NAT Configuration Enter select ESC previous menu lt left 2 right TAB next item Network Address Port Translation NAPT Public IP 168 192 0 1 Netmask 255 255 255 248 Porxy Port List Protocol PORT IP Protocol PORT IP TCP 21 192 168 1 24 TCP 80 192 168 1 25 TCP 0 1 0 0 0 0 TCP 0 0 0 0 0 TCP 0 0 0 0 0 TCP 0 1 0 0 0 0 TCP 0 1 0 0 0 0 TCP 0 0 0 0 0 ICMP 0 0 0 0 Figure 5 42 Proxy Port List Setup The most often used port numbers are shown in the following Table Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers Services Port Number FTP File Transfer Protocol 21 23 SMTP simple Mail Transfer Protocol 25 193 Chapter 5 Router Configuration 5 6 6 2 DNS Domain Name System 53 HTTP Hyper Text Transfer protocol or Web 80 Table 5 14
250. n nennen nnn 154 Payload Loop Back uus ER ess 154 Internet Access with Mercury 3600 2 2 2 160 Auxiliary PPP connection beet tee RP AED 161 LAN to LAN Connectivity via eet ie bed tabes 161 LAN to LAN Connectivity via Frame 162 Access via Telnet functionality 164 Describe the operation window when access into Router module 165 N R Jumper Configuration rettet rr oa x kt b dei eit Ek ete dun 166 The sub menu to change the system password 168 The main menu tree in router module eese 169 The sub menu tree of Configuration 170 The sub menu tree of Monitoring 171 The sub menu to view current configuration 171 The sub menu to show the current routing table 172 The sub menu to view the ARP table eese 173 The sub menu for current 173 The sub menu to show current NAT 2 20 0 2200 174 The sub menu for DFICP table ient e epit kk teas eene 175 The sub menu tree of Device Control 175 The sub menu tree of Diagnosis 44 1 1 2 176 The Ping
251. n to prevent the failure on the specified link It can also provide the time slot drop on the multiple nodes of the ring protect associated point Structure Figure 3 66 Ring Protection 1 B Configurations Site A e Clk la Setup the clock received from portlA e El la fr 0 cas 0 terc 0 0 E1 1b fr 0 cas 0 terc 0 rerc 0 E1 1c fr 0 cas 0 tcrc O rerc 0 Setup card on port1 A 1B 1C e Rpimlc 1b31 Setup the Ring Protection in Master mode port1C as last port 1B as next port and time slot 31 for clock transmission e Dropflc1 1b11a130 Drop the time slot 1 to 30 from ring in port last port 1C ring out port next port 1B to the destination port 1A Site B 127 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring e El la fr 0 0 tcrc O 0 E1 1b fr 0 cas 0 0 rerc 0 E1 1c fr 0 cas 0 0 0 Setup card on port A 1B 1C e Rpslalc3l Setup the Ring Protection in Slave mode port1A as last port 1C as Ring Protection Circuit Wrapping E1 Link n Slave LI E1 Link 4 EE oc 1A PT E E 1c Mercury B Mercury 1C next port and time slot 31 for clock transmission e Drop f lal 1c11b 130 Drop the time slot 1 to 30 from ring in port last port 1A ring out port next port 1C to the destination port 1B 3 7 9 Ring protection II B Description Ring protection with 4 nodes as
252. nable the IP Filter find it under Configuration Security Filter There is a filter table for each incoming and outgoing filter this allows you to configure specific IP traffic permitted to access your LAN Filter MENU Incoming_Filter Enter select TAINET Router Module Outgoing_Filter Incoming Filter Config ESC previous menu lt left 2 right TAB next item Version 2 14t Figure 5 44 The sub menu of Incoming Filter settings There are two kinds of Filters incoming and outgoing Incoming Filter controls the access of IP packets incoming from WAN to LAN Outgoing Filter controls the IP 194 packets outgoing from LAN to WAN Chapter 5 Router Configuration ADDRESS OF THE PACKET YOU WISH TO FILTER Field Description Option Type Enable or Disable the specify Yes access list No Source IP Enter the Source IP Address of Leave 0 0 0 0 if don t care the packet you wish to filter Destination IP ENTER THE DESTINATION IP Leave 0 0 0 0 1f don t care packet that you wish to filter Mask Bit Enter the IP subnet mask Octet E g 255 255 255 0 equal 24 Prefix to apply destination or source IP address Protocol Protocol refers to the upper layer protocol TCP UDP ICMP Port Enter the destination port of the Leave 0 if don t care 1 655535 Table 5 15 Filter rule menu fields Enter Type No No No No No No No No
253. nation portb B Example XCS 3a 4a e Uni directional cross connection from port to port 4A So the destination port 4A can only receive the data from source port 3A but can not transmit the data to port 3A XV4a View port 4A time slot assignment table XCS13a4a Cleared the uni directional crossed from port to port 4A Mercury help xcs Usage Setup one way DACS port Syntax XCS mode portA portB Params mode L low latency F frame integrity I idle portA source port identifier portB destination port identifier Mercury xcs 3a 4a Mercury xv 4a ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Port 4A 000 002 003 008 010 011 016 018 019 024 026 027 low latency frame integrity voice conversion o loopback x idle z Dacs ch loss mark timeslot is one way cross amp combined channel Mercury xcs i 3a 4a Figure 3 56 XCS Command Screen XTS Command B Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 B Purpose The one way time slot assignment command to do the uni directional mapping between a specified port and its time slot Syntax XTS mode porta tsa portb tsb count B Param Mode There are 3 modes for selection 114 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring e L low latency is for some case that you need to transmit data with lower delay but does not care about the data internal structure e frame integ
254. nd only channels 1 amp 2 can be set to speed of 19200 If channel 1 is selected to run at 19200 bps channel 3 must be disabled If channel 2 15 selected then channel 4 must be disabled MUX 5C 5 channels and supports Sync mode only 106 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring MUX 4C 4 channels Sync mode for all channels and Async mode only support channel 1 amp 2 DAC 2C 2 channels and both support Sync and Async mode Only this card supports TS PH DACS functions 64Kbps Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 4 Phase 5 F 9 6Kbps S Figure 3 50 X 50 Concept diagram Syntax X50 port chan MOD mod SPD spd DCD dcd CTS cts DEV dev INV inv SIG sig LL act RL act HC hc PH ph B Param port Port identifier for the indicated X 50 port chan The selected channel for the indicated port MOD channel format for the selected channel Synchronous and Asynchronous are both supported For Async mode data bits can be selected to 7 8 or 9 bits mod 0 sync default 1 async7 2 async8 3 async9 SPD Channel speed for the indicated channel spd 0 stop default 1 2400 2 4800 3 9600 4 19200 DCD Channel DCD signal ded 0 force on 1 on when sync 2 remote RTS default 3 off CTS Channel CTS signal O cts 0 forceon 1 local RTS default DEV Select this channel to be DCE or DTE type dev 0 DTE default 1 DCE
255. nfigured address 192 168 254 1 default IP address 192 168 254 254 sub mask 255 255 255 0 Figure 5 5 Access via Telnet functionality Caution The IP address must not be in use by another device or a conflict may occur The default IP address must not be used as the permanent IP address Router Module will not allow you to access TCS by Console or TELNET simultaneously It is up to you to determine which is the easiest way to access TCS to perform the initial configuration 5 5 Navigating the TCS Interface The TCS Terminal Configuration System is the interface that you use to configure your Router Module There are several operations you should become familiar with before attempting to modify the configuration 164 5 6 5 6 1 Chapter 5 Router Configuration I Configuration MEHU Menu TAINET Router Module System PPP FR RIP Route Table Security HAT Filter SHMP DHCP Setup RIP Option Submenu Enter select ESC previous menu lt left gt right TAB next item Bar Recv Ver Routed Disable Mode Passive Operation Key Hits LAH AUX Send Ver RIP 1 RIP 1 RIP 1 RIP 1 amp 2 RIP 1 amp 2 RIP 1 amp 2 Default Route 0 1 0 1 0 1 Horizon SPLIT SPLIT SPLIT Option Zoom Hext Hop advertise Ho Ho Ho Sub Accept xes xes Yes Sub Advertise Yes Xes Xes Action Key Hits Figure 5 6
256. ng command for Diagnosis in Diagnosis menu When you encounter an IP routing problem such as not being able to communicate with a remote host or if you simply want to verify connectivity you can use the ping command to help you perform diagnosis on it Information This option shows the current version of BOOT ROM and FLASH firmware 5 6 4 LAN and WAN Configuration This chapter will show you how to configure the LAN as well as the WAN of your Router Module with PPP and Frame Relay connection 176 5 6 4 1 5 6 4 2 Ethernet Setup Chapter 5 Router Configuration You can have TCP IP setup for your Router Module at Configuration System menu Configuration MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 System PPP FR RIP Route Table Security NAT Filter SNMP DHCP Setup LAN Local IP SubNetMask amp WAN Protocol amp AUX IP SubNetMask Remote IP Enter select Traffic Types LAN IP Address LAN IP NetMask WAN Protocol AUX Port Speed AUX Local IP Address AUX IP NetMask AUX Remote IP Address SNMP DHCP Daemon ESC previous menu lt left Ec right TAB next item IP Routing 172 16 14 1 255 255 240 0 1 PPP 1 Disable Sync External 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Disable Disable Press SPACE BAR to Change Value Figure 5 21 System Encapsulate Traffic Types indicate whether your Router module is in Bridge Mode or Routing Mode Under System encap
257. ng specified in ITU T G 711 Analog interface FXS 2 wire A B signaling bit will be provided e Leased line 2 wire no signaling bit provided Analog characteristics 2 wire operation at 64 Kbps ITU T G 712 Nominal level 10 dBm Impedance 600 ohms Return loss 300 to 3400 Hz Better than 20 dB Relative levels Input level 0 to 5 dBr adjustable in steps of 0 5dB Output level 2 to 7 5 dBr adjustable in steps of 0 5dB Total distortion The ratio of signal to total distortion power measured with the proper noise weighting see table 4 ITU T G 223 Idle channel noise Weighted noise not exceed 65 dBmO e Single frequency noise not exceed 50 dBmO in all hand Not exceed 73 dBmO in voice band Isolation 1500 Vrms Signaling loop start On hook off hook threshold 5 mA between tip and ring in off hook state 0 5 mA between tip and ring in on hook state Ring generation 38VRMS 10 overload protected 17 22 25 30 Hz 10 1 second ON 2 second OFF or 1 second ON 3 second OFF Diagnostics test Local digital loopback 404 Hz 1004 Hz tone injection Timeslot Allocation Each channel occupies 64 Kbps bandwidth that allocated on time slot 0 Clock Source e Follow the active system clock of Mercury only Compatibility 20 Chapter 1 Introduction Caution If voice card was plugged into Mercury 3820 additional external 48DC power should be connected at PWR3 soc
258. ns Alarm Major Synchronization Loss to the link connector Detected FAS error occur 2 Check line and or other over critical limited 8 communication bits sec equipment providing the link to the specified X 50 module 3 Replace the X 50 module 15 ES Errored Seconds Counting Informative alert Major Errored Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 SES Severely Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Severely Errored Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 UA Unavailable Second Informative alert PM Major Counting Unavailable Second over 15 minutes threshold 1H ES Errored Seconds Counting Informative alert PM Major Errored Seconds over hour threshold 1H SES Severely Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Severely Errored Seconds over hour threshold 1H UA Unavailable Second Informative alert PM Major Counting unavailable Second over hour threshold 1D ES Errored Seconds Counting Informative alert PM Major Errored Seconds over day threshold 1D SES Severely Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Severely Errored Seconds over 1 day threshold 1D UA Unavailable Second Informative alert PM Major Counting Unavailable Second 139 Chapter 4 Maintenance Message Description Corrective Actions Type Class over 1 day threshold FAS Frame Alignment 1 Ch
259. o ports This allows user to do the assignment for the indicated ports or its time slots There are two kinds of cross connection commands XC and XT XC is the port channel assignment command and is used to do the cross connection between two ports XT is the time slot assignment command it is used for cross connection between the designated ports and their time slot Refer to Section 3 6 48 and 3 6 50 for more detailed description and examples B Command Set XC mode porta portb XT mode porta tsa Diagnostic Mercury Series Product provides the diagnostic ability such as the function of alarm status performance monitoring and loopback testing The alarm status shows the current alarm condition in the alarm buffer and the performance monitoring lists the performance evaluation as a group report for 15 minutes 1 hour 1 day interval The loopback testing may force the data to loop back and check the connection section by section Refer to Section 3 6 3 3 6 19 3 6 32 3 6 39 and Chapter 1 for more detailed description and examples B Command Set ALM CLR port p LINK port LL act RL act ACT sw PM port VIEW view CLR clr STAT port Default Configuration Setting and User Stored Profiles There is a factory default configuration for Mercury Series Product and each of the tributary modules When powering on the Mercury or plugging in a new card the default factory settings will be
260. o protect your Router Module and prevent unauthorized user The passwords are separated into two part Console and Telnet To change the System Password enter the Configuration menu and select Security Configuration MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 systen PPP FR RIP Route Table Security NAT Filter SNMP DHCP Edit Console amp Telnet Password Enter select ESC previous menu lt left 2 right TAB next item Console Port Password root Telnet Enable Telnet Username root Telnet Password root Front Panel Config Disable Figure 5 8 The sub menu to change the system password Step 1 Enter your new Console password up to 10 characters and press ENTER The cursor will now move down to Telnet selection Step 2 At Telnet selection press SPACE BAR to enable or disable this field to 168 5 6 3 5 6 3 1 Chapter 5 Router Configuration change the Telnet username and password please select enable If you don t want to activate the Telnet connection select disable Step 3 Change Telnet Username and Password Step 4 Enable or disable the front panel control select disable to lock the front panel This will allow user to only view front panel display status Step 5 After you have changed the password properly the confirm menu will pop up select YES for confirmation If you have changed any parameter in this menu the TCS will require you to restart the Router
261. oice signal to FXS card of Mercury 3820 at CO site B Structure 117 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring CPE site CO site Mercury 3600 ADM 7500 ADM 7500 Mercury 3820 B Venus 2804 192 168 12 254 192 168 11 254 enus 2905 10 time slots for Router connection EE 192 168 12 4 9 Softswitch TEF f Ein 192 168 114 Venus 2804 192 168 11 10 n 1 time slot carries CPE FXO signal back to CO site FXS port L Jmm pw 2001 ey E Port 1001 1002 Figure 3 61 Router Application Diagram B Configurations CO site e Clk 1 Setup to internal clock e El lacas l 1 card that crossed to FXS cards should be set to CAS mode Netsw 1 count 10 Enable the bus sharing for built in Ch router with 10 time slots bandwidth to port 10B e Xtv3aO0 la 17 Cross connect the FXS ts0 to E1 ts17 e Xtlla01a110 Cross connect 10 time slots for Ch router CPE site e Clk2a Setup the clock received from port2A e El 2acas l 1 card that crossed to FXS cards should be set to CAS mode e Xtv3a02a 17 Cross connect the 150 to ts17 e Xt5a02a 1 10 Cross connect 10 time slots for router used 3 7 4 1 1 Revertive Protection B Description Mercury provides the protection facility such as 1 1 Revertive protection which is shown in the following figure The data coming from port 1B will send to port 1A and 1C simultaneously but only receive the uni directional data from port
262. on amp Monitoring ABOUT THIS CHAPTER This Chapter describes in detail the installation and operation instructions for how to configure Mercury Series Product by means of VT 100 terminal and IP host using the Telnet connection after initial configuration of LAN IP setting is done via the emulated terminal program at the beginning Use the terminal emulation software to perform all the operations of Mercury Series product Use the Telnet protocol to connect to the IP hosts of Mercury Series products this offers the same functionality as the supervised craft port 3 1 Hardware Requirements 3 1 1 Operations using Terminal Any terminal emulation software can be communicated with Mercury Series product to perform the configuration and monitoring The following table lists some common software based on the type of PC you are using PC Operation System Software Windows 95 98 ME or NT HyperTerm included with Windows software Windows 3 1 Terminal included with Windows software Macintosh ProComm VersaTerm supplied separately Table 3 1 Platform supported The terminal emulation is necessary to perform the initial configuration The supervised port located on the rear front panel of Mercury 800 3820 15 designed as a craft port of DTE type with a RJ 45 connector Therefore RJ 45 to DB 9 adapter with null modem crossed inside must be connected between PC COM port and Mercury 800 3600 3820 s craft po
263. opular management protocol defined by the Internet community for TCP IP networks It is a communication protocol for collecting information from device on the network Static Routing Static routers tell the Scorpio routing information that it cannot learn automatically through other means The need for Static Routing can arise in cases their RIP is disabled on the LAN or a remote network is beyond the one that is directly connected to a remote node VC base Each ATM VC carries PDU s of exactly one protocol type When multiple protocols multiplexing need to be transported there is a separate VC for each protocol Wide Area Networks link geographically dispersed offices in other cities or around WAN the globe Just about any long distance communication medium can serve as a WAN link including switched and permanent telephone circuits terrestrial radio systems and satellite system Table E 1 Glossary 260
264. ort of the built in router module the user should enable the TDM bus sharing with port10B function first then the TDM bus of port10B 5B will be occupied by port11A 6A In this case port10B must be kept empty and cannot have modules plugged into it Only El card can be plugged into slot10 to share the TDM bus DAC table with router module on port11A The time slots assignment for port11A router module must start from time slot 0 86 3 6 33 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Syntax NET port SW sw COUNT count B Param None Display current DAC sharing status port Move to the router module where it located SW Enable Disable the DAC sharing funcion with port 10B SW 0 off default 1 on COUNT Assign the time slot numbers start from 0 count 0 31 B Example o net sw 1 count 10 e Enable port1 1A DAC sharing with port10B with 10 time slot bandwidth net display current DAC sharing status Mercury gt help net Usage Setup Network Device Syntax NET port SW sw COUNT count Params port port identifier SW DAC switch COUNT timeslot count sw O off 1 on count timeslot 0 32 Notes 1 view 11A DAC switch and timeslot count if no parameter 2 11A DAC share with 1 only Mercury net sw 1 count 10 Mercury stat 11a TYPE Rou 32c CLK NO ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Cross Connect Table 5000 XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXXX
265. p portla ts1 30 portlc ts1 30 to portlb ts1 30 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring 3 6 14 Mercury gt help drop Usage Setup Add drop Connection ts Syntax DROP mode porta tsa portb tsb portd tsd count Params mode L low latency F frame integrity I idle porta porta identifier gt tsa porta time slot number portb portb identifier gt tsb portb time slot number portd port drop identifier d b tsd port drop time slot number count number of time slot connected Notes 1 default value of count is 1 2 default mode is frame integrity if not specified Mercury drop 1a 1 1c 1 1b 1 30 Mercury stat 1 Cross Connect Table 5000 1 000 1 001 1 002 1 003 1 004 1 005 1 006 1C 007 5008 1 008 1 009 1 010 1 011 1 012 1 013 1 014 1 015 5016 1 016 1 017 1 018 1 019 1 020 1 021 1 022 1 023 TS024 1 024 1 025 1 026 1 027 1 028 1 029 1 030 RP CLK Figure 3 18 DROP Command Screen E1 Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 B Purpose Setup the parameters Syntax port Fr fr CAS cas TCRC act RCRC act CV cv AIS act SIDLE sig DET sig CHG sig SA sa SAD val BAL bal HAUL haul B Param Port Setup the assigned port Fr Configure the indicated E1 port to FAS Frame Alignment Signal or Unframed mode When in FAS mode it allows to select which of the available time slots can be used for dat
266. plays current active routes for each interface B ARP Table Shows the ARP list for LAN interface B Statistics 210 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Provides a snapshot view of interface performance Monitoring Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d Interface Routing Table ARP Table Statistics View Interface Status ENTER select TAB next left gt right ESC previous menu Figure 5 65 The sub menu tree of Monitoring menu 5 7 4 1 Interface Status The Interface status shows current link status for each WAN link and this status is in the Monitoring Interface menu Monitoring Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d Interface Routing Table ARP Table Statistics View Interface Status Iface Link Local NetMask Remote 1 WAN 01 up 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 2 2 WAN 02 no prev 192 168 2 1 255 255 255 0 192 168 2 2 3 03 closed 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 4 WAN 04 no T S 192 168 3 1 255 255 255 0 192 168 3 2 5 WAN 05 closed 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 6 WAN 06 closed 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 7 WAN 07 down 192 168 7 1 255 255 255 0 192 168 7 2 8 08 closed 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 9 WAN 09 closed 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 10 WAN 10 closed 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 11 WAN 11 closed 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 12 WAN 12 closed 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 SPACE refresh page lt page up gt page down ESC abort Figure 5 66 T
267. port11A Power supply sockets 1 2 for Mercury 3820 Power supply socket 3 for connecting to external 48VDC this is fo voice application Once the voice cards is plugged into Mercury this 48VDC power is required to supply the additional power for generation of the ring tone PG screw Protective Ground screw for connecting to the earth ground Table 2 6 Rear Panel Description of Mercury 3820 Installing New Cards Different module cards can be plugged into the Mercury Family units at the rear panel Mercury 800 and 3600 do not support hot swappable function As such to change any of the modules for Mercury 800 and 3600 please remove the power adapter first loosen the screws on the rear panel and remove the old module before finally plugging in the new interface Make sure each plug in module is seated firmly then tighten the lock in screw Finally connect the power adapter to power on the system 45 Chapter2 Installation Mercury 3820 supports hot swappable function Therefore plugging or unplugging the modules without turning off the power is permitted Figure 2 8 Installing New cards for Mercury 800 Caution Turn off the power then remove the top cover before changing or installing any module on the Mercury 800 base unit For Mercury 3600 be sure to turn off the power before replacing any module otherwise the device may be damaged 46 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Chapter 3 Configurati
268. profile is selected for loading when system reboots LOGI Remove the initialized profiles if no parameter 82 3 6 26 3 6 27 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Mercury help logi Usage Select Profiles for Reboot Syntax LOGI profile 1 profile 2 Params profile profile number between 1 and 20 Notes clear previous setting if no parameter Mercury gt logi 10 1 4 Mercury logl Profile List 01 test chamber 02 test 03 demo 04 test 10 M800 LOGI ITEM 10 01 04 Mercury logi initial profile list cleared Figure 3 27 LOGI Command Screen Login Command B Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 B Purpose The protection of Mercury Series System the Login ID and Password are required for supervisor starting in the Access mode to control all sessions When enter into Access mode supervisor has full authority to operate the Mercury unit The default ID and PW are listed in the following table and they are also case sensitive Login ID Login Password Mercury 800 TAINET 800 Mercury 3600 TAINET 3600 Mercury 3600 TAINET 3600 Mercury 3820 TAINET 3820 Table 3 14 Login ID and Password for Mercury series B Syntax LOGIN ID P W B Param ID The identification for logging into Access mode P W The password for the corresponding ID B Example LOGIN TAINET 800 Enter into Access mode with default ID and Password Mercury login TAINET
269. r Detected error occur over critical limited 2048 bits sec Updated once per second EBT E Bit error The E bit error Problem in network facilities Alarm Minor rate of the link receive signal lt 1000 bits sec RBA Receive Blue Alarm Problem at the remote Alarm Minor Receive the unframed equipment ones signal RYA Receive Yellow Alarm Problem at the remote Alarm Minor Receive the remote loss of equipment frame synchronization alarm on the specified link 15 CV 15 Minutes Code Bipolar Informative alert Minor Violation Code Bipolar Violation over specify threshold 1H CV 1 hour Code Bipolar Informative alert PM Minor Violation Code Bipolar Violation over specify 135 Chapter 4 Maintenance Message Description Corrective Actions Type Class threshold 1D CV 1 day Code Bipolar Informative alert PM Minor Violation Code Bipolar Violation over specify threshold ALM OFF Alarm Off Alarm report has Informative message no State Minor been switch off at specified action required port ALM amp DA Alarm and DAC Off Alarm Informative message no State Minor C OFF report and DAC function has action required been switch off at specified port Table 4 2 T1 alarm message Fiber Optical Module Fiber 1 Fiber 2 Fiber B Table 4 3 lists the alarm messages generated by the Fiber Optic modul
270. r to Section 3 7 43 XSLT Command B amp combined channel This symbol shows the channel is combined with others for 4P V24 card while executing the V24 command with parameter CC refer to Section 3 7 39 V24 Command a Tq uni directional channel This symbols show that this connection to the additional ports is a simplex connection so that the additional ports can receive the data carried by the user selected time slots transmitted by the port designated as source but cannot transmit data to the source port the source port can only receive data from the port designed as its destination Refer to Section 3 7 48 XCS and 3 7 49 XTS Command XCS Command B Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 B Purpose The one way port assignment command to do the uni directional mapping from a specified port to another port Syntax XCS mode porta portb B Param 113 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring 3 6 55 o mode There are 3 modes for selection e L low latency is for some case that you need to transmit data with lower delay but does not care about the data internal structure e frame integrity is for sometimes the transmitted data is in serial data type and need to keep the integrity of the serial data default e idle is to clear the original cross connected table and return to the idle mode porta The indicated source porta portb The indicated desti
271. rcury 3600 TAINET 3600 Mercury 3600 TAINET 3600 Mercury 3820 TAINET 3820 50 3 4 3 4 1 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Mercury gt help Help Message Help Message ABOUT About Mercury ALM View Clear Alarm History BOOT System Reboot CLK Setup Clock Source CLR Clear Port Status CLS Clear Screen CRAFT Setup Craft Speed DATE Setup Date 1 Setup 1 Parameters FXS Setup FXS Parameters HELP Help Message IDLE Setup Idle Code IDSL Setup IDSL Parameters LINK Setup Link Parameters LOGB Start Logging Profile LOGE Stop amp Save Append Profile LOGI Select Profiles for Reboot LOGIN Enter Access Mode LOGL List the Name of Profiles LOGOUT Enter Monitor Mode LOGR Run Specified Profiles LOGV View Contents of a Profile NET Setup Network Device PM Performance Monitor SECC Setup ID amp P W confirm SECE Setup ID amp P W entry SIGIDL Setup Idle Signal STAT View Port Status 1 Setup T1 Parameters THRE Setup PM Threshold TIME Setup Time USER View User Status V35 Setup V 35 Parameters X50 Setup X 50 MUX Parameters XC Setup Connection Port XT Setup Connection Timeslot XV View Connection Table DROP Setup Add Drop Connection TS RP Setup ring protection RS530 Setup RS530 Parameters XSLT Setup extend slot5 for Mercury 3600 only NMS Setup NMS amp SNMP link port for Mercury 3600 only NOTE 1 HELP command for comman
272. rcury 800 3600 3600 3820 B Example BOOTS System software reboot Mercury gt help boot Usage System Reboot Syntax BOOT S H Params S software reset H hardware reset Mercury boot s Software reseting Figure 3 9 Boot Command Screen 60 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring 3 6 6 CIk Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 B Purpose Define the system clock to be internal or received from the designated ports When set to INT the internal oscillator of Mercury Series Product will generate the clock as system clock and all the tributary cards will follow it Here you can also select the Master and Secondary clock as the system clock from the indicated ports In case the port providing the Master clock fails the alternative port for Secondary clock will be activated as backup clock Only ports and C for some specified modules can be locked onto external clock B Syntax CLK INT port port B Param None View current clock settings if no parameter INT Internal clock port The indicated ports to receive the external clock First port identifier is used for Master clock source the second one is used for Secondary clock source B Example CLK e View current clock settings o CLK INT Select the Internal oscillator as the Internal timing reference of Mercury CLK 3A IC e Select the third slot portA 3A as the Master clock and first
273. rity is for sometimes the transmitted data is in serial data type and need to keep the integrity of the serial data default e I idle is to clear the original cross connected table and return to the idle mode porta The indicated source porta tsa indicated time slot number in porta portb The indicated destination portb tsb indicated time slot number in portb count Number of time slot should be connected B Example XTS lal3a55 Uni directional cross connection from port 1A time slot 1 5 to port time slot 5 9 and the count is 5 So the destination port time slot 5 9 can only receive the data from source port 1A time slot 1 5 but can not transmit the data to 1A XV3a View port time slot assignment table Mercury gt help xts Usage Setup one way DACS time slot Syntax XTS mode portA tsA portB tsB count Params mode L low latency F frame integrity I idle portA source port identifier tsA ts number at source port portB destination port identifier tsB ts number at destination port count number of ts connected Mercury xts 1 1 5 5 Mercury xv 3a ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Port 3A XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX 1 001 1A 002 1 003 1 004 1 005 XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX
274. rored Seconds over hour threshold 1H UA Unavailable Second Informative alert PM Major Counting unavailable Second over hour threshold 1D ES Errored Seconds Counting Informative alert Major 134 Chapter 4 Maintenance Message Description Corrective Actions Type Class Errored Seconds over 1 day threshold 1D SES Severely Errored Seconds Informative alert Major Counting Severely Errored Seconds over 1 day threshold 1D UA Unavailable Second Informative alert PM Minor Counting Unavailable Second over day threshold TXS Transmit Elastic Store Slip Problem at unstable clock Alarm Minor Detected Tx clock slip source RXS Receive Elastic Store Slip Problem at unstable clock Alarm Minor Detected Rx clock slip source FAS Frame Alignment 1 Check cable connections to Alarm Minor Synchronization Loss the link connector Detected FAS error occur 2 Check line and or other over critical limited 8 communication equipment bits sec providing the link to the Only on TI links operating specify module with DA ESF framing 3 Replace the T1 module CRC CRC errors Error detected Have the T1 link checked Alarm Minor in the T1 link receive signal lt 2 bits sec Updated once per second Only on TI links operating with D4 ESF frame plus CRC CV Code Violation error Have the link checked Alarm Mino
275. rored packets received by the LAN or WAN interface TX octets Number of octets received by the LAN or WAN interface TX pkts Number of correct packets transmitted by the LAN or WAN interface Table 5 25 Descriptions of Statistics of Monitoring menu Device Control Menu Device Control menu allows you to warm cold start the system restore back to default parameter values and update the firmware You will find more detailed descriptions in the following sections B Warm Start This command will cause the system to restart and reload the new parameters It also interprets the WAN and LAN connections Cold Start Cold start will reboot the Ch r module This command will be used if and only if you have updated the firmware Restore Default This command will restart the system and restore the factory default parameters B Firmware Upgrade This function allows you to update the Ch r firmware using a TFTP server Device Control Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d Warm Start Cold Start Restore Default Firmware Upgrade Restart Module ENTER select TAB next left gt right ESC previous menu Figure 5 70 The sub menu tree of Device Control menu Warm Start The Warm Start will restart the system and reload the new settings This command is 214 Chapter 5 Router Configuration available in the Device Control Warm Start menu Device Control Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d
276. rs that relay information about the status of specific Scorpio 1401 02 functions to user by lighting up turning off or blinking LED slugs are usually found on the front panel of the physical device Examples include Status Power and System LEDS LLC Multiplexing LLC encapsulation allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit By prefixing the PDU Payload Data Unit with an IEEE 802 2 Logical Link Control LLC header each protocol can be identified Loop reach Loop reach defines speed that can be attained at various distances This is very important for DSL technology as distance from the CO influences attainable speeds MAC On a local area network LAN or other network the Media Access Control MAC address is your computer s unique hardware number On an Ethernet LAN it is the mane as your Ethernet address The MAC layer frames data for transmitted as a stream of bits Modem Modulator demodulator A device that converts digital signal to analog and vice versa so that digital information can be transmitted over analog communication facilities such as voice grade telephone lines Name Resolution The allocation of an IP address to a host name See DNS Network Address Translation is the translation of an Internet Protocol address used within one network to a different IP address known within another network NAPT extends the notion of translation one step further by
277. rsion o loopback x idle z DACS ch loss amp combined channel Mercury xc i 3a 4a Figure 3 52 XC Command Screen XSLT Command B Accommodate Mercury 3600 B Purpose 109 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Enable the extension slot 5 for Mercury 3600 When enabling this command channel 5A will occupy the whole bandwidth of channel 4D B Syntax XSLT sw B Param SW 0 disable default 1 enable B Example o xslt 1 Enable the extension slot 5 Mercury gt help xslt Usage Setup extended slot slot 5 Syntax XSLT sw Params sw 0 disable 1 enable Mercury xslt 1 Extended slot is enabled Figure 3 53 XSLT Command Screen 3 6 52 XT Command B Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 B Purpose The time slot assignment performs the cross connection between the specified ports and their time slot Syntax XT mode porta tsa fp portb tsb fp count B Param mode There are 4 modes for selection e L low latency Low latency is for some case that you need to transmit data with lower delay but does not care about the data internal structure e frame integrity is for sometimes the transmitted data is in serial data type and need to keep the integrity of the serial data default V voice conversion is to convert the voice signal and its signaling while the A u card is inserted e idle is to clear the original cross connected
278. rt For Mercury 3600 s craft port it works as a DCE type with a DB 9 connector so that it can be directly connected to PC COM port without Null modem Characteristics of Mercury craft port Data Format 19200 bps default 8 data bits No parity 1 Stop bit No flow control 47 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring 3 2 e DTE mode with RJ 45 connector in V 24 RS 232 physical type 800 3600 3820 e DCE mode with DB 9 connector in V 24 RS 232 physical type 3600 Emulated Terminal VT 100 ANSI compatible terminal Requirements by using Telnet Protocol Mercury 800 3600 and 3820 provides a built in LAN connector in 10BaseT interface that can be directly connected using straight cable to the local LAN Ethernet hub port To perform the telnet functionality on Mercury 3600 an additional router module is necessary Therefore a PC or UNIX workstation that wants to access Mercury Series Product must have its Ethernet NIC Network Interface Card and acts with TCP IP protocol When the IP settings of Mercury Series product are performed by the supervised craft port in advance and the communication between Mercury and PC workstation is established the administrator can directly access Mercury by telnet with additional parameter UDP port 2000 This option offers the same functionality to operate Mercury Series Product in command line as the supervised craft port The Mercury is assigned a default IP addres
279. s are installed correctly and properly Especially for initial installation excessive errors may be caused due to Incorrect configuration of either the Mercury or the equipment at the other end of the line Faulty line installation which results in excessive noise cross talk or impedance mismatch especially under electrically noisy environments such as central offices so the use of shielded cables is mandatory If a spare Mercury is available replace the one being used with the spare User must carefully configure the spare one to be exactly the same as the working one If the substitution clears the problem then the original unit being replaced by the spare may be the culprit A good practice is to reconfigure the original one and swap out the substitute unit once more If both units show problems then the problem could probably be elsewhere Loopback by wiring Without a spare Loopback wiring is handy for diagnosis Thus a set of cable one for each of the interface types is needed for completing the tests These cable are wired so that signals from the Mercury are looped back by hard wire to the receive pin of the interface Replace the line with loopback cable Observe if the line is in sync If not then the Mercury has failed Next perform a PRBS QRSS test towards the line If this fails then the Mercury is defective 155 Chapter 4 Maintenance 4 4 3 Note that 1f a far end terminal is available then the
280. s Code Bipolar Violation Code Bipolar Violation over specify threshold Informative alert P M Minor 1 hour Code Bipolar Violation Code Bipolar Violation over specify threshold Informative alert P M Minor 1D CV 1 day Code Bipolar Violation Code Bipolar Violation over specify threshold Informative alert P M Minor ALM OFF Alarm Off Alarm report has been switch off at specified port Informative message no action required State Minor ALM amp DA C OFF Alarm and DAC Off Alarm report and DAC function has been switch off at specified port Informative message no action required State Minor T1 Module Table 4 1 alarm message Table 4 2 lists the alarm messages generated by the module specifies their class Major or Minor type Alarm Performance Monitoring and State and explains their meaning Message Description Corrective Actions Type Class LOS Loss of Synchronous Local 1 Check cable connections to Alarm Major lost of multi frame the link connector 133 Chapter 4 Maintenance Message Description Corrective Actions Type Class synchronization alarm on the 2 Check line and or other specified link communication equipment providing the link to the
281. s on Front panel including Fiber fail Frame Sync loss Fiber Optical Frame error Code Violation Electrical Characteristic The FOM Output power 6 dBm The FOM Sensitivity is 32 dBm e The transfer distance up to 55Km e The FOM provide error rate 1 lt 10 10 transmission The FOM be use as clock source The FOM volume is 8M 31 Chapter 1 Introduction e Optical source signal mode laser diode 1310nm Connector FC type Timeslot Allocation User defined any time slot 0 127 to any time slot mapping Clock Source e Can be set to derived external clock from received port 1 amp Fiber IVWA20 Fiber 1VWB20 General Description The FIBER 1V card can provide with alarm and status indicators on Front panel Include Frame Sync Loss Remote Sync Loss Code Violation OE Loss The FIBER 1VWA20 B20 has to be use A type and one B type as a pair the A20 type has the TX as 1550nm RX 1310nm and running in one fiber line B20 type is same as A type module card but it has the TX as 1310nm and RX as 1550nm Electrical Characteristic Propagation delay time about 600 ns The FIBER 1V card output power gt 0 5dBm e The FIBER 1V card sensitivity is 32dBm The FIBER 1V card system gain 26dB e The FIBER 1V provide error rate 1 10 10 transmission e The FIBER 1V can be use as clock source e The FIBER 1V volume is 8 192M POR
282. s port 1B to 2B switch to Protect Loop Cp lc sw 0 e Disable the call profile facility and alarm detection on port Loge 1 MLItoPL Stop and save the above commands into the Ist profile with the name MLItoPL Logb Starting logging command scripts Xc Ib la Cross port 1B to 1A back to Main Loopl Cp lesw l e Enable the call profile facility and alarm detection on port Loge 2 PItoMLI Stop and save the above commands into the 2nd profile with the name PLtoML1 Logb Starting logging command scripts Xc Id 2b e Cross port 1D to 2B switch to Protect Loop Cp lasw 0 e Disable the call profile facility and alarm detection on port Loge 3 ML2toPL Stop and save the above commands into the 3rd profile with the name ML2toPL Logb Starting logging command scripts Xc Id le Cross port 1D to 1C back to Main Loop2 Cp lasw l e Enable the call profile facility and alarm detection on port Loge 4 PItoML2 Stop and save the above commands into the 4th profile with the name PLtoML2 Note In this case the pardifi ter alarm code for CP command uses default value Users may refer to Table 3 7 2 the alarm code list to set their own alarm criteria Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring 3 7 8 Ring protection I Description Constructing the E1 T1 Fiber ring protection feature can provide an always alive transmissio
283. s the IP network address of the final destination If 0 0 0 0 appears in the field this entry specifies the Default Gateway of route information NetMask It represents the IP netmask of the destination IP address NextHop It represents the IP address of the next router for transmission of the IP datagram to the destination network segment IF Identify the IP routing to the corresponding interface Type Protocol First character Status U The route is valid up and in use D The route is invalid down and has a metric of 16 RIP infinity Second character Source l The route is a direct connection R the route is established from RIP information S The route is a static route Mtr The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes Table 5 5 Descriptions of the Field 172 Chapter 5 Router Configuration B ARP Table Monitoring MENU TAINET Router Module Version 2 14 Current Config Routing Table ARP Table Statistics NAT Buffer DHCP View Current ARP Table Enter select ESC previous menu lt left 2 right TAB next item IP MAC Addr 172 16 5 74 0080 8469 5 172 16 5 41 00d05926d6e1 172 16 5 106 0080c8e95c78 Press any key to return Figure 5 14 The sub menu to view the ARP table The ARP table lists the LAN MAC addresses which are learned by the Router Module The Router Module learns a device MAC address when IP traffic is generated between
284. s when delivered 172 16 5 111 with Network Mask 255 255 240 0 Characteristics of Telnet Functionality Syntax telnet Mercury s IP access into Router Module telnet Mercury s IP 2000 access into Mercury via UDP port 2000 Communicated Language The language that can be accepted and executed by Mercury Series Product is entered into the command line with correct syntax Using the simple and easily understood commands will allow the Mercury equipment to perform the specified actions The commands can be entered after the prompt Mercury in either upper case or lower case letters the commands must end with a carriage return or ENTER key The SPACE key is used to insert a separator between commands and parameters and the BACKSPACE key can be pressed to clear the typing errors The command structure 1s as follows B Command Grammar Command Parameter Parameter2 Parameter J Command English letters for a short description or alpha numeric will be valid here Parameter Generally the parameter would be a channel number or time slot number 48 3 3 3 3 1 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring Separation character it has to be SPACE with no limit on the count 4 Termination character it has to be a carriage return ENTER Physical Slot Number For the physical slot number for Mercury we give each one an exclusive number 1 2 3 4 etc and t
285. ser ID and Password and display their status Syntax USER Example USER e List all users ID PW and their status for reference Mercury gt help user Usage View User Status Syntax USER Mercury user Password User Mode Active Figure 3 47 USER Command Screen V24 Command B Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3820 B Purpose Setup 4P V24 card parameters It supports 4 physical RS 232 interface in DCE mode to connect to the low speed 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 data terminal Each of the channels can be software selectable to occupy 1 time slot 64 Kbps individually or can be combined with a few of the channels into 1 time slot to save bandwidth It supports Sync mode in Internal clock so that the outside equipment should follow Mercuy s clock For Async mode it supports 7 or 8 data bits 1 stop bit none parity and none flow control data format Syntax V24 port MOD mod SPD spd DCD dcd CTS cts INV inv LL act RL act CC cc B Param port port identifier for the indicated port MOD data format for selected port Both Synchronous and Asynchronous formats are supported For Async mode data bits can be selected to 7 or 8 bits mod 0 Sync 1 Async7 2 Async8 default SPD Port speed for the indicated the port spd 0 1200 1 2400 2 4800 3 9600 4 19200 default DCD DCD signal 102 CTS 1 cts o INV inv Oo LL o RL act Chap
286. service marks of their respective owners Mercury Series User s Manual Rev 1 6 ABOUT THIS MANUAL This section guides you on how to use the manual effectively The manual contains information needed to install configure and operate the TAINET Mercury Series The summary of this manual is as follows Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Appendix E Introduction Introduce the main feature and modularity of Mercury family Installation Provide installation operation instructions to ensure working properly Configuration and Monitoring Detail the configuration and operation instructions Maintenance Alarm message performance monitoring and loop testing function for diagnostic Router Configuration Describe how to setup the built in Router interface Physical Cabling Pin Assignment Describe the port connectors and interface information Ordering Information Ordering information of Mercury Product Trouble Shooting Provides brief list of trouble shooting tips Trouble Report Form Allows user to submit equipment related trouble information back to Tainet Glossary Mercury Series User s Manual Rev 1 6 SYMBOLS USED IN THIS MANUAL 3 types of symbols are used throughout this manual These symbols are used to advise the users when a special condition arises such as a safety or operational hazard or to present extra inform
287. specified module 3 Replace the T1 module RCL Receive Carrier Loss Check cable connection to Alarm Major Receive carrier data loss from the link connector has been the remote equipment plug properly FAS Frame Alignment 1 Check cable connections to Alarm Major Synchronization Loss the link connector Detected FAS error occur 2 Check line and or other over critical limited gt 8 communication equipment bits sec providing the link to the Only on TI links operating specified module with DA ESF framing 3 Replace the T1 module CRC CRC errors Error detected Have the T1 link checked Alarm Major in the T1 link receive signal gt 2 bits sec Updated once per second Only on TI links operating with D4 ESF frame plus CRC CV Code Violation error Have the link checked Alarm Major Detected error occur over critical limited gt 2048 bits sec Updated once per second 15 ES Errored Seconds Counting Informative alert PM Major Errored Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 SES Severely Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Severely Errored Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 UA Unavailable Second Informative alert PM Major Counting Unavailable Second over 15 minutes threshold 1H ES Errored Seconds Counting Informative alert PM Major Errored Seconds over 1 hour threshold 1H SES Severely Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Severely Er
288. sulate option you enable it to configure LAN interface with an IP address and a subnet mask The IP address should be your router Ethernet IP address Setting up the WAN PPP link Configuration MENU System PPP FR RIP Enter select ESC previous menu PPP Local IP Address PPP IP NetMask PPP Remote IP Address NAT Filter TAINET Router Module Route Table Setup WAN Local IP SubNetMask Remote IP over PPP Version 2 14 Security NAT Filter SNMP DHCP lt left right TAB next item 10 0 0 1 1 10 0 0 0 1 10 0 0 2 1 Disable Disable 177 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Figure 5 22 PPP configure for WAN interface At Configuration PPP you can configure the WAN port data mode and PPP encapsulation The WAN LED on Router rear panel can help you with diagnosis of the WAN port PPP link and see whether it is successfully connected and whether PPP protocol is up You can also check it from Monitoring Menu Current Config to make sure the PPP link is UP If you have set up the physical WAN port connection and configured the PPP encapsulation with proper static but the WAN LED goes out and the Current Config shows WAN status is down then you have to focus on both the setting of PPP encapsulation and the physical connection When WAN LED is lit it means Serial is up and protocol is up The following are the examples of WAN PPP setting Ethernet bi A with WAN IP B with WAN
289. supervised port can also be defined to PPP port by pressing front panel button It is designed in DTE mode with a RJ 45 connector The RJ 45 to DB9 adapter with null modem crossed inside is required for craft port setting The speeds support 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps asynchronous with data format 8 N 1 and non flow control For Mercury 3600 the craft port can work DCE mode using DB9 type connector and support asynchronous speeds at 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 bps data format 8 N 1 and none flow control It can be directly connected to PC COM port without Null modem B TFTP firmware upgrading Mercury 800 3600 and 3820 support upgrading Flash firmware via TFTP server and the upgrading procedures can be performed more easily flexibly with time saved during the upgrade B Support NMS agent Support for SNMP protocol or graphic interface management system B Non channelized channelized router Built in Non channelized for Mercury 800 channelized 16 channels 32 timeslots total for Mercury 3820 3600 router as an SNMP agent with 10BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 connector Real time clock generator and Y2K compliant Date and time can be set by command line 2 Chapter 1 Introduction Security protection Prevent unauthorized access into this device the login ID and PW are necessary for operator to enter into the access mode for advanced system operation Otherwise an operator c
290. t F cable 1 8m 35015 00001 00008 40030 MERCURY SDSL BOARD 45 PHONE BOX 33008 00009 00008 4003 1 MERCURY 4P DATA BOARD RJ 45 8 8 TWIST PAIR 33010 00002 DB25 M gt 35 F cable 33010 00006 DB25 M gt cable 1 8m 33010 00013 DB25 M gt 35 M cable 33010 00023 DB25 M gt DB15 F 20cm 26AW FOR X 21 33010 00004 DB25 M gt DB37 F FOR RS449 35014 00011 IDCE gt DCE sync null modem Product Code Part Number 00008 40032 Description MERCURY 4P V24 BOARD Main Option Equipment Appendix B Annex Option Equipment 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 35014 00011 00008 40033 00008 40034 MERCURY 4P FXO CARD MERCURY 2P DATA CARD DCE DCE sync null modem 33010 00002 DB25 M gt 35 F cable 33010 00006 DB25 M gt F cable 1 8m 33010 00013 DB25 M gt 35 M cable 33010 00023 DB25 M gt DB15 F 20cm 26AW FOR X 21 33010 00004 DB25 M gt DB37 F FOR RS449 35014 00011 00006 50226 INx64K N 1 31 to 2 Mbps IDCE gt DCE sync null modem 33010 00003 DB25 M gt DB15 F cable 33010 00004 DB25 M gt DB37 F cable 33010 00006 DB25 M 2 F cable 1 8m 35014 00011 00006 50227 INx64K N 1 31 to 2 Mbps IDCE gt DCE sync null modem 33010 00013 00006 50228 INx64K N 1
291. t 0 or combined few of them in 1 time slot for saving the bandwidth Clock Source e Follow the active system clock of Mercury only Compatibility Compatible software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 800 Boot version Flash Version 4P V24 V1 03 V1 16 Supported Table 1 15 Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 800 Compatible hardware and software for Mercury 3600 Hardware version Compatible Software Flash ROM 4P V24 card V1 0 V xx 2M Not support V2 0 V5 10 4M Supported Table 1 16 Compatible Software of Boot and Flash for Mercury 3600 Caution For Mercury 3820 all released versions will support the 4P V24 card 1 P V24 DS General Description e One IP V24 DS Card can connects one master DTE device which supports V 24 amp V 28 interface The master can connect remote DTE devices through 1P V24 DS amp 4P V24 cards which plug in Mercury 3820 amp Mercury 800 The 1P V24 DS card support V 24 V 28 interface One port per card and it can connect with one DTE device 1P V24 DS card provide Data Sharing function If it connects with a host DTE device the host can communicate with other eight servant device via 1P V24 DS card at most Electrical Characteristic e Five data rate can be selected 1 2Kbps 2 4kbps 4 8kbps 9 6kbps and 19 2kbps e It provides synchronous mode and asynchronous mode In synchronous mode
292. t speed Speed Speed identifier 0 1200 1 2400 2 4800 3 9600 62 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring 4 19200 default 5 38400 6 57600 7 115200 B Example CRAFT View current craft port speed CRAFT 6 Setup craft port speed to 57600bps Mercury gt help craft Usage Setup Craft Speed Syntax CRAFT speed Params speed speed identifier 0 1200 1 2400 2 4800 3 9600 4 19200 5 38400 6 57600 7 115200 Notes view craft speed if no parameter Mercury craft Craft speed 19200 bps Mercury craft 6 Figure 3 13 CRAFT Command Screen 3 6 10 CP Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 B Purpose Call Profile command allows user to achieve the protection architecture such as 1 1 I 1 N 1 protection When system detects the specified alarm Mercury will automatic execute the pre defined profile which includes the port parameters and the mapping table and switch all the traffic to those ports Now this CP command is available for T1 E1 Fiber SDSL GSHDSL card Please refer to Section 3 7 for example Syntax CP port OFF no ON no SW sw MAJ alm MIN alm B Param None View all call profiles if no parameter port Port identifier for the indicated port OFF When there is no alarm detected or the alarm is cleared with system back to normal on the indicated port the following profile number will be executed automatically ON When alarm is detect
293. t the profile and execute all commands within this specified profile B Syntax LOGR profile 1 profile 2 B Param profile Specified profile number between 1 to 20 B Example LOGR 10 Run all commands inside profile 10 Mercury gt help logr Usage Run Specified Profiles Syntax LOGR profile 1 profile 2 Params profile profile number between 1 and 20 Mercury gt logr 10 1 Mercury gt idsl la op 0 Mercury gt idsl 1b op 4 Mercury gt link lc act 2 Mercury el fr 0 cas 0 tcrc 0 rerc 0 Mercury gt clk 3a 4a Master 3A Secondary 4 Active master Figure 3 31 LOGR Command Screen 3 6 31 Logv Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 B Purpose Select the profile and display all commands within this specified profile B Syntax profile B Param profile Specified profile number between 1 to 20 B Example 10Display all commands inside profile 10 Mercury gt help logv Usage View Contents of a Profile Syntax LOGV profile Params profile profile number between 1 and 20 Mercury gt logv 10 profile 10 M800 gt idsl 1a op 0 idsl 1b op 4 link 1c act 2 el 0 cas 0 tcrc 0 rcrc 0 1 3a 4a Figure 3 32 LOGV Command Screen 85 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring 3 6 32 Net Command B Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3820 B Purpose Mercury Series Product supports Router module and for Mercury 800
294. table and return to the idle mode porta The indicated source porta tsa The indicated time slot number in porta portb The indicated destination portb tsb The indicated time slot number in portb count Number of time slot should be connected with each other Default value is 1 fp is available in El Fiber and IDSL card It is for user to assign 1 time slot to transfer and view the remote site Mercury s front panel LED indicators and Alarm status at local site via this assigned time slot B Example 110 3 6 53 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring 1 13 12 Cross connect port 1A time slot 1 amp 2 to port 3A time slot 1 amp 2 so the count is 2 XT 3a 11 4a 21 10 Cross connect port 3A time slot 11 20 to port 4A time slot 21 30 sequentially totally 10 time slots for each port so the count is 10 XT 3a 31 fp e Setup port 3A time slot 31 to transmit the remote site Mercury s front panel status XV View port time slot assignment table Mercury gt help xt Usage Setup Connection Timeslot Syntax XT mode porta tsa fp portb tsb fp count Params mode L low latency F frame integrity V voice conversion I idle porta port identifier tsa time slot number portb port identifier tsb time slot number fp front panel count number of timeslot connected Notes 1 default value of count is 1 2 default mode is frame integri
295. ter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring 0 force 1 when sync default 2 remote RTS 3 off Channel CTS signal 0 forceon 1 local RTS default TxC and RxC clock polarity 0 normal default 1 inverted Local loopback Remote loopback 0 disable default 1 enable Enable the port combined funciton when enable this funciton the combined port will occupy 1 time slot and share the bandwidth of 64 Kbps So each of the assigned combinative ports can up to 9600bps only while choosing to 3 or 4 CC B Example 0 none default ab combined ab combined amp cd combined abc combined gt U N abcd combined V24 mod 2 spd 3 3 e Setup the 4P V24 card on port 6A to speed 9600bps and Async mode 8 data bits 1 stop bit none parity and none flow control Enable the combined function for port 6A 6B and 6C that will occupy 1 time slot so that the maximum speed for port 6A 6B and 6C only can up to 9600bps V24 6b mod 1 spd 0 ded 1 cts 1 e Setup port 6B to speed 1200bps and Async mode 7 data bits 1 stop bit none parity and none flow control the DCD signal will be on when it 18 in sync with remote site V 24 card and CTS signal will follow the local RTS signal V24 6c mod 0 spd 2 e Setup port 6C to speed 4800bps and Sync mode V24 6d mod 0 spd 4 e Setup port 6D to speed 19200bps and Sync mode 103 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring
296. ter Module Version 2 14 System PPP FR RIP Route Table Security NAT Filter SNMP DHCP Setup RIP Option Enter select ESC previous menu lt left gt right TAB next item Routed Disable Mode Passive LAN WAN AUX Send Ver RIP 1 RIP 1 RIP 1 Recv Ver RIP 1 amp 2 RIP 1 amp 2 RIP 1 amp 2 Default Route 0 1 0 1 0 1 Horizon SPLIT SPLIT SPLIT Next Hop advertise No No No Sub Accept Yes Yes Yes Sub Advertise Yes Yes Yes Press SPACE BAR to Change Value Figure 5 34 The sub menu of RIP function Routed Enable or Disable the RIP function for all interfaces Disable Disable the RIP routing protocol Enable Enable the RIP routing protocol Mode The interface can execute passive or active RIP When executing passive RIP the interface revises its routing table based on the routing update information it receives but does not advertise self ro uting information to other routers When configured for active RIP at specific interface that acts as a full router it not only listens for updates but also advertises its routing table information every 30 seconds Passive Enable Passive RIP Receive RIP packet only Active Enable Active RIP Receive and send RIP table Send Version Controls the version s of RIP advertisements Available with active RIP only OFF Disable the version s of RIP advertisement RIP 1 Enable t
297. th that IP address returns its physical address so it can receive the transmission Asynchronous Transfer Mode International standard for cell relay in which multiple Service types such as voice video or data are conveyed in fixed length 53 byte cells Fixed length cells allow cell processing to occur in hardware thereby reducing transit delays ATM is designed to take advantage of high speed transmission media such as E3 SONET and T3 Authentication Proof that the information came from the user or location that repeatedly sent it One example of authenticating software is through digital signature Bandwidth This is the capacity on a link usually measured in bits per second bps Bridging Bridging provides LAN to LAN frame forwarding services between two or more LANs Frames from one LAN are forwarded across a bridge to a connected LAN Bridging works is similar to the way repeaters work except that bridges forward frame based on their MAC address CBR Constant Bit Rate An ATM Forum Q o S class created for use in ATM network CBR is used for communications on precision clocking to guarantee trustworthy delivery CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol is an alternative protocol that avoids sending password over the wire by using a challenge response technical Class A network Part of Internet Protocol hierarchical addressing scheme Class A networks have only 8 bits for defining net
298. the rear panel of the product Caution It s strongly recommended that you should connect the PG Protective Ground screw on your AC Power to the earth ground system of your building Locate the Mercury Series Product no further than 50 feet 15 24 meters from your data terminal equipment and within 6 feet 1 83 meters of a grounded AC outlet furnishing the required power Install the Mercury in a clean area that is free from extreme environmental changes Keep enough space in the front and rear for operator access and cable clearance Caution To avoid overheating the Mercury Series Product do not place anything within 1 inch 2 54 cm of the Mercury unit and do not place multiple Mercury units right next to each other Mercury 800 Front Panel Description The front panel of Mercury 800 enclosure includes the status indicators on each interface module and buttons as shows on Figure 2 1 Table 2 1 describes the function in detailed MERCURY 800 L L Figure 2 1 Front Panel view of Mercury 800 Chapter 2 Installation LED Indicator n Status Description Buttons Card is ready in the indicated slot Red or alarm occurred in slot 3 and 4 only Blinking Indicates this slot is under testing mode for slot 3 4 Off Card is unavailable Green protocol is UP Blinking When data is being sent received Off PPP protocol is DOWN Green Ethernet is connected Blinking When data is bein
299. to it Ports can be defined by specific hardware POTS Plain Old Telephone Service is the analog telephone service that runs over copper twisted pair wires and is based on the original Bell telephone system Twisted pair wires connect homes and businesses to a neighborhood central office This is called the local loop The central loop The central office is connected to other central offices and long distance facilities 259 Appendix E KEYWORD PPP EXPLANATION Point to point PPP encapsulates and transmits IP Internet protocol data gram over serial point to point links PPP works with other protocol such as IPX Internet work Packet Exchange RIP Routing Information Protocol is an interior or intra domain routing protocol that uses the distance vector routing algorithms RIP is used on the Internet and is common in the NetWare environment as a method for exchange routing information between routers Router A device that connects two networks together Routers monitor direct and filter information that passes between these networks Because of their location routers are a good place to install traffic or mail filter Routers are also prone to attacks because they contain a great deal of information about a network Server A computer or a software package that provides a specific kind of service to client software running on the computers SNMP System Network Management Protocol is a p
300. to view the statistics of each interface 213 The sub menu tree of Device Control 214 Figure 5 71 Figure 5 72 Figure 5 73 Figure 5 74 Figure 5 75 Figure 5 76 Figure 5 77 Figure 5 78 Figure 5 79 Figure A 1 Figure A 2 Figure A 3 Figure A 4 Figure A 5 Figure A 6 Figure A 7 Figure A 8 Figure A 9 Figure A 10 Figure A 11 Figure A 12 Figure A 13 Figure A 14 Figure A 15 Figure A 16 Figure A 17 Figure A 18 Mercury Series User s Manual Rev 1 6 The sub menu of Warm Start 224 12222 215 sub menu of Cold Start menu 2222 12 2 215 The sub menu of Restore Default 215 The sub menu of Firmware Upgrade 2 216 The Firmware Upgrade Menu ice Deb desta deste 217 Success to upgrade the Firmware 22444000 217 The sub menu tree of Diagnosis 218 The sub menu of Ping PROP riescono ts a Etant EpL egets eoo ns 218 The sub menu of Information 219 SOS n eut oT E B REM M MEE 224 H2 sco ductum 224 RS 530 Data Interface module for Mercury 3600 225 RS 530 X 21 Adapting Cable for Mercury 3600
301. ty if not specified 3 make sure you have installed A u conversion card if voice conversion mode is selected 4 press uptright key to see remote front panel 5 fp is available for T1 El Fiber and IDSL card Mercury xt 1a 13a 12 Mercury xt 3a 11 4a 21 10 Mercury xt 3a 31 fp Mercury xv 3a ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Port 3A 5000 1 001 1 002 5008 xxxxxx xxxxxx 4A 021 4A 022 4A 023 4 024 4 025 5016 4A 026 4 027 4A 028 4 029 4A 030 xxxxxx XXXXXX XXXXXX TS024 XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX FP 000 low latency frame integrity voice conversion o loopback x idle z DACS ch loss amp combined channel Figure 3 54 XT Command Screen XV Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 Purpose Display the cross connect table for the indicated port Syntax XV port fp Param port Port identifier for the indicated port fp The remote front panel display function B Example 111 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring XV3a View port time slot assignment table la View port 1A time slot assignment table 4 View port 4A time slot assignment table XV fp View the indicated port for fp function Mercury gt help xv Usage View Connection Table Syntax XV port
302. ule 2 DC Input voltage DC 36 72V Output voltage DC 5V tolerance 0 05V load 20mA 6A Power Consumption Maximum Power Consumption of Mercury Series Product Mercury 800 36W Mercury 3600 15W Mercury 3600 40W Mercury 3820 42 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 3 6 Electromagnetic Spec B FCC Part 15 Class B ENS0082 1 B EN50082 2 950 1 4 Module Information Mercury Series products are modular systems with various equipped I O modules They can be equipped with the specific I O modules in different physical slots Please refer to following Table 1 5 1 for the compatible combinations V Available X Non Available Module Mercury 3600 Mercury 3820 RT Mercury 800 Slot 1 4 Slot 5 Slot 1 3 Slot 4 5 Slot10 when In band TUE 6 8 9 10 NMS used va E1 4CB U y PES A P 2portsonly E1 2CB U Y v i Y i i Y Y i Y i 2portsonly T1 2CB Y Y x Y Y 2P Data Y Y d x am EAE x t t t 4P Data x Y i x Y i x i x 1P V24 DS id x x v i Y i Z T T T 4P V24 ud ff YS oq Y Y i i i X50 MUX 5 4 L X50 MUX 4 Goan ye o Y y C i i i i i i X50 DACS 2 7 i JA i 7 i 1 Fiber 1 125 y Y Fiber 2 Y Y i x Y Fiber B Y i x Y Y Fiber 1V Y x Y Y Fiber 1VW Y x i x Y i 2 i x
303. up gt page down ESC abort Monitoring Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d Figure 5 67 The sub menu to view current routing status information NetMask It represents the IP net mask of the destination IP address Nexthop It represents the IP address of the next router for transmission of the IP datagram to the destination network segment Iface Identifies IP routing to the corresponding interface Type First character Status U The route is valid up and in use Second character Source I The route is a direct connection R The route is established from RIP information S The route is a static route Destination It specifies the IP network address of the final destination If 0 0 0 0 appears in the field this entry specifies the Default Gateway of route D The route is invalid down and has a metric of 16 RIP infinity Table 5 23 Descriptions of Routing Table of Monitoring menu 5 7 4 3 ARP Table Status The ARP table lists the LAN MAC addresses which are learned by the Ch r module The router module learns a device MAC address when IP traffic is generated between the router and other devices and this table is found in the Monitoring ARP table menu 212 Chapter 5 Router Configuration Monitoring Mercury Channelized Router Version 1 05d Interface Routing Table ARP Table Statistics View ARP Table IP Address Ethernet MAC 1 172 16 3 58 00E0181B4E2E 2 172 16 6 1
304. w latency The indicated time slot crossed to another time slot under low latency mode when executing the cross connect command with parameter mode L This is 112 3 6 54 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring in some case that the data transmit with lower delay and does not care about the internal structure of data m frame integrity The indicated time slot crossed under frame integrity mode when executing the cross connect command with parameter mode F Therefore this will keep the data with original frame structure and the inegrity of the serial data lt voice conversion The indicated time slot crossed under the voice conversion mode This symbol will show while executing the cross connect command with parameter mode for voice application o loopback This symbol will show you the indicated channel is under the loopback mode The incoming signal is loopback to the received signal through the DXC data pump by executing the command XC port a port a refer to Section 4 4 2 Loopback function B x idle The indicated time slot is under idle state and does not connect to any destination Executing the cross connect command with parameter mode P 2 DACs ch loss This symbol shows the indicated channel is occupied by another channel and always happens when enable the extension slot 5 for Mercury 3600 by executing the XSLT command refe
305. w program code in the TFTP Server Table 5 26 Descriptions of Firmware Upgrade Table of Device Control menu 216 Chapter 5 Router Configuration TFTP is an UDP IP client server application The unit is a client TFTP which starts running after the old firmware code is erased Operating on the opposite side of the client will be a TFTP server connected to the LAN or WAN interface via an IP network telnet 172 16 5 250 Warm Start Cold Start Restore Default Firmware Upgrade from TFTP Server Mercury Channelized Router Uersion 1 Firmware Upgrade Firmware Upgrade Server IP Address 172 16 2 52 1 Server File Name 01 88 bin 1 Dounload Code to Flash Memory Writing Data 58 ENTER select TAB next lt left gt right ESC previous menu Figure 5 75 The Firmware Upgrade menu exe telnet 172 16 5 250 WINN Tisystem3 Mercury Channelized Router Warm Start Cold Start Restore Default Firmware Upgrade from TFTP Server euice Control Firmware Upgrade z ki u 2 ceo e gt 1 Download process has replace flash memory with new code 2 You power cycle or cold start to activate new code Press ENTER to continue 2o 2o ENTER select TfiB next lt left gt right ESC previous menu Figure 5
306. ware and can only cross connected to Fiber1V or IPSHDSL card now KEY FUNCTION Four voice ports operate in 2 Wire 600 900 Ohm amp 4 Wire 600 Ohm interfaces Supports E amp M Signaling type I II III IV V Dip Switch Setting Line Interface Impedance Jumper Setting to select E amp M type Trunk interface to PBX or key system Supports loopback path in analog or digital Software Configurable Transmission Level Points TLPs for both Transmit amp Receive paths NOTE In Type I V the Common Ground must exist between PBX Side A and Line Equipment Side B o Electrical Characteristic E amp M DC INTERFACE Physical Interface DB44 Connector Configuration Side B Signaling Unit Side or E Lead Originate Signaling Mode E amp M types I through V M Lead The current detector provides an impedance of approximately 3 3k about 14 5mA to signaling ground The On hook and Off hook state depend on the detector circuit SB Lead The battery through a current limiting that limit the current to 30mA E Lead The lead connected to SG Lead in the Type 2 and Type 4 SG Lead The lead connected to E Lead in the Type 2 and Type 4 ANALOG INTERFACE 2W INTERFACE Comply with ITU T G 712 Impedance 600 9000 Selectable Return Loss 300Hz 600Hz 12dB 600Hz 3400Hz gt 15dB Input level 0 to 5 dBm Software Configurable in steps of 1dB A gt D Default 0dBm Output level 2 to 8 dBm Software
307. works and 24 bits for defining hosts on each network Class B network Part of Internet Protocol hierarchical addressing scheme Class B networks have only 16 bits for defining networks and 16 bits for defining hosts on each network Class C network Part of Internet Protocol hierarchical addressing scheme Class C networks have only 24 bits for defining networks and 8 bits for defining hosts on each network Command Line Interface Allow you to configure TAINET s products with maximum CLI flexibility Central Office A CO is a facility that serves local telephone subscribers In the CO co subscriber s lines are joined to switching equipment that allows them to connect to each other for both local and long distance calls CPE Customer Premise Equipment is privately owned telecommunication equipment at an organization s site that is attached to the telecommunication network CPE 257 Appendix E KEYWORD EXPLANATION equipment includes routers modem PBX telephones and video communication equipment C A cable that wires a pin to its opposite pin for example RX is wired to TX This rossover A 2 E cable connects two similar device for example two data terminal equipment DTE Ethernet Cable or data communication equipment DCE devices Data Communication Equipment is typically a modem or other type of DCE communication device The DCE sits between the DET data terminal equipment and
308. xt Port connectors on the extremity Mercury units Ring will automatically recover when the faults have been fixed 89 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring B Syntax RP no mode last next ts B Param number of ring protection 1 4 mode Identify the role of Mercury acting on the nodes Normal mode will deactivate the ring protection function e n normal default e m master e 5 slave o last Last port identifier for indicated Ring IN port next Next port identifier for indicated Ring OUT port ts Identify the clock operating mode 0 disable manual clock settings will able to assign the differnet clock source at slave nodes system by user himself e Or identify which time slot number to be carried with clock source T1 1 24 1 1 31 avoid TS16 if under CAS framing Fiber 0 127 This auto mode will guide the entire ring nodes to follow the same clock source from Master node B Example 1 4 e Setup Mercury as the Master node in the 1 Ring and port 3a is the last port and port 4a is the next port Mercury help rp Usage Setup Ring Protection Syntax RP no mode last next ts Params mode n normal m master s slaver last last port identifier next next port identifier ts clock transmission timeslot O disable or T1 1 24 E1 1 31 FIBER 0 127 Notes 1 view current setup if no parameter 2 for T1 1 and FIBER card only Mercury rp 1 m 3a 4a
309. y Errored Seconds over 15 minutes threshold 15 UA Unavailable Second Informative alert PM Major Counting Unavailable Second over 15 minutes threshold 1H ES Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Errored Seconds over hour threshold 1H SES Severely Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Severely Errored Seconds over hour Chapter 4 Maintenance Message Description Corrective Actions Type Class threshold 1H UA Unavailable Second Informative alert PM Major Counting unavailable Second over 1 hour threshold 1D ES Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Errored Seconds over day threshold 1D SES Severely Errored Seconds Informative alert PM Major Counting Severely Errored Seconds over day threshold 1D UA Unavailable Second Informative alert PM Major Counting Unavailable Second over 1 day threshold SPIKE SPIKE Detected fail on Re boot system Alarm Minor reading amp writing with Check any unsettled PEB 3265 chipset over two voltage on the phone times system still working line after initialization FRAME INT Frame Interrupt Detected Have the clock source and Alarm Minor frame interrupt during link checked operation 3265 RETR 3265 Retry Access 3265 Re boot system Alarm Minor Y chipset timeout re try effort 15 taken ALM OFF
310. y Series Figure 1 3 Channel relocation and Digital Cross Connect Application In Channel relocation and digital access cross connect system for both voice and data applications the channels of a and or E1 trunk are moved from one time slot to another in accordance with user s programming These capabilities are available in addition to the other capabilities described in the previous sections The channel relocation and digital cross connect services can be performed between dissimilar trunks e g between 1 and T1 trunks or between similar links e g between two trunks or between two trunks The Mercury system will also perform when required the conversion of the signaling formats 1 e will convert robbed bit signaling to CEPT channel associated signaling and will move the channel signaling information to the appropriate location in the signaling frame in parallel with the change in channel numbers Table 4 1 lists the alarm message generated by the E1 module specifies their class major or minor type alarm or performance monitoring and explains their meaning The Mercury systems can be used as programmable 1 1 converters A typical system configuration is shown in Figure 1 3 To perform the required conversion the Mercury system must include both module and E1 modules and the time slots must be routed as required between a T1 port and an 1 port 9 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 2 4 Fractiona
311. ystem will keep detecting the alarm on port 1A if the alarm is cleared profile 1 will be reloaded and all traffic will be reverted back to original status This application will prevent any loss of important data and keep it always alive 122 Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring B Structure i High Main Loop High a 1 Z tA Priority 1B 4 4 d 1B Low Protect Loop Low 4 Priority Tic 4 Priority 888 4 1D Figure 3 64 1 1 Revertive Protection with priority Actions on Port 1A Alarm Alarm off gt on on 2 off Run profile 2 profile 1 xc 1b 1c xc 1a 1b xc 1c 1d Table 3 17 Alarm status for CP Command B Configurations Mercury A e Clk int Setup to internal clock Mercury B e 1 Setup the master clock received from port the slave clock is from port 1C Mercury A amp B e Logr 1 Run profile 1 when following profiles are created Profiles saved in both Mercury A amp B Logb Starting logging command scripts Xc la 1b Cross port 1A to 1B higher priority data Xc le ld e Cross port 1C to 1D lower priority data Cp la off 1 on 2 sw 1 Enable the call profile facility on port if the criteria of Major or Minor alarm is detected system will execute profile 2 and change the higher priority traffic to
312. ystem will send a AIS all ones signal to the line when active ACT Provide the functionality to enable disable the alarm or DAC service and this command is only invalid for A u law conversion card act 0 enable alarm and DAC default 1 disable alarm Chapter 3 Configuration amp Monitoring 2 disable alarm and DAC out of service B Example LINK 1b act 2 e Disable the alarm and DAC function and move into out of service mode of port 1B LINK 1 1 Enable the local loopback for port 3A Mercury gt help link Usage Setup Link Parameters Syntax LINK port LL sw RL sw ACT act Params port port identifier LL local loopback RL remote loopback ACT setup alarm amp DAC switch Sw 0 disable 1 enable 2 enable with AIS act 0 alarm amp DAC on 1 alarm off 2 alarm amp DAC on Notes 1 sw 2 only valid for LL 2 ACT option is only invalid for A u conversion card Mercury link 1b act 2 Mercury stat 1b TYPE 4IDSL CLK NO ACTIVE Mercury gt link 3a 11 1 Mercury gt stat 3a TYPE 1E1 75 CLK YES ACTIVE ALM amp DAC Configuration LL yes RL no RCRC yes TCRC yes SIGNAL CCS FRAME FAS CV CV HAUL short Figure 3 24 LINK Command Screen 3 6 22 Logb Command Accommodate Mercury 800 3600 3600 3820 B Purpose When performing this command system will start to memorize and save the following entered commands into the memory Stop and save into the specified profile number and prof
313. zed Routing Application E1 T1 Channelize Routing Application Management Headquarters m zs 4 Mercury Series b 33 SNMP Agent Figure 1 7 E1 T1 Channelized Routing Application Mercury with Channelized Router Module will provide the IP routing up to a maximum 32 PPP links with 64 Kbps data rate or any combinations with time slots cross connected to the DDN E1 T1 V 35 or RS 530 This will provide a flexible and cost effective solution to the specific requirements of the network management or small branch office routing solution 1 2 8 T1 E1 Fiber Ring Protected Application i i T1E1 Fiber Ring Protected Application i i b WokhgPah i i gt Path Figure 1 8 T1 E1 Fiber Ring Protected Application T1 El Fiber ring protection is the physical and logical ring topology Nodes on the 12 1 2 9 Chapter 1 Introduction network are physically connected via El Fiber interface to a Mercury tributary card Mercury has E1 Fiber connections to connect to the nodes and it also has special connections called Last Port and Next Port to connect to other Mercury units T1 E1 Fiber ring protect require a start node which is designated as Master mode all other nodes connect to the chain act in the Slave mode This mechanism will automatically distinguish all node connections If one of the links fails due to cable faults or problems the Main Ring

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

SONANCE THINLINE IN-CEILING SPEAKERS  関連PDF1 KP-06 プリンター 取扱説明書  Sony HT-BE1 User's Manual  Deutsch - Entero Voice Alarm  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file